Download Kyocera 3035 Copier User Manual

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

160

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

261

262

263

264

265

266

267

268

269

270

271

272

273

274

275

276

277

278

279

280

281

282

283

284

285

286

287

288

289

290

291

292

Transcript

3035
4035
5035
* The above illustration includes the optional original cover.
Please read the Operation Guide before using the copier
Keep it close to the copier for easy reference
<IMPORTANT>
The instructions contained herein are based on the 30 cpm (copies-per-minute) 3035 copier, the 40 cpm 4035 copier
and the 50 cpm 5035 copier.
NOTE:
This Operation Guide contains information that corresponds to using both the inch and metric versions of this copier.
Within the text we have generally indicated messages by listing that for the inch version followed, in brackets, by the
corresponding information for the metric version. However, when a message is essentially the same, or when the
difference is only one of upper- and lower-case spelling, we have listed the information specifically as it is displayed in
the inch version of this machine.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic
or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system, without
permission in writing from the Publisher.
Legal Restriction On Copying
• It may be prohibited to copy copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.
• It is prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign currencies.
• Copying other items may be prohibited.
Introduction to this Operation Guide
The explanations contained in this Operation Guide have been
separated into different sections in order to allow even those using a
copier for the first time to use this machine efficiently, properly and
with relative ease.
A basic introduction to each section can be found below for reference.
Refer to the related section when using this copier.
Section 1 IMPORTANT! PLEASE READ FIRST.
This section contains explanations on information that is necessary
for you to know prior to using this copier for the first time after
purchase.
For example, it contains notes and cautions on installation and
operation that should be strictly obeyed in order to ensure its safe and
proper operation.
Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS
This section contains explanations on the names and functions of the
parts of the copier and its operation panel.
Section 3 PREPARATIONS
This section contains explanations on procedures for loading copy
paper.
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION
This section contains explanations on the basic procedures required
to make simple copies.
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
This section contains explanations on using the various convenient
functions of this copier.
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT
FUNCTIONS
This section contains explanations on the procedures for registering
frequently used business forms and documents on the optional Hard
Disk, printing them out when desired, and managing printing
conditions.
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT
This section contains explanations on the procedures for changing the
various default settings available for adjusting the copier to fit your
copy needs and on the procedures for managing copy us.
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
This section contains explanations on the optional equipment that are
available for use with this copier.
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING
This section contains explanations on handling problems that may
occur during operation of this copier, such as when an error indication
appears or if a paper jam occurs.
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION
This section contains explanations on maintaining the copier in proper
condition and on replacing the toner container, as well as information
on the specifications for this copier.
i
CONTENTS
Section 1
IMPORTANT! PLEASE READ FIRST. .. 1-1
5.
Adding a space next to the copy images for making notes
[Memo mode] .......................................................................... 5-9
6.
Making copies with clean edges [Border erase modes] ........ 5-11
(1) Erasing blemishes from edges of copies
(Sheet erase mode) ....................................................... 5-11
(2) Erasing blemishes from the edges and middle of copies
made from books (Book erase mode) ........................... 5-11
(3) Erasing blemishes from the edges of copies using individual
border settings (Individual border erase mode) ............. 5-12
7.
Fitting the image of either two or four originals onto a single copy
page [Combine/Merge Copy modes] ..................................... 5-13
(1) 2 in 1 .............................................................................. 5-13
(2) 4 in 1 .............................................................................. 5-13
8.
Printing page numbers on copies
[Print page numbers mode] ................................................... 5-16
9.
Overlaying one image over another [Form overlay mode] ..... 5-20
CAUTION LABELS ................................................................... 1-1
INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS ............................................. 1-2
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE ...................................................... 1-3
Section 2
NAMES OF PARTS ............................... 2-1
1.
Main body ................................................................................ 2-1
2.
Operation panel ....................................................................... 2-3
3.
Touch panel ............................................................................. 2-5
Section 3
PREPARATIONS ................................... 3-1
1.
Loading paper .........................................................................
(1) Note when adding paper ..................................................
(2) Loading paper into the drawer[cassette] ..........................
(3) Loading paper into the multi-bypass tray .........................
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-3
10. Making booklets from sheet originals
[Booklet/Stitching mode] ........................................................ 5-22
11. Making booklets from book originals
[Book to Booklet mode] ......................................................... 5-26
12. Automatic sorting of copy sets without the Document Finisher
[Sort/Finished mode] ............................................................. 5-29
13. Auto rotation function ............................................................. 5-30
14. Adding a front and/or back cover to your copy sets
[Cover mode] ......................................................................... 5-31
Section 4
BASIC OPERATION .............................. 4-1
15. Original size selection mode ................................................. 5-34
16. Feeding paper as a backing sheet for OHP transparencies
[Transparency + backing sheet mode] ................................... 5-36
1.
Basic copying procedure ......................................................... 4-1
17. Inverting black and white [Invert mode] ................................. 5-38
2.
Enlarging/reducing the copy image .........................................
(1) Auto magnification selection mode ..................................
(2) Zoom mode .....................................................................
(3) Preset zoom mode ...........................................................
(4) XY zoom mode ................................................................
18. Making mirror image copies [Mirror image mode] ................. 5-39
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
3.
Interrupt copying ...................................................................... 4-9
4.
Job reservation ...................................................................... 4-10
5.
Energy-saving modes ............................................................ 4-11
19. Making a test copy prior to large volume copying
[Proof mode] .......................................................................... 5-40
20. Making more of the same copies after a copy job is finished
[Repeat copy mode] .............................................................. 5-42
(1) Registering a copy job for repeat copying ...................... 5-42
(2) Printing out with the repeat copy mode ......................... 5-43
21. Copying a large volume of originals in one operation
[Batch scanning mode] .......................................................... 5-47
22. Saving on toner use [Eco print mode] ................................... 5-48
Section 5
OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS .... 5-1
1.
Making 2-sided copies from various types of originals [2-sided
copy modes] ............................................................................ 5-1
(1) Making 2-sided copies from a 2-sided original ................ 5-1
(2) Making 2-sided copies from an
open-faced (books, etc.) original ..................................... 5-1
(3) Making 2-sided copies from one-sided originals .............. 5-2
2.
Copying two-page originals onto separate sheets
[Page separation/Split copy modes] ........................................ 5-4
(1) Page separation/Split copy from book originals ............... 5-4
(2) Page separation/Split copy from 2-sided originals ........... 5-4
3.
Making a margin space on the copies [Margin mode] ............. 5-6
(1) Standard margin .............................................................. 5-6
(2) Separate front and back margin settings ......................... 5-6
4.
Centering the copy image [Centering/Image shift mode] ........ 5-8
ii
23. Original set direction .............................................................. 5-49
24. Memorizing frequently used settings [Program function] ......
(1) Registering a program ...................................................
(2) Using programmed settings to make copies ..................
(3) Changing a registered program name ...........................
(4) Deleting a registered program .......................................
5-50
5-50
5-51
5-51
5-52
25. Registration keys ................................................................... 5-53
(1) Registering a function or mode under a function key .... 5-53
(2) Deleting a registration key ............................................. 5-55
26. Easily add covers and insert sheets between various sets of
originals in one operation [Job build mode] ........................... 5-57
(1) Using the job build mode ............................................... 5-57
(2) Selecting the settings and functions ................................ 5-62
CONTENTS
Section 6
DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT
MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS ............... 6-1
1.
Document management functions ..........................................
(1) What are the “document management” functions? ..........
(2) Form registration ..............................................................
(3) Shared data box ..............................................................
(4) Synergy print boxes .........................................................
2.
Output management functions ..............................................
(1) What are the “output management” functions? ..............
(2) Display of the output management functions .................
(3) The “Print status” screen ................................................
Section 8
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ...................... 8-1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-4
6-9
6-20
6-20
6-21
6-22
Section 7
COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 7-1
1.
2.
3.
Copy management mode ........................................................ 7-1
(1) Copy management procedures ....................................... 7-2
(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen .............. 7-3
(3) Editing copy management information ............................ 7-4
(4) Checking the copy management counts ........................ 7-21
(5) Turning the copy management function ON/OFF .......... 7-25
(6) Changing the copy management default settings .......... 7-25
(7) Making copies when copy management is turned ON .. 7-37
Default settings ......................................................................
(1) Machine default settings ................................................
(2) Accessing the machine default settings .........................
(3) Making machine default settings ...................................
(4) Copy default settings .....................................................
(5) Accessing the copy default settings ...............................
(6) Making copy default settings .........................................
7-38
7-38
7-41
7-42
7-59
7-62
7-63
Multi-bypass tray paper settings ............................................ 7-87
(1) Paper size and type ....................................................... 7-87
(2) Selecting other standard sizes ....................................... 7-88
4.
Original size registration ........................................................ 7-90
5.
Drum refresh ......................................................................... 7-91
6.
Checking the total counter and printing out the counter
report ..................................................................................... 7-93
7.
Box management default settings .........................................
(1) Box settings ...................................................................
(2) Accessing the box management default settings ..........
(3) Making box management default settings .....................
7-94
7-94
7-94
7-95
8.
Hard disk management ......................................................... 7-99
9.
Report print out .................................................................... 7-101
Document Processor ....................................................... 8-1
Paper Feeder ................................................................... 8-5
Paper Feeder ................................................................... 8-5
Document Finisher ........................................................... 8-5
Document Finisher ........................................................... 8-9
Document Finisher ........................................................... 8-9
Built-in Finisher ................................................................ 8-9
Job Separator ................................................................ 8-11
Hard Disk ....................................................................... 8-11
Key Counter ................................................................... 8-12
Document Tray ............................................................... 8-12
Printer Kit ....................................................................... 8-12
Printer/Scanner Kit ........................................................ 8-12
Fax Kit ............................................................................ 8-12
Section 9
TROUBLESHOOTING ........................... 9-1
1.
If one of the following messages is displayed .......................... 9-1
2.
If one of these indicators lights or flashes ............................... 9-3
3.
When paper misfeeds .............................................................. 9-4
(1) Cautions ........................................................................... 9-4
(2) Removal procedures ........................................................ 9-4
4.
If other trouble occurs ............................................................ 9-13
Section 10
MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION
INFORMATION .................................... 10-1
1.
Cleaning the copier ............................................................... 10-1
2.
Replacing the toner container and waste toner box .............. 10-3
3.
Specifications ........................................................................ 10-7
4.
Environmental Specifications ................................................ 10-9
5.
Installing the optional equipment ......................................... 10-10
Appendix: Functions and settings combination chart .................. 10-12
10. Changing the language used for messages ........................ 7-103
11. Entering characters ............................................................. 7-104
(1) Character input screens ............................................... 7-104
(2) Character input procedure ........................................... 7-106
iii
● MAKING FULL USE OF THE COPIER'S ADVANCED FUNCTIONS
1
Having the copier automatically select
copy paper of the same size as the
original
<Auto paper selection mode>
(Page 4-2)
2
3
Making clear reproductions of
photographs
<Image quality selection>
(Page 4-3)
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
Various functions for making enlarged
and reduced copies
■ Enlarging/reducing the copy image to fit the
size of paper in a specified drawer[cassette]
<Auto magnification selection mode>
(Page 4-5)
11"✕17" (A3)
abc
defghi
jkmn
8 1/2"✕11" (A4)
129% (141%)
5 1/2"✕8 1/2" (A5)
■ One-touch selection of the copy
magnification ratio
<Preset zoom mode>
(Page 4-7)
■ Enlarging/reducing the copy image to a
desired size between 25% and 400%
<Zoom mode> (Page 4-6)
70%
■ Enlarging/reducing the length and width of
the image to separate magnification ratios
<XY zoom mode>
(Page 4-8)
141%
400%
50%
25%
64% (70%)
M
M
400%
4
X%
Making 2-sided copies from various types
of originals
<2-sided copy modes>
(Page 5-1)
1
2
3
4
5
4
2
3
1
2
7
Centering the copy image
<Centering/Image shift mode>
(Page 5-8)
10 Fitting the image of either two or four
originals onto a single copy page
<Combine/Merge Copy modes>
(Page 5-13)
8
1
1
Creating a margin on the copies
<Margin mode>
(Page 5-6)
2
Adding a space next to the copy images
for making notes
<Memo mode>
(Page 5-9)
11 Printing page numbers on the copies
9
Making copies with clean edges
<Border erase modes>
(Page 5-11)
12 Overlaying one image over another
<Print page numbers mode>
(Page 5-16)
A
<Form overlay mode>
(Page 5-20)
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
-1-2-3-4-
iv
6
12 1 2
5
5
Copying each image of open-faced
(books, etc.) or 2-sided originals onto
separate sheets
<Page separation/Split copy modes>
(Page 5-4)
A
B
C
A
B
C
Y%
13 Making booklets from sheet originals
14 Making booklets from books
<Booklet/Stitching mode>
(Page 5-22)
15 Automatic sorting of copy sets without the
<Book to Booklet mode>
(Page 5-26)
Document Finisher
<Sort/Finished mode>
(Page 5-29)
3
2
1
3
3
2
2
1
1
a
3
2
1
b
a
b
1
1
1
3
2
2
2
1
2
AB
AB
3
3
3
16 Automatic rotation of the copy image
<Auto rotation function>
(Page 5-30)
17 Adding a front and/or back cover to your
copy sets
<Cover mode>
(Page 5-31)
1
19 Inverting black and white
2
3
4
5
copy job is finished
<Repeat copy mode>
(Page 5-42)
2
5
3
1
21 Making a test copy prior to large volume
copying
<Proof mode>
(Page 5-40)
one operation
<Batch scanning mode>
(Page 5-47)
25 Memorizing frequently used settings
<Program function>
(Page 5-50)
1
6
4
23 Copying a large volume of originals in
A B C
2
B
A
6
<Mirror image mode>
(Page 5-39)
22 Making more of the same copies after a
3 4 5
OHP transparencies
<Transparency + backing sheet mode>
(Page 5-36)
20 Making mirror image copies
<Invert mode>
(Page 5-38)
18 Feeding paper as a backing sheet for
A
24 Saving on toner use
<Eco print mode>
(Page 5-48)
B
C
26 Easily add covers and insert sheets
between various sets of originals in one
operation
<Job build mode>
(Page 5-57)
27 Registering images to be used for form
overlay
<Form registration>
(Page 6-1)
6
7
8
v
28 Managing shared forms
<Shared data box>
(Page 6-4)
29 Printing out different stored originals in
one operation
<Synergy print boxes>
(Page 6-9)
31 Changing the language used in the touch 32 A full range of optional equipment is
panel
<Language selection function>
(Page 7-103)
English
30 Using department ID-codes to manage
the number of copies made by each
department
<Copy management mode>
(Page 7-1)
■ Paper Feeder (Page 8-5)
available
■ Document Processor (Page 8-1)
Español
■ Paper Feeder (Page 8-5)
■ Document Finisher (Page 8-5)
■ Document Finisher (Page 8-9)
■ Document Finisher (Page 8-9)
■ Built-in Finisher (Page 8-9)
■ Job Separator (Page 8-11)
■ Hard Disk (Page 8-11)
■ Key Counter (Page 8-12)
■ Document Tray (Page 8-12)
vi
■ Printer Kit (Page 8-12)
■ Printer/scanner Kit (Page 8-12)
■ Fax Kit (Page 8-12)
vii
We have determined as a participating company in the International
Energy Star Program that this product is compliant with the standards
laid out in the International Energy Star Program.
About the International Energy Star Program
International Energy Star Program has as its basic goals the
promotion of efficient energy use and the reduction of the
environmental pollution that accompanies energy consumption by
promoting the manufacture and sale of products that fulfill program
standards.
International Energy Star Program standards require that copies
come equipped with a “Low Power Mode” where energy consumption
is reduced after a certain amount of time elapses since the device
was last used, as well as an “Off Mode” where the device
automatically turns itself off after there is no activity within a set
amount of time. When the copier includes printer and fax functions,
the printer and fax must enter a “Low Power Mode” where power
consumption is automatically reduced after a certain amount of time
elapses since they were last used, and they must also support a
“Sleep Mode” where power consumption is reduced to a minimum
when there is no activity within a set amount of time.
This product is equipped with the following features as a result of its
compliance with International Energy Star Program standards.
● Low Power Mode
The device automatically enters “Low Power Mode” when 15 minutes
have passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no
activity that must pass before “Low Power Mode” is activated may be
lengthened. See “5. Energy-saving modes” on page 4-11 and “Auto
low power time” on page 7-48 for more information.
● Off Mode (Only when using the copier functions of this machine)
The device automatically enters “Off Mode” when 60 minutes have
passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no
activity that must pass before “Off Mode” is activated may be
lengthened. For more information see “5. Energy-saving modes” on
page 4-11 and “Auto sleep time” on page 7-47.
● Sleep Mode (If the copier has printer and/or facsimile function)
The device automatically enters “Sleep Mode” when 60 minutes have
passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no
activity that must pass before “Sleep Mode” is activated may be
lengthened. For more information see “5. Energy-saving modes” on
page 4-11 and “Auto sleep time” on page 7-47.
● Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function
The Energy Star Program encourages the use of 2-sided copying
which reduces the load on the environment and this device includes
2-sided copying as a standard function. For example, by copying two
1-sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a 2-sided copy, it is
possible to lower the amount of paper used.
For more information see “1. Making 2-sided copies from various types
of originals [2-sided copy modes]” on page 5-1.
● Paper Recycling
The Energy Star Program encourages the use of environmentally
friendly recycled paper. Your sales or service representative can
provide information about recommended paper types.
* When you are using the copier functions of this machine, replace all references to the “Sleep Mode” with the “Off Mode”.
viii
Please read this Operation Guide before using the copier. Keep it close to the copier
for easy reference.
The sections of this guide and parts of the copier marked with symbols are safety warnings meant
to protect the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage
of the copier. The symbols and their meanings are indicated below.
DANGER: Indicates that serious injury or even death will very possibly result from
insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention
to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient
attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
Symbols
The m symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention
are indicated inside the symbol.
................. [General warning]
................. [Warning of danger of electrical shock]
................. [Warning of high temperature]
The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics
of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol.
.................. [Warning of prohibited action]
................... [Disassembly prohibited]
The ● symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be
performed. Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol.
.................. [Alert of required action]
.................. [Remove the power plug from the outlet]
.................. [Always connect the copier to an outlet with a ground connection]
Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this
Operation Guide are illegible or if the guide itself is missing. (fee required)
ix
x
Section 1
IMPORTANT! PLEASE READ FIRST.
CAUTION LABELS
Caution labels have been attached to the copier at the following locations for safety purposes.
BE SUFFICIENTLY CAREFUL to avoid fire or electric shock when removing a paper jam or when replacing toner.
Label 1
High temperature inside. Do not
touch parts in this area, because
there is a danger of getting burned.
Label 4
High temperature inside.
Do not touch parts in this
area, because there is a
danger of getting burned.
Label 2
Do not incinerate toner and
toner container. Dangerous
sparks may cause burn. ......
Label 3
Moving parts inside. May cause
personal injury. Do not touch
moving parts. .................................
NOTE: DO NOT remove these labels.
1-1
INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
■ Environment
CAUTION
• Avoid placing the copier on or in locations which
are unstable or not level. Such locations may
cause the copier to fall down or fall over. This
type of situation presents a danger of personal
injury or damage to the copier. .............................
• During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount
does not cause any ill effect to one's health. If, however,
the copier is used over a long period of time in a poorly
ventilated room or when making an extremely large
number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To
maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is
suggested that the room be properly ventilated.
■ Power supply/Grounding the copier
• Avoid locations with humidity or dust and dirt. If
dust or dirt become attached to the power plug,
clean the plug to avoid the danger of fire or
electrical shock. ....................................................
WARNING
• Avoid locations near radiators, heaters, or other
heat sources, or locations near flammable items,
to avoid the danger of fire. ...................................
• DO NOT use a power supply with a voltage other
than that specified. Avoid multiple connections in
the same outlet. These types of situations
present a danger of fire or electrical shock. .........
• To keep the copier cool and facilitate changing of
parts and maintenance, allow access space as
shown below. Leave adequate space, especially
around the vents, to allow air to be properly
ventilated out of the copier. ..................................
Rea
r:
Le
=> ft:
30c 11 13
/16
m
"
=>11
/
Fr o
nt:
=>
100 39 3/8
cm "/
13/
16"/3
0cm
1
13/
1 6"
/30
cm
Other precautions
• Adverse environmental conditions may affect the safe
operation and performance of the copier. Install in an airconditioned room (recommended room temperature:
around 73.4°F (23°C), humidity: around 50%) and avoid
the following locations when selecting a site for the
copier.
. Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to
direct sunlight.
. Avoid locations with vibrations.
. Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.
. Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.
. Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
• Delicate floor material may be damaged if this product is
moved after installation.
1-2
• Always connect the copier to an outlet with a
ground connection to avoid the danger of fire or
electrical shock in case of an electric short. If an
earth connection is not possible, contact your
service representative. .........................................
Other precautions
• Connect the power plug to the closest outlet possible to
the copier.
Rig
ht: >
= 1
• Plug the power cord securely into the outlet. If
metallic objects come in contact with the prongs
on the plug, it may cause a fire or electric shock.
• The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect
device. Ensure that the socket/outlet is located/installed
near the equipment and is easily accessible.
■ Handling of plastic bags
WARNING
• Keep the plastic bags that are used with the
copier away from children. The plastic may cling
to their nose and mouth causing suffocation. .......
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE
■ Cautions when using the copier
WARNING
• DO NOT place metallic objects or containers with
water (flower vases, flower pots, cups, etc.) on or
near the copier. This of situation presents a
danger of fire or electrical shock should they fall
inside. ...................................................................
• DO NOT remove any of the covers from the
copier as there is a danger of electrical shock
from high voltage parts inside the copier. ............
• DO NOT damage, break or attempt to repair the
power cord. DO NOT place heavy objects on the
cord, pull it, bend it unnecessarily or cause any
other type of damage.
These types of situations present a danger of fire
or electrical shock. ...............................................
• NEVER attempt to repair or disassemble the
copier or its parts as there is a danger of fire,
electrical shock or damage to the laser. If the
laser beam escapes, there is a danger of it
causing blindness. ................................................
• If the copier becomes excessively hot, smoke
appears from the copier, there is an odd smell, or
any other abnormal situation occurs, there is a
danger of fire or electrical shock. Turn the power
switch OFF (O) immediately, BE ABSOLUTELY
CERTAIN to remove the power plug from the
outlet and then contact your service
representative. .....................................................
• If anything harmful (paper clips, water, other
fluids, etc.) falls into the copier, turn the power
switch OFF (O) immediately. Next, BE
ABSOLUTELY CERTAIN to remove the power
plug from the outlet to avoid the danger of fire or
electrical shock. Then contact your service
representative. .....................................................
CAUTION
• DO NOT pull the power cord when removing it
from the outlet. If the power cord is pulled, the
wires may become broken and there is a danger
of fire or electrical shock. (ALWAYS grasp the
power plug when removing the power cord from
the outlet.) ............................................................
• ALWAYS remove the power plug from the outlet
when moving the copier. If the power cord is
damaged, there is a danger of fire or electrical
shock. ...................................................................
• If the copier will not be used for a short period of
time (overnight, etc.), turn the power switch OFF
(O).
If it will not be used for an extended period of
time (vacations, etc.), remove the power plug
from the outlet for safety purposes during the
time the copier is not in use. ................................
• ALWAYS hold the designated parts only when
lifting or moving the copier. ..................................
• For safety purposes, ALWAYS remove the power
plug from the outlet when performing cleaning
operations. ...........................................................
• If dust accumulates within the copier, there is a
danger of fire or other trouble. It is therefore
recommended that you consult with your service
representative in regard to cleaning of internal
parts. This is particularly effective if accomplished
prior to seasons of high humidity. Consult with
your service representative in regard to the cost
of cleaning the internal parts of the copier. ..........
• DO NOT remove or connect the power plug with
wet hands, as there is a danger of electrical
shock. ...................................................................
• ALWAYS contact your service representative for
maintenance or repair of internal parts. ...............
1-3
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE
Other precautions
• DO NOT place heavy objects on the copier or cause
other damage to the copier.
• DO NOT open the front cover, turn off the power switch,
or pull out the power plug during copying.
• When lifting or moving the copier, contact your service
representative.
• Do not touch electrical parts, such as connectors or
printed circuit boards. They could be damaged by static
electricity.
• DO NOT attempt to perform any operations not
explained in this handbook.
• CAUTION : Use of controls or adjustments or
performance of procedures other than those specified
herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
• Do not look directly at the light from the scanning lamp
as it may cause your eyes to feel tired or painful.
■ Cautions when handling
consumables
CAUTION
• DO NOT attempt to incinerate the toner container
or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may
cause burns. .........................................................
• Keep the toner container and the waste toner box
out of the reach of children...................................
• If toner happens to spill from the toner container
or the waste toner box, avoid inhalation and
ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes and
skin. ......................................................................
. If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with
fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of
water. If coughing develops, contact a physician.
. If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth out
with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the
contents of your stomach. If necessary, contact a
physician.
. If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them
thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining
tenderness, contact a physician.
. If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with
soap and water.
• DO NOT attempt to force open or destroy the
toner container or the waste toner box. ................
Other precautions
• After use, ALWAYS dispose of the toner container and
the waste toner box in accordance with Federal, State
and Local rules and regulations.
• Store all consumables in a cool, dark location.
• If you will not be using the copier for a prolonged period
of time, remove all paper from the drawer(s)[cassette(s)]
and the multi-bypass tray and seal in its original
packaging.
1-4
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM
1. Safety of laser beam
This copier has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards established by the U.S.
DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is safe to use during normal operation and
maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a protective housing and sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser
beam to escape.
2. The CDRH Act
A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S.
Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U.S. without certification, and applies to laser
products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976.
The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United
States.
On this copier, the label is on the right side.
3. Optical unit
When checking the optical unit, avoid direct exposure to the laser beam, which is invisible.
Shown below is the label located on the cover of the optical unit.
DANGER
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.
AVOIDO DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
NVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.
ACOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
ATTENTION RAYONNEMENT LASER INVISIBLE SI OUVERT.
DANGEREUX DE REGARDER A L'INTERIEUR.
VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLEN WENN GEÖFFNET.
NICHT HINENSEHEN.
TYPE:2AV1301 MATSUSHITA
WAVE LENGHT:770-795nm
LASER SOURCE:5mW
INPUT:24VDC/MAX2.0A
5VDC/300mA
CAUTION
4. Maintenance
For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.
5. Safety switch
The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened.
1-5
CAUTION!
The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only
functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.
ATTENTION!
Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l’appareil hors tension.
Les interrupteurs sur l’appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement : ils ne
mettent pas l’appareil hors tension.
1-6
NEW 3035/4035/5035 COPIER LIMITED WARRANTY
1. Kyocera Mita America, Inc. and Kyocera Mita Canada, Ltd. (both referred to as “Kyocera Mita”)
warrant the Customer’s new copier, and the new accessories installed with the initial installation
of the copier, against any defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year, or
400,000 copies/prints from date of installation by an Authorized Kyocera Mita Dealer for the
3035, or 500,000 copies/prints from date of installation by an Authorized Kyocera Mita Dealer for
the 4035 and the 5035, whichever first occurs. In the event the copier or an accessory is found
to be defective within the warranty period, Kyocera Mita’s only obligation and the Customer’s
exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts. It is understood that Kyocera Mita
shall have no obligation to furnish labor.
2. This warranty is valid only as to the original retail purchaser (referred to as the “Customer”) of a
new Kyocera Mita copier in the United States of America, or Canada based upon the country of
purchase.
3. In order to obtain performance of this warranty, the Customer must immediately notify the
Authorized Kyocera Mita Dealer from whom the product was purchased. If the Kyocera Mita
Dealer is not able to provide service, write to Kyocera Mita at the address below for the name
and address of the Authorized Kyocera Mita Dealer in your area.
4. This warranty does not cover copiers or accessories: (a) which have become damaged due to
operator negligence, misuse, accidents, improper storage or unusual physical or electrical
stress, (b) which have used parts or supplies which are not genuine Kyocera Mita brand parts or
supplies, (c) which have been serviced by a technician not employed by Kyocera Mita or an
Authorized Kyocera Mita Dealer, or (d) which have had the serial number modified, altered, or
removed.
5. This warranty does not cover Maintenance Kits or the components of Maintenance Kits, which
consist of the drum unit, the fixing unit, and the developing unit. Kyocera Mita shall give the
Customer a separate warranty for these items.
6. This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. The Customer may also have other rights,
which vary from state to state, or province to province. Neither the seller, nor any other person is
authorized to extend the time period, or expand this warranty on behalf of Kyocera Mita.
7. THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND (CONDITIONS),
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND KYOCERA MITA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTY (OR CONDITION) OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO, AND KYOCERA MITA SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE FOR, ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE
OUT OF THE USE, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE COPIER.
1-7
WARNING
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAUTION – The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
* The above warning is valid only in the United States of America.
1-8
Section 2
NAMES OF PARTS
1. Main body
1
5
2
6
4
3
7
8
9
1 Original cover (Option)
(Open/close to set the original on the platen.)
2 Operation panel
(Contains the keys and indicators for operating the copier.)
3 Left cover 1 handle
(Pull up to open the left cover 1.)
4 Left cover 1
(Open when a paper misfeed occurs.)
5 Platen
(Set originals here for copying. Place originals face-down with the edges aligned with the size scales on the left and rear sides of the platen.)
6 Original size scales
(Be sure to align the original with these when setting the original on the platen.)
7 Drawer[Cassette] 1
(Holds up to 500 sheets of standard paper [standard paper specified by our company].)
8 Drawer[Cassette] 2
(Holds up to 500 sheets of standard paper [standard paper specified by our company].)
9 Left cover 2
(Open when a paper misfeed occurs inside the left cover 2.)
2-1
Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS
8
C
7
B
H
9
D
A
0
E
F
0
J
I
K
0 Multi-bypass tray
(Load paper here when copying onto small-size or special paper.)
! Insert guides
(Be sure to set the paper width when loading paper on the multi-bypass tray.)
@ Toner container
# Toner container release lever
(Operate to replace the toner container.)
$ Waste toner box
% Cleaning shaft
(Pull and push back in after toner container replacement or when copy images become soiled with toner.)
^ Front cover
(Open to replace the toner container or waste toner box.)
& Power switch
(Turn ON (I) before starting to make copies.)
* Copy store section
(Copied paper is stored here.)
( Length adjustment plate
(Adjust to the length of the paper to be set in the drawer[cassette].)
) Width adjustment lever
(Hold the lever and adjust the width guide to the width of the paper to be set in the drawer[cassette].)
⁄ Handles for transport
(Become handles when pulled out.)
2-2
G
Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS
2. Operation panel
@! 0
#
$
(
*
&
9
1 [Start] key & indicator lamp
(Press this key when the lamp in that key is lit green and you want
to start copying.)
2 [Stop/Clear] key
(Press this key when you want to stop copying or change the
number of copies to be made.)
3 [Reset] key
(Press this key to reset all functions to their initial mode settings.
See “Initial mode” on page 2-4.)
4 [Energy Saver] key & indicator lamp
(Press this key when you want to turn the energy-saving mode ON.
Press the same key again to turn the energy-saving mode OFF.
See page 4-11.)
5 [Interrupt] key & indicator lamp
(Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to
perform interrupt copying. See page 4-9.)
6 [Management] key
(When copy management is turned ON, press this key after
copying in order to return to the department ID-code entry display.
See page 7-1.)
7 [Default Setting/Counter] key
(Press this key when you want to perform default settings as well
as those related to copy management, etc.)
8 Keypad
(Use these keys when you want to set the number of copies to be
made or enter other values.)
^
%
6
7
8
5
4
1 2 3
@ [Printer] key, lamp & indicator
(Press this key when you want to use the optional printer functions
of this machine. The indicator to the right of the key will light when
the machine is in the printer operation mode. The lamp to the left
of the key will either light green or orange, or will flash one of those
colors, depending upon the status of the machine. See page 9-3.)
# [Scanner] key, lamp & indicator
(Press this key when you want to use the optional scanner
functions of this machine. The indicator to the right of the key will
light when the machine is in the scanner operation mode. The
lamp to the left of the key will either light green or orange, or will
flash one of those colors, depending upon the status of the
machine. See page 9-3.)
$ [Fax] key, lamp & indicator
(Press this key when you want to use the optional fax functions of
this machine. The indicator to the right of the key will light when
the machine is in the fax operation mode. The lamp to the left of
the key will either light or flash green, depending upon the status
of the machine. )
% [Auto Selection] key & indicator lamp
(Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use
the auto selection mode. The optional Document Processor must
be installed in your copier in order to use this mode.
See page 8-3.)
^ [Job Build] key & indicator lamp
(Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use
the job build mode. See page 5-57.)
9 Touch panel
(This panel displays such information as operation procedures,
machine status, and the various function keys.)
& [Repeat Copy] key & indicator lamp
(Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use
the repeat copy mode. The optional Hard Disk must be installed on
this copier in order to use this mode. See page 5-42.)
0 Brightness adjustment control dial
(Turn this dial when you want to adjust the brightness of the touch
panel.)
* [Job Queue] key & indicator lamp
(Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use
the output management functions of the copier. See page 6-20.)
! [Copier] key, lamp & indicator
(Press this key to light the indicator to the right of the key when you
want to use the copier functions of this machine.)
( [Document Management] key & indicator lamp
(Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use
the document management functions of the copier. The optional
Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to use this
function.See page 6-1.)
2-3
Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS
● Initial mode (at the end of warm-up or when the [Reset] key is
pressed)
In the default settings prepared at the factory, paper of the same size
as the original is selected automatically and the copy magnification
ratio is set to “100%” [1:1] (under the auto paper selection mode), the
number of copies to be made is set to “1” and the image quality is set
to the text+photo mode.
NOTES
• The default settings for the initial mode can be changed using the
corresponding “copy default settings” procedure.
• It is possible for you to change the default setting for the copy
exposure in the initial mode from the “manual exposure mode” to the
“auto exposure mode”. (See “Exposure mode” on page 7-63.)
● Auto clear function
Once a designated amount of time has passed after copying stops
(between 10 and 270 seconds), the auto clear function will
automatically engage and the copier will return to the same settings
as those after warm up (initial mode settings). (However, the copy
exposure mode and the image quality mode will not change.) Copies
can continually be made using the same settings (copy mode,
number of copies and exposure mode) if the next batch of copying is
started before the auto clear function engages.
● Automatic drawer[cassette] switching function
If two drawers[cassettes] contain the same size of paper and the
paper in one drawer[cassette] runs out during copying, the automatic
drawer[cassette] switching function will switch to paper feed from the
other drawer[cassette] that still contains paper.
NOTES
• The automatic drawer[cassette] switching function can be turned
OFF. (See “Auto drawer[cassette] switching ON/OFF” on page
7-42.)
• Paper must be loaded in the same orientation in both
drawers[cassettes].
• Only drawers[cassettes] that are loaded with the same type of paper
can be used with the automatic drawer[cassette] switching function.
2-4
Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS
3. Touch panel
Inch specifications
3
2
1
Paper Size Set
11x81/2"
Ready to copy.
Combine
11x81/2"
Plain
4
81/2x11"
Color
11x81/2"
Plain
Bypass
Plain
11x81/2"
Recycled
&
Auto
Exposure
User choice
*
6 58(
Sort/
Finished
Reduce
/Enlarge
Function
^
Reduce
/Enlarge
Sort:On
Exposure
mode
Basic
Sort:Off
AMS
APS
Orig.image
quality
Program
97 ! )
@ 0#
$ %
Metric specifications
3
2
1
Paper Size
Ready to copy.
Set
Merge copy
Image
quality
Plain
4
Colour
Plain
Bypass
Plain
Basic
&
Auto
Exposure
User choice
*
Reduce/
Enlarge
Function
6 58(
Reduce/
Enlarge
Sort:On
Exposure
mode
Recycled
^
Sort:Off
AMS
APS
Sort/
Finished
Program
97 ! )
@ 0#
$ %
2-5
Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS
1 This area displays messages on the machine's status and on
operational procedures.
2 This area displays information on the size of paper in the
drawer[cassette] and the current copy magnification ratio.
3 This area displays the current number of copies to be made.
4 Paper size keys (Remaining paper volume icons)
(Touch these keys when you want to change the currently selected
drawer[cassette] in order to change the size of paper that will be
used. The drawer[cassette] that holds the currently selected paper
size and type of paper will be highlighted. Drawer[Cassette] No.3
and drawer[cassette] No.4 will be displayed when the optional
Paper Feeder is installed on your copier.)
5 “APS” key
(Touch this key until it is highlighted when you want to have the
paper size selected automatically. See page 4-2.)
6 “Bypass” key
(Touch this key when you want to copy onto paper that is set on
the multi-bypass tray. The type of paper registered for use on the
multi-bypass tray will be indicated in the key.)
7 Copy exposure adjustment keys / Copy exposure scale
(Touch the appropriate key when you want to manually adjust the
copy exposure. The copy exposure scale will indicate the currently
selected setting. See page 4-2.)
8 “Exposure mode” key
(Touch this key when you want to access the “Exposure Mode”
screen.)
9 “Auto Exposure” key
(Touch this key until it is highlighted when you want to select the
auto exposure mode. In the auto exposure mode, the contrast of
the original will be detected and the most suitable exposure level
selected automatically. See page 4-2.)
0 “AMS” key
(Touch this key until it is highlighted when you want to have the
copy magnification ratio selected automatically. See page 4-5.)
! “Reduce/Enlarge” key
(Touch this key when you want to manually change the copy
magnification ratio. See page 4-6.)
@ “100%” (same size) key
(Touch this key when you want to copy the original image at its
actual size “100%”.)
# “Sort:OFF” key
(Touch this key when you want to make copies without sorting
them.)
$ “Sort:ON” key
(Touch this key when you want to make copies in the sort mode.)
% “Sort/Finish” key
(Touch this key when you want to access the “Sort/Finish” screen.
See page 5-29.)
^ Registration keys
(Touch the appropriate key when you want to access the
corresponding function or mode. Any function or mode in the
“Function” tab can be registered to be displayed as one of the
registration key. See page 5-53.)
& “Basic” tab
(Touch this tab when you want to return the display to the contents
of the “Basic” tab.)
* “User choice” tab
(Touch this tab when you want to display the contents of the “User
choice” tab.)
Inch specifications
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig.size
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Function
Program
Combine
Basic
User choice
Metric specifications
2-sided/
Split
Select
size orig.
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Erase
Mode
Merge copy
Basic
User choice
Function
Program
( “Function” tab
(Touch this tab when you want to display the contents of the
“Function” tab.)
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig. size
Combine
Exposure
mode
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
User choice
Function
Program
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
11x81/2"
Auto
Rotation
OHP
backing
Proof Copy
Memo
pages
Eco Print
Orig. set
direction
Invert
Mirror
Modify
Copy
Basic
Set
11x81/2"
Up
Down
User choice
Function
Program
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2-sided/
Split
Select
size orig.
Merge copy
Exposure
mode
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
User choice
Function
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto
Rotation
OHP back
Test copy
Memo
pages
Eco Print
Orig. set
direction
Invert
Mirror
Basic
Up
Down
User choice
Function
Set
Program
Modify
copy
2-6
Border
Erase
Program
Set
Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS
) “Program” tab
(Touch this tab when you want to register the currently selected
settings as a program, or to delete a previously registered
program. See page 5-50.)
NOTE
You can change or add new keys to those displayed in the “Basic” and
the “User choice” tabs by following the “Customize screen layout
(Main functions)” procedure on page 7-85 or the “Customize screen
layout (Add functions)” procedure on page 7-86, as appropriate.
NOTE
P) in its bottom right corner,
If you press any key that has an arrow (P
the corresponding setting screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig. size
Combine
Exposure
mode
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
Set
11x81/2"
Function
User choice
Program
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2-sided/
Split
Select
size orig.
Merge copy
Exposure
mode
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
Function
User choice
Set
Program
“Register” key
(Touch this key when you want to register the currently selected
function or mode under a registration key. See page 5-53.)
“Back” key
(Touch this key when you want to return the settings for the currently
selected mode back to their previous values.)
“Close” key
(Touch this key when you want to return to the previous screen.)
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
11x81/2"
100%
Reduce/Enlarge
Register
Back
Close
(25~400)
100
%
AMS
100%
Standard
Zoom
400%
XY Zoom
200%
51/2x81/2"➔11x17"
# keys
154%
51/2x81/2"➔81/2x14"
77%
11x17"➔81/2x14"
129%
81/2x11"➔11x17"
121%
81/2x14"➔11x17"
64%
11x17"➔81/2x11"
50%
11x17"➔51/2x81/2"
78%
81/2x14"➔81/2x11"
25%
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
100%
Reduce/Enlarge
Register
Back
Close
(25~400)
100
%
141%
AMS
A 4➔A 3
A 5➔A 4
127%
100%
Standard
Zoom
75%
11x15"➔A 4
70%
Folio➔A 3
400%
XY Zoom
106%
A 3➔A 4
A 4➔A 5
50%
11x15"➔A 3
90%
200%
#-Keys
25%
Folio➔A 4
A 5➔A 3
Metric specifications (Asia Pacific)
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
100%
Reduce/Enlarge
Register
Back
Close
(25~400)
141%
A 4➔A 3
B 5➔B 4
81%
Standard
Zoom
100%
122%
A 4➔B 4
A 5➔B 5
70%
XY Zoom
400%
115%
B 4➔A 3
B 5➔A 4
50%
86%
A 3➔B 4
A 4➔B 5
25%
100
#-Keys
%
AMS
200%
A 5➔A 3
B 4➔A 4
B 5➔A 5
A 3➔A 4
B 4➔B 5
2-7
Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS
2-8
Section 3
PREPARATIONS
1. Loading paper
Paper can be loaded into the two drawers[cassettes] and the multibypass tray.
(1) Note when adding paper
After taking new paper out of its packaging, be sure to fan through
them a few times to separate the sheets and use a flat surface to align
the leading edges of the paper before loading that paper into a
drawer[cassette] or setting it on the multi-bypass tray.
IMPORTANT!
Using special paper
In this copier, the type of paper loaded in each drawer[cassette] and
on the multi-bypass tray can be specified under “Paper type
(drawer[cassette] No.1 - No.4)” on page 7-44 and “(1) Paper size and
type” on page 7-87, respectively.
Among the special paper that can be use with this copier, there is a
wide range in paper quality and construction, especially in those types
of paper noted below. For that reason, there is a greater possibility of
problems occurring during copying with these type of paper.
Whenever you do use such special paper as noted here, it is
recommended that you first make a test copy and verify the results.
<Special paper for which extra caution is recommended>
• Preprinted
• Labels *1
• Prepunched
• Envelopes *2
Set the paper in the drawer[cassette] with the side that was facing
upward when you opened the package facing upward.
IMPORTANT!
• When copying onto used paper (paper which has already been
copied onto at least one side), DO NOT use paper that is stapled or
clipped together as this can be the cause of damage to the copier
and/or create problems in the copy image.
• If you use paper that is curled at all, straighten the paper out before
loading it into a drawer[cassette] or setting it on the multi-bypass
tray, or it can cause a paper jam.
*1 When using label sheets, be absolutely certain that there is no
possibility that the backing glue will come into contact with any part
of the copier, and that none of the labels will come off the sheet
during copying.
If glue does happen to come into contact with the drum or rollers,
or one of the labels comes off inside the copier, it can be the cause
of major damage.
*2 The following types of envelopes should never be used:
• Those on which the glue is exposed.
• Those whereby glue will be exposed if the protective paper is
removed. (If the paper protecting the glue comes off inside the
copier it can be the cause of major damage.)
• Those of special construction.
• Those which have a round tab on the back and are closed with
string.
• Those which have an open window.
• Those which have a transparent film window.
NOTE
When using prepunched, preprinted or letterhead paper, refer to
“Special paper action setting” on page 7-46-1.
3-1
Section 3 PREPARATIONS
(2) Loading paper into the drawer[cassette]
4
Set the paper flush against the left-hand wall of the
drawer[cassette].
Up to 500 sheets of standard paper (75 or 80 g/m2/standard paper as
specified by our company) or colored paper can be loaded into the
each drawer[cassette].
The each drawer[cassette] can be set to hold paper of any desired
size from 5 1/2" x 8 1/2", 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 8 1/2", 8 1/2" x 13", 8 1/2" x
14", 11" x 17", A5R, B5R, B5, A4R, A4, B4, A3, Folio, 8K and 16K.
IMPORTANT!
Set the type of paper (standard paper, recycled paper, etc.) to be
loaded in the drawer[cassette] in “Paper type (drawer[cassette] No.1 No. 4)” on page 7-44.
IMPORTANT!
1
Pull the drawer[cassette] out toward you as far as it will go.
* Do not pull more than one drawer[cassette] out at a time.
2
Hold the width adjustment lever and move it to align the width
guide with the required paper width.
Paper sizes are marked inside the drawer[cassette].
3
Hold the length adjustment plate and move it to align with the
required paper length.
3-2
• Make sure that there are no folds, etc., in the paper when it is set in
a drawer[cassette]. Such paper may be the cause of paper jams.
• There is a sticker (1 in the illustration) indicating paper capacity
attached to the inside of the drawer[cassette]. Do not load paper
above this limit.
• When you are loading paper into a drawer[cassette], make sure that
the side facing upward when the package is opened is the side that
is facing upward in the drawer[cassette].
• Adjust the length adjustment plate and the width guide BEFORE
loading paper into a drawer[cassette]. Failure to do so may result in
skewed paper feed or a paper jam.
• Make sure that the paper is set securely against the length
adjustment plate and the width guide. If there is a gap between the
paper and the adjustment plate or the width guide, readjust the plate
and the guide to fit the paper snugly.
1
Section 3 PREPARATIONS
5
6
Set the supplied paper size sheet so that the size of the
paper loaded can be checked by looking at the front of the
drawer[cassette].
1
Open the multi-bypass tray.
2
Adjust the insert guides to the size of the paper to be loaded.
3
Insert the paper along the guides as far as it will go.
Gently push the drawer[cassette] back in.
NOTE
Before leaving the copier in disuse for a prolonged period of time,
remove the paper from the drawer(s)[cassette(s)] and seal it in its
original packaging to protect from moisture. Also, when storing paper
in a high temperature and high humidity environment, seal it in a
moisture-proof bag.
(3) Loading paper into the multi-bypass tray
Up to 200 sheets of standard copy paper (75 g/m2 – 80 g/m2), of a
size between 11" x 17" [A3] and 5 1/2" x 8 1/2" [A6R] can be set on the
multi-bypass tray at one time. When copying onto special paper, be
sure to use the multi-bypass tray.
NOTE
The types of special paper and the number of sheets that can be
loaded in the multi-bypass tray are:
• Transparencies: 25 sheets
• Standard paper (120 g/m2): 130 sheets
• Standard paper (160 g/m2): 100 sheets
IMPORTANT!
IMPORTANT!
• When copying onto OHP transparencies, be sure to fan through
them a few times to separate the sheets before setting them on the
multi-bypass tray.
• When copying onto non-standard size paper, perform the procedure
in “(1) Paper size and type” on page 7-87 and select the paper size.
• When setting special paper such as OHP transparencies and thick
paper on the multi-bypass tray, the type of paper must be specified
under “(1) Paper size and type” on page 7-87.
• You can select to have the “Bypass setting” screen (see page 7-86)
displayed whenever the “Bypass” key is touched. (See “Multi-bypass
tray setting display ON/OFF” on page 7-45.)
• When you are setting paper onto the multi-bypass tray, make sure
that the side facing upward when the package is opened is the side
that is facing upward on the multi-bypass tray as well. In addition, if
the leading edge of the paper is curled at all, straighten it out before
setting it on the multi-bypass tray.
• ALWAYS straighten out curled paper before setting it on the multibypass tray.
3-3
Section 3 PREPARATIONS
● Setting envelopes
Up to 20 envelopes can be set on the multi-bypass tray at a time.
Refer to the following table for the types and sizes of envelopes that
can be used in this machine.
Acceptable envelope types
Size
Monarch
3 1/8" x 7 1/2"
Comm. #10
3 3/8" x 9 1/2"
Envelope DL
110 x 220 (mm)
Envelope C5
162 x 229 (mm)
Executive
7 1/4" x 10 1/2"
Comm. #9
3 7/8" x 8 7/8"
Comm. #6-3/4
3 5/8" x 6 1/2"
ISO B5
176 x 250 (mm)
Envelope C4
229 x 324 (mm)
Oufuku Hagaki
200 x 148 (mm)
YOUKEI 2
162 x 114 (mm)
YOUKEI 4
234 x 105 (mm)
3
When using envelopes that are wider than they are tall, leave
the flap closed and set the envelopes with the copy side
facing upward and the flap facing towards the rear of the
copier. Then slide the envelopes into the slot along the insert
guides as far as they will go.
When using envelopes that are taller than they are wide,
open the flap and set the envelopes with the copy side facing
upward and the flap facing away from the direction of
insertion. Then slide the envelopes into the slot along the
insert guides as far as they will go.
Copier
Copier
NOTES
1
• If the optional Printer Kit or Printer/scanner Kit is installed on your
copier and you attempt to print from a computer onto envelopes that
are wider than they are tall, be sure to leave the flap closed and set
the envelopes with the side to be printed onto facing upward. Orient
the edge with the flap towards the front of the copier and then slide
the envelopes into the slot along the insert guides as far as they will
go.
Open the multi-bypass tray.
Copier
2
3-4
Align the insert guides with the envelope size.
• The proper orientation will actually depend upon the type of
envelope being used.
• Incorrectly loading envelopes can result in printing in the wrong
orientation or on the wrong side.
• When setting envelopes on the multi-bypass tray, BE SURE to
specify the type of envelopes that will be used under “3. Multibypass tray paper settings” on page 7-87.
Section 4
BASIC OPERATION
1. Basic copying procedure
1
3
Paper Size Set
11x81/2"
Ready to copy.
Com
11x81/2"
Plain
81/2x11"
Color
11x81/2"
Plain
11x81/2"
Recycled
Basic
Ori
qua
AMS
APS
Bypass
Plain
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
User choice
Function
Sort:Off
Re
/En
Sort:On
Reduce
/Enlarge
Sort/
Finished
Program
Inch specifications
3
1. Warm-up
Turn the power switch ON ( | ). At the end of warm-up, “Ready to
copy.” will be displayed.
Paper Size
Ready to copy.
Set
Mer
Ima
qua
Plain
Colour
Plain
NOTE
Bypass
Plain
Basic
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
Recycled
If you set the originals that you want to copy and press the [Start] key
while the copier is still warming up, copying will begin as soon as
warm-up is finished.
AMS
APS
User choice
Function
Sort:Off
Re
En
Sort:On
Reduce/
Enlarge
Sort/
Finished
Program
Metric specifications
3. Selecting the desired functions
Select from among the copier’s various modes and functions.
2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2. Setting the originals
Open the original cover and set the original that you want to copy
face-down on the platen. Be sure to align originals with the upper left
corner of the platen (towards the left-rear portion of the copier).
NOTE
See “4 How to set originals in the Document Processor” on page 8-2
for instructions on how to set originals in your Document Processor
(option).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Enlarging/reducing the copy image (Page 4-5.)
Interrupt copying (Page 4-9.)
Making 2-sided copies from various types of originals (Page 5-1.)
Copying each image of open-faced (books, magazines, etc.) or
2-sided originals onto separate sheets (Page 5-4.)
Creating a margin on the copies (Page 5-6.)
Centering the copy image (Page 5-8.)
Adding a space next to the copy images for making notes
(Page 5-9.)
Making copies with clean edges (Page 5-11.)
Fitting the image of either two or four originals onto a single copy
page (Page 5-13.)
Printing page numbers on the copies (Page 5-16.)
Overlaying one image over another (Page 5-20.)
Making booklets from sheet originals (Page 5-22.)
Making booklets from book originals (Page 5-26.)
Automatic sorting of copy sets without the Document Finisher
(Page 5-29.)
Automatic rotation of the copy image (Page 5-30.)
Adding a front and/or back cover to your copy sets (Page 5-31.)
Feeding paper as a backing sheet for OHP transparencies
(Page 5-36.)
Inverting black and white (Page 5-38.)
Making mirror image copies (Page 5-39.)
Making a test copy prior to large volume copying (Page 5-40.)
Making more of the same copies after a copy job is finished
(Page 5-42.)
Copying a large volume of originals in one operation (Page 5-47.)
Easily add covers and insert sheets between various sets of
originals in one operation (Page 5-57.)
4-1
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION
Paper Size Set
11x81/2"
Ready to copy.
4
Com
11x81/2"
Plain
81/2x11"
Color
11x81/2"
Plain
11x81/2"
Recycled
Basic
Ori
qua
AMS
APS
Bypass
Plain
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
User choice
Function
Sort:Off
Sort:On
Reduce
/Enlarge
Re
/En
Sort/
Finished
Program
5
11x81/2"
Plain
81/2x11"
Color
Paper Size
Ima
qua
Plain
Plain
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
Recycled
Basic
AMS
APS
Bypass
Plain
User choice
Reduce
/Enlarge
Set
Me
Colour
Exposure
mode
Inch specifications
Ready to copy.
4
Auto
Exposure
Bypass
Plain
11x8 /2"
Plain
11x81/2"
Recycled
Inch specifications
AMS
APS
1
Function
Sort:Off
Sort:On
Reduce/
Enlarge
5
Plain
AMS
APS
Colour
Re
En
Auto
Exposure
Bypass
Plain
Plain
Sort/
Finished
Program
Metric specifications
Exposure
mode
Recycled
Reduce/
Enlarge
Metric specifications
4. Selecting the paper size
5. Adjusting the copy exposure
When the “APS” key is highlighted on the touch panel, copy paper of
the same size as the original will be automatically selected. In order to
copy the original onto a different size of paper without changing the
size of the image, touch the paper size key that corresponds to the
paper size that you want to use.
Adjustment of the copy exposure is generally accomplished manually.
If you want to make the exposure darker, touch the right exposure
adjustment key to move the arrow under the exposure scale to the
right; If you want to make the exposure lighter, touch the left exposure
adjustment key to move the arrow under the exposure scale to the
left.
If you want the copy exposure to be adjusted automatically, touch the
“Auto Exposure” key until it is highlighted. The contrast of the original
will be detected and the most suitable exposure level selected
automatically.
* It is also possible for you to adjust the copy exposure by touching
the “Exposure Mode” key to access the “Exposure Mode” screen.
Copy exposure adjustment can then be performed in this screen
using the same methods as above.
NOTES
• You can stop the copier from automatically selecting the paper size.
(See “Paper selection” on page 7-68.)
• It is also possible for you to specify one drawer[cassette] that will be
selected automatically regardless of the size of paper loaded in that
drawer[cassette].
(See “Default drawer[cassette]” on page 7-70.)
Inch specifications
Paper Size
11x81/2"
Ready to copy.
Register
Exposure Mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
Back
Set
Close
7
Auto
Manual
Lighter
Darker
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Exposure mode
Back
Set
Close
Auto
Manual
Lighter
Darker
NOTES
• It is possible for you to make adjustments to the auto exposure
mode if the overall copies come out too dark or too light.
(See “Auto exposure adjustment” on page 7-73.)
• It is also possible for you to change the default setting for the copy
exposure to the auto exposure mode.
(See “Exposure mode” on page 7-63.)
4-2
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION
Paper size
Ready to copy.
6
Select
paper
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig. size
Combine
Exposure
mode
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
User choice
S
Function
Orig.image
quality
2-sided/
Split
Exposure
mode
Image
quality
Sort/
Finished
Basic
uto
Reduce
/Enlarge
S tO
Inch specifications
Paper size
Merge copy
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Function
S
Paper Size
7
Select
size orig.
User choice
Sort:Off
AMS
Program
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
Set
11x81/2"
Combine
Inch specifications
6
Paper Size
7
11x81/2"
Set
Merge copy
Image
quality
Sort:Off
AMS
Program
Auto
Reduce/
Enlarge
S tO
Metric specifications
Metric specifications
6. Selecting the image quality
7. Setting the number of copies to be made
The image quality is selected according to the type of original.
Touch the “Function” tab and then the resulting “Orig. image quality”
[“Image quality”] key that is displayed within that tab in order to access
the “Orig.image quality” [“Image quality orig.”] screen.
Use the keypad to change the number of copies to be made that is
displayed on the touch panel to the actual number that you want to
make. Up to 999 copies can be made at one time.
Inch specifications
NOTE
Paper Size
Ready to copy.
Orig.image quality
Text Photo
Photo
Set
1
11x8 /2"
Register
Back
Close
Tex t P h o t o : S e t t h i s m o d e t o c o py o r i g .
w i t h m i xe d t ex t a n d p h o t o
P h o t o : A d d a d i m e n s i o n a l e f fe c t o f p h o t o
Tex t : C o py a p e n c i l o r f i n e l i n e.
Text
It is possible for you to limit the number of copies (or copy sets) that
can be made at a time. (See “Copy limit” on page 7-82.)
8
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Image quality orig.
Text+Photo
Photo
Register
Back
Set
Close
Tex t + P h o t o : S e t t h i s m o d e t o c o py
o r i g i n a l m i xe d ( t ex t & p h o t o ) .
P h o t o : A d d a d i m e n s i o n a l e f fe c t o f p h o t o.
Tex t : C o py p e n c i l & f i n e l i n e c l e a r l y.
Text
Text+photo mode: Touch the “Text+Photo” key until it is highlighted.
Select this mode when the original contains a
mixture of both text and photographs.
Photo mode:
Touch the “Photo” key until it is highlighted. Select
this mode to bring out the depth in photographs.
Text mode:
Touch the “Text” key until it is highlighted. Select
this mode especially to reproduce originals written
in pencil of which contain thin lines.
NOTES
• It is possible for you to change the image quality mode that will be
the default setting in the initial mode. (See “Original quality” onpage
7-65.)
• It is also possible for you to adjust the copy exposure in each of
the image quality modes. (See “Manual exposure adjustment
(text+photo mode)” on page 7-75, “Manual exposure adjustment
(text mode)” on page 7-76 and “Manual exposure adjustment
(photo mode)” on page 7-77.)
8. Start copying
Press the [Start] key. Once the lamp in the [Start] key is lit green and
“Ready to copy.” is displayed, copying is possible.
Inch specifications
Now copying.
Orig. page
11x81/2"
1 sided
Rear
Count/Set
APS
11x81/2"
1 sided
Sort
Output
Plain
Pause
Inner tray
Job 1
Metric specifications
Now copying.
Or iginal
Count/set
Output
Plain
1-sided
R top / rear
APS
1-sided
Sort
Inner tray
Stop
/ Change
Job 1
4-3
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION
9
9. At the end of copying
Finished copies will be ejected onto the copy store section.
IMPORTANT!
• Up to 250 copies can be stored on the copy store section.
• If “The output tray exceeds capacity. Remove the paper.” [“Too much
paper in output tray. Remove paper.”] is displayed, there are too
many copies on the top tray. Remove the copies from the copy store
section and then press the [Start] key to resume copying.
• If ejected copies come out curled, or are otherwise not stored
cleanly, remove the paper from the drawer[cassette] or the multibypass tray (whichever is currently being used), turn the paper over,
set it again in that location and try to copy again.
CAUTION
If the copier will not be used for a short period of time
(overnight, etc.), turn the power switch OFF (O).
If it will not be used for an extended period of time
(vacations, etc.), remove the power plug from the
outlet for safety purposes during the time the copier
is not in use.
4-4
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION
2. Enlarging/reducing the copy image
2
(1) Auto magnification selection mode
With this mode, the original image is enlarged/reduced automatically
according to the selected paper size.
Select the size of paper that you want to copy onto by
touching the appropriate paper size key.
Touch the “AMS” key. The corresponding magnification ratio
will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper Size Set
11x81/2"
Ready to copy.
Combine
11x81/2"
Plain
81/2x11"
Color
11x81/2"
Plain
11x81/2"
Recycled
Basic
Orig.image
quality
APS
Bypass
Plain
AMS
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
User choice
Function
Sort:Off
Sort:On
Reduce
/Enlarge
Reduce
/Enlarge
Sort/
Finished
Program
Metric specifications
Paper Size
Ready to copy.
Set
Merge copy
Plain
IMPORTANT!
Colour
Plain
If you use this mode most often, select “AMS” under “Default
magnification ratio” on page 7-72.
Bypass
Plain
Set the original to be copied.
The copier will automatically detect the size of the originals
and select copy paper of that same size.
3
AMS
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
Recycled
Basic
1
Image
quality
APS
User choice
Function
Sort:Off
Sort:On
Reduce/
Enlarge
Reduce/
Enlarge
Sort/
Finished
Program
Press the [Start] key to begin the copying procedure.
Inch specifications
Paper Size Set
11x81/2"
Ready to copy.
Combine
11x81/2"
Plain
81/2x11"
Color
1
11x8 /2"
Plain
11x81/2"
Recycled
Basic
Orig.image
quality
AMS
APS
Bypass
Plain
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
User choice
Function
Sort:Off
Sort:On
Reduce
/Enlarge
Reduce
/Enlarge
Sort/
Finished
Program
Metric specifications
Paper Size
Ready to copy.
Set
Merge copy
Image
quality
Plain
Colour
Plain
Bypass
Plain
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
Recycled
Basic
AMS
APS
User choice
Function
Sort:Off
Sort:On
Reduce/
Enlarge
Reduce/
Enlarge
Sort/
Finished
Program
4-5
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION
3
(2) Zoom mode
With this mode, the magnification ratio can be set to any 1%
increment between 25% and 400%.
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change the displayed
magnification ratio to the desired setting.
* The desired magnification ratio can also be entered directly
by touching the “# keys” [“#-Keys”] key and then using the
keypad.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
11x81/2"
100%
25%
Reduce/Enlarge
Register
Back
Close
(25~400)
100
%
AMS
100%
Standard
Zoom
400%
XY Zoom
200%
51/2x81/2"➔11x17"
# keys
154%
51/2x81/2"➔81/2x14"
77%
11x17"➔81/2x14"
129%
81/2x11"➔11x17"
121%
81/2x14"➔11x17"
64%
11x17"➔81/2x11"
50%
11x17"➔51/2x81/2"
78%
81/2x14"➔81/2x11"
25%
400%
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
100%
1
Set the original to be copied.
2
Touch the “Reduce/Enlarge” key. The “Reduce/Enlarge”
screen will be displayed.
Reduce/Enlarge
Register
100
Close
11x81/2"
Plain
11x81/2"
Recycled
Basic
AMS
APS
Bypass
Plain
Auto
Exposure
User choice
Function
Reduce
/Enlarge
25%
Folio➔A 4
A 5➔A 3
Paper size
Register
Bypass
Plain
AMS
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
Recycled
User choice
Function
Sort:Off
Sort:On
Reduce/
Enlarge
Program
Sort/
Finished
Close
141%
A 4➔A 3
B 5➔B 4
81%
B 4➔A 4
B 5➔A 5
100%
122%
A 4➔B 4
A 5➔B 5
70%
A 3➔A 4
B 4➔B 5
XY Zoom
400%
115%
B 4➔A 3
B 5➔A 4
50%
86%
A 3➔B 4
A 4➔B 5
25%
%
AMS
200%
A 5➔A 3
Set
Image
quality
APS
Back
Standard
Zoom
#-Keys
Merge copy
Reduce/
Enlarge
Set
(25~400)
Program
Plain
Basic
90%
200%
Reduce/Enlarge
Reduce
/Enlarge
Sort/
Finished
Paper Size
A 3➔A 4
A 4➔A 5
50%
11x15"➔A 3
100
Exposure
mode
Ready to copy.
Plain
106%
100%
Metric specifications
Colour
400%
Ready to copy.
Sort:Off
Sort:On
11x15"➔A 4
70%
Orig.image
quality
1
75%
Metric specifications (Asia Pacific)
Combine
11x81/2"
Plain
A 4➔A 3
A 5➔A 4
127%
Folio➔A 3
XY Zoom
Paper Size Set
11x81/2"
141%
AMS
100%
#-Keys
Ready to copy.
8 /2x11"
Color
%
Standard
Zoom
Inch specifications
4-6
Back
(25~400)
4
Press the [Start] key to begin the copying procedure.
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION
3
(3) Preset zoom mode
With this mode, the magnification ratio can be set to one of the preset ratios:
Touch the preset zoom key that corresponds to the
magnification ratio that you want to use.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
11x81/2"
100%
[Available magnification ratios]
Reduce/Enlarge
Register
Back
Close
(25~400)
Inch specification
Reduction
100
25%
50% (11" x 17" R 5 1/2" x 8 1/2")
64% (11" x 17" R 8 1/2" x 11")
77% (11" x 17" R 8 1/2" x 14")
78% (8 1/2" x 14" R 8 1/2" x 11")
Enlargement 121% (8 1/2" x 14" R 11" x 17")
129% (8 1/2" x 11" R 11" x 17")
154% (5 1/2" x 8 1/2" R 8 1/2" x 14")
200% (5 1/2" x 8 1/2" R 11" x 17")
400%
%
AMS
100%
Standard
Zoom
400%
XY Zoom
200%
51/2x81/2"➔11x17"
# keys
154%
51/2x81/2"➔81/2x14"
77%
11x17"➔81/2x14"
129%
81/2x11"➔11x17"
121%
81/2x14"➔11x17"
64%
11x17"➔81/2x11"
50%
11x17"➔51/2x81/2"
78%
81/2x14"➔81/2x11"
25%
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
100%
Reduce/Enlarge
Register
Back
Close
(25~400)
100
%
Metric specification
Reduction
25%
50%
70% (A3 R A4, A4 R A5)
75% (11" x 15" R A4)
90% (Folio R A4)
Enlargement 106% (11" x 15" R A3)
127% (Folio R A3)
141% (A4 R A3, A5 R A4)
200% (A5 R A3)
400%
141%
AMS
A 4➔A 3
A 5➔A 4
75%
11x15"➔A 4
70%
127%
100%
Standard
Zoom
Folio➔A 3
400%
XY Zoom
A 3➔A 4
A 4➔A 5
50%
106%
11x15"➔A 3
25%
90%
200%
#-Keys
Folio➔A 4
A 5➔A 3
Metric specifications (Asia Pacific)
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
100%
Reduce/Enlarge
Register
Back
Close
(25~400)
141%
A 4➔A 3
B 5➔B 4
81%
B 4➔A 4
B 5➔A 5
Standard
Zoom
100%
122%
A 4➔B 4
A 5➔B 5
70%
A 3➔A 4
B 4➔B 5
XY Zoom
400%
115%
B 4➔A 3
B 5➔A 4
50%
86%
A 3➔B 4
A 4➔B 5
25%
100
#-Keys
Metric specification (Asia Pacific)
Reduction
25%
50%
70% (A3 R A4, B4 R B5)
81% (B4 R A4, B5 R A5)
86% (A3 R B4, A4 R B5)
Enlargement 115% (B4 R A3, B5 R A4)
122% (A4 R B4, A5 R B5)
141% (A4 R A3, B5 R B4)
200% (A5 R A3)
400%
%
AMS
200%
A 5➔A 3
NOTE
You can also change the magnification ratio in 1% increments by
touching the “+” key or the “-” key, as appropriate.
4
1
Set the original to be copied.
2
Touch the “Reduce/Enlarge” key.
The “Reduce/Enlarge” screen will be displayed.
Press the [Start] key to begin the copying procedure.
Inch specifications
Paper Size Set
11x81/2"
Ready to copy.
Combine
11x81/2"
Plain
81/2x11"
Color
11x81/2"
Plain
11x81/2"
Recycled
Basic
Orig.image
quality
AMS
APS
Bypass
Plain
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
User choice
Function
Sort:Off
Sort:On
Reduce
/Enlarge
Reduce
/Enlarge
Sort/
Finished
Program
Metric specifications
Paper Size
Ready to copy.
Set
Merge copy
Image
quality
Plain
Colour
Plain
Bypass
Plain
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
Recycled
Basic
AMS
APS
User choice
Function
Sort:Off
Sort:On
Reduce/
Enlarge
Reduce/
Enlarge
Sort/
Finished
Program
4-7
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION
3
(4) XY zoom mode
With this mode, it is possible for you to select the length and width of
the copy image separately. The magnification ratio can be set to any
1% increment between 25% and 400%.
Touch the “XY Zoom” key.
The screen to select the magnification ratio will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
11x81/2"
100%
Reduce/Enlarge
Register
Back
Close
(25~400)
100
%
M
M
AMS
100%
Standard
Zoom
400%
XY Zoom
200%
51/2x81/2"➔11x17"
# keys
Y%
154%
51/2x81/2"➔81/2x14"
77%
11x17"➔81/2x14"
129%
81/2x11"➔11x17"
121%
81/2x14"➔11x17"
64%
11x17"➔81/2x11"
50%
11x17"➔51/2x81/2"
78%
81/2x14"➔81/2x11"
25%
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
X%
Set
100%
Reduce/Enlarge
Register
Back
Close
(25~400)
100
%
1
Set the originals to be copied.
2
Touch the “Reduce/Enlarge” key.
The “Reduce/Enlarge” screen will be displayed.
141%
AMS
400%
XY Zoom
11x15"➔A 3
Paper size
Register
Paper Size Set
11x81/2"
11x8 /2"
Plain
Orig.image
quality
AMS
APS
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
Function
Sort:Off
Sort:On
Reduce
/Enlarge
141%
A 4➔A 3
B 5➔B 4
81%
B 4➔A 4
B 5➔A 5
122%
A 4➔B 4
A 5➔B 5
70%
A 3➔A 4
B 4➔B 5
XY Zoom
400%
115%
B 4➔A 3
B 5➔A 4
50%
86%
A 3➔B 4
A 4➔B 5
25%
#-Keys
4
Paper Size
Set
Merge copy
Image
quality
AMS
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
AMS
200%
A 5➔A 3
Sort/
Finished
Plain
Recycled
%
Program
Ready to copy.
Bypass
Plain
Reduce/
Enlarge
Inch specifications
Sort:Off
Sort:On
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key, as appropriate, specify the
desired magnification ratio for the width and then the length
of the image. It is also possible for you to enter the desired
ratio directly by touching the corresponding “# keys”
[“#-Keys”] key and then using the keypad.
Reduce/
Enlarge
Paper Size
11x81/2"
X
Ready to copy.
Sort/
Finished
User choice
Function
Set
Y
Register
Reduce/Enlarge
Basic
Close
100%
Reduce
/Enlarge
Metric specifications
APS
Back
Standard
Zoom
100
Plain
Set
(25~400)
Combine
Colour
Folio➔A 4
A 5➔A 3
100%
1
User choice
25%
90%
200%
Reduce/Enlarge
Basic
A 3➔A 4
A 4➔A 5
50%
106%
Ready to copy.
Ready to copy.
Bypass
Plain
11x15"➔A 4
70%
Metric specifications (Asia Pacific)
Inch specifications
11x81/2"
Plain
11x81/2"
Recycled
75%
Folio➔A 3
#-Keys
81/2x11"
Color
A 4➔A 3
A 5➔A 4
127%
100%
Standard
Zoom
Program
Y
Standard
Zoom
Back
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
o r i g i n a l t o p s i d e.
X
+
+
# keys
# keys
XY Zoom
Left top
corner
Rear
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Y:
Register
Reduce/Enlarge
Y
Set
X:
Back
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
X
Standard
Zoom
XY Zoom
#-Keys
4-8
#-Keys
Back Edge
Left top
corner
5
Touch the appropriate key on the right side of the touch panel
to specify the direction in which the original was set.
6
Press the [Start] key to begin the copying procedure.
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION
3. Interrupt copying
Interrupt copying is useful if, during one copy job, you want to copy
other originals at different settings. Once the rush job is completed,
the interrupted copy job can be resumed at the same settings as
before.
4
When copying is completed, press the [Interrupt] key once
again. The lamp in the [Interrupt] key will go out. Replace the
newly copied originals with the ones removed before. Then,
press the [Start] key. The interrupted copy job will be
resumed.
1 2 3 A
1 2A3
1
Press the [Interrupt] key to light the lamp in the [Interrupt]
key. “Interrupt mode OK” will be displayed.
2
Remove the originals that were currently being copied and
put them aside.
3
Set the new originals and perform the desired copy
procedure.
4-9
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION
4. Job reservation
Copy jobs can be scheduled even while another copy job is in
progress any time the “Reserve next copy” key is displayed.
1
Inch specifications
Or ig. page
Count/Set
12
11x81/2"
1 sided
Rear
11x81/2"
1 sided
Sort
Memory usage 30%
Now copying.
Output
Reserve
next copy
1/999
100%
APS
Inch specifications
Memory usage 30%
Now copying.
Touch the “Reserve next copy” key.
The “Ready to copy. (Job reservation)” screen will be
displayed.
Orig. page
Reserve
next copy
1/999
1
Inner tray
Output
Count/Set
12
Pause
100%
APS
11x8 /2"
1 sided
Rear
1
11x8 /2"
1 sided
Sort
Pause
Inner tray
Metric specifications
Metric specifications
Now copying.
Or iginal
Count/set
12
Reserve
next copy
1/999
100%
1-sided
R top / rear
APS
1-sided
Sort
Now copying.
Output
Original
Reserve
next copy
1/999
100%
Inner tray
1-sided
R top / rear
You can enter the corresponding copy settings and scan in the
originals in preparation for your copy job even before the other job is
completed.
Once that job is finished and print out is possible, the operation for the
reserved job will begin automatically.
Output
Count/set
12
Stop
/Change
APS
Stop
/Change
1-sided
Sort
Inner tray
NOTE
Job reservation is not available if the “Reserve next copy” key isn’t
displayed.
NOTES
• The optional Hard Disk must be installed on your copier in order to
use this function.
• If the optional Fax Kit, Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit are installed
in your copier, job reservation will be possible during print out of
both received fax jobs and print jobs.
2
Set the originals to be copied.
3
Select the settings and functions that you want to use for that
copy job.
Inch specifications
Ready to copy. (Job reservation)
Paper Size Set
11x81/2"
Combine
11x81/2"
Plain
Orig.image
quality
1
8 /2x11"
Color
11x81/2"
Plain
11x81/2"
Recycled
Basic
AMS
APS
Bypass
Plain
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
User choice
Function
Sort:Off
Sort:On
Reduce
/Enlarge
Reduce
/Enlarge
Sort/
Finished
Finish Job
res.
Program
Metric specifications
Ready to copy. (Jobreservation)
Paper Size
Set
Merge copy
Image
quality
Plain
Color
Plain
Bypass
Plain
4
4-10
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
Recycled
Basic
AMS
APS
User choice
Function
Sort:Off
Sort:On
Reduce/
Enlarge
Program
Reduce/
Enlarge
Sort/
Finished
Job resrv.
finished
Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start.
Once all of the originals have been completely scanned,
the touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION
5. Energy-saving modes
If you press the [Energy Saver] key, even while the power switch is
still turned ON, the copier will enter one of the following two energysaving modes (a state of rest).
The following two functions will also automatically cause the copier to
enter the corresponding energy-saving mode if no operation is
performed for a designated period of time.
● Low power mode
● Auto low power function
The lamp in the [Energy Saver] key will be the only lit indication on the
operation panel. To resume copying, press the [Energy Saver] key
once again. It will take the copier less than 12 seconds to return to a
copy-ready state.
If no operation is performed on the copier for a designated period of
time (adjustable between 1 and 240 minutes), the auto low power
function will engage and cause the copier to automatically enter the
Low power mode.
The factory default setting is for 15 minutes.
● Sleep mode
Just like with the Low power mode, the lamp in the [Energy Saver] key
will be the only lit indication on the operation panel, but even less
power will be consumed in this mode. To resume copying, press the
[Energy Saver] key once again. It will take the copier less than 25
seconds to return to a copy-ready state.
● Auto sleep function
If no operation is performed on the copier for a designated period of
time (adjustable between 1 and 240 minutes), the auto sleep function
will engage and automatically turn the power switch OFF (O). When
you want to make copies again, simply turn the power switch back ON
( | ).
The factory default setting is for 60 minutes.
Energy Saver
nag
em
ent
rrup
Ene
rgy
er
Sav
et
Res
3
2
t
p/
Sto lear
C
6
1
5
4
S
ta
rt
Ma
/
ting
Set
ault
Def ounter
C
Inte
9
8
7
#
0
*
NOTES
• If the optional Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit is installed in your
copier, you can switch between the energy-saving modes (Low
power mode and Sleep mode) that will be entered into when the
[Energy Saver] key is pressed. To change the energy-saving mode,
see “Changing the energy-saving mode” on page 7-58.
• If you are using a standard copier, or if the optional Fax Kit is
installed in your copier, you can press the [Energy Saver] key to
engage the Low power mode.
• If the optional Fax Kit, Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit are installed
in your copier and a received fax job or a print job is detected while
the copier is in one of the energy-saving modes, it will automatically
return to a copy-ready state and print out the corresponding job.
Copiers are generally in a standby mode more than they are in actual
operation, so power consumption in the standby mode occupies a
large part of overall consumption. Having the copier enter a rest state
after a certain amount of time, or turning the power completely OFF
(O), reduces unnecessary power consumption in the standby mode
and as a result can save on electricity bills.
NOTES
• The auto low power function will not engage when the copier is in
the sleep mode.
• In order to change the amount of time that will elapse before the
auto low power function engages, see “Auto low power time” on
page 7-48.
• In order to change the amount of time that will elapse before the
auto sleep function engages, see “Auto sleep time” on page 7-47. In
order to disable the auto sleep function, see “Auto sleep ON/OFF”
on page 7-57.
• If the optional Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit is installed in your
copier, the copier will enter the Sleep mode whenever the auto sleep
function engages. In this state, when the copier detects data for a
print job, it will automatically recover to a print-ready state and print
out of the corresponding information will begin.
• If the optional Fax Kit is installed in your copier, the copier will be
automatically turned OFF (O) whenever the auto sleep function
engages. In this state, when the copier receives an incoming fax, it
will automatically recover to a print-ready state and print out of the
corresponding information will begin.
4-11
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION
4-12
Section 5
OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
1. Making 2-sided copies from various types of originals [2-sided copy modes]
(1) Making 2-sided copies from a 2-sided original
With this mode, a 2-sided original is copied and the front and back
sides of the copy paper are used so that the copy looks just like the
original.
(2) Making 2-sided copies from an
open-faced (books, etc.) original
With this mode, the two facing pages of a book or magazine are
copied separately onto the front and back sides of the copy paper by
simply pressing the [Start] key.
<Original>
“Left”
<Original>
“Left/Right”
<Finished copy>
“Left/Right”
1 2
1 2
1
2
1
2
2
“Left/Right”
2
1
1 2
1
2
“Right”
“Top”
2
“Top”
1
1
“Book / Duplex”
1 2
“Book / Book”
3
2
1
2
1
2
1
“Right”
“Top”
0
1
“Top”
0
1 2
1 2
“Book / Book”
“Left”
“Left/Right”
<Finished copy>
“Book / Duplex”
3
With these modes, 2-sided copies can be made from a variety of
originals including open-faced (books, etc.) or 2-sided originals.
2
NOTE
NOTES
• Only paper sizes between 5 1/2" x 8 1/2", 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 8 1/2",
8 1/2" x 13", 8 1/2" x 14", 11" x 17", A5R, B5R, B5, A4R, A4, B4, A3
and Folio can be used in this mode.
• The Document Processor (option) must be installed on your copier
in order to use this mode.
Only 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 17", A5R, B5R, A4R, B4 and A3 size originals
can be used in this mode.
5-1
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
(3) Making 2-sided copies from one-sided originals
With this mode, multiple one-sided originals are copied onto the front
and back sides of the copy paper. If you are copying an odd number
of originals, the back side of the last copy page will be blank.
1
Set the originals to be copied.
2
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
Touch the “2 sided/Separation” [“2-sided/Split”] key.
The “2 sided/Separation” [“2-sided/Split”] screen will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
1
2
3
4
5
5
4
2
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
11x81/2"
3
1
Select
paper
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig. size
Combine
Exposure
mode
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
User choice
Function
Program
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
NOTE
The image that is copied onto the back side of the copies can also be
rotated 180 degrees.
1 If you chose the “Left/Right” [“Left/Right binding”] setting for
finished copies:
The back side of the copies will be created with the same
orientation as the originals.
2 If you chose the “Top” [“Top binding”] setting for finished copies:
The image that is copied onto the back side of the copies will be
rotated 180 degrees. If you then bind the copy set at the top, the
images will be oriented in the same direction when flipped up like
a calendar, etc.
ghi
def
ghi
abc
def
Select
paper
2-sided/
Split
Select
size orig.
Merge copy
Exposure
mode
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
3
User choice
Function
Set
Program
If you are copying from 2-sided originals, touch the
“2 sided / 2 sided” [“2-sided / 2-sided”] key. If you are
copying from open-faced originals, touch the “Book / 2
sided” [“Book / 2-sided”] key. If you are copying from 1sided originals, touch the “1 sided / 2 sided” [“1-sided / 2sided”] key.
If you selected “2 sided / 2 sided” [“2-sided / 2-sided”] or
“Book / 2 sided” [“Book / 2-sided”], go to the next step.
If you selected “1 sided / 2 sided” [“1-sided / 2-sided”], go
directly to step 5.
Inch specifications
abc
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
11x81/2"
ghi
abc
2 sided/Separation
Register
1 sided
➔1 sided
2 sided
➔1 sided
Book
➔1 sided
Able to copy 1 sided (separate) or
2 sided copy using 1 sided original,
Book original or 2 sided original.
Back
Close
def
1 sided
➔2 sided
2 sided
➔2 sided
Book
➔2 sided
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
2-sided / Split
5-2
1-sided
R1-sided
2-sided
R1-sided
1-sided
R2-sided
2-sided
R2-sided
Book
R1-sided
Book
R2-sided
Back
Set
Close
A bl e t o c o py 1 - s i d e d ( s e p a ra t e ) o r
2 - s i d e d c o py u s i n g 1 - s i d e d o r i g i n a l ,
book original or 2-sided original.
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
4
6
Specify the binding direction of the originals.
Inch specifications
<for 2-sided originals>
<for open-faced originals>
IMPORTANT!
to copy.
to copy.
ion
ion
Register
Original
Finished
Open from
left/right
Open from
top
Open from
left/right
Open from
top
If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not
correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly.
Register
Finished
Original
Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel
and verify the direction in which the originals were set.
Inch specifications
1 sided
➔2 sided
2 sided
➔2 sided
Book
➔2 sided
1 sided
➔2 sided
2 sided
➔2 sided
Book
➔2 sided
Book➔
Duplex
Open from
left
Open from
right
<for 1-sided or 2-sided originals>
Book➔
Book
Paper size
Register
Finished
<for open-faced originals>
to copy.
Back
Set
Rear
Original
Register
Finished
Back
Close
Check direction
Set book or iginal top
side direction to back.
BookR
Duplex
BookR
Book
Register
Finished
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Open from
left/right
Open from
top
to copy.
Register
Original
Paper size
11x81/2"
Metric specifications
<for 2-sided originals>
<for open-faced originals>
Set
Left top
corner
Finished
Metric specifications
1-sided
R2-sided
2-sided
R2-sided
Book
R2-sided
Left/Right
binding
Top
binding
Left/Right
binding
Top
binding
1-sided
R2-sided
BookR
Duplex
BookR
Book
Left
binding
Right
binding
2-sided
R2-sided
<for 1-sided or 2-sided originals>
Paper size
Book
R2-sided
Register
5
Finished
Select the binding direction you want for the finished copies.
<for 1-sided or 2-sided originals>
Paper siz
11x
Register
Original
Finished
Open from
left/right
Open from
top
Open from
left/right
Open from
top
Back
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Left/Right
binding
Top
binding
Inch specifications
<for open-faced originals>
<for open-faced originals>
Set
Paper size
Register
Finished
Back
Set
Close
Check direction
Set book or iginal top
side direction to back.
BookR
Duplex
BookR
Book
Back Edge
Left top
Corner
opy.
Back
Original
Check direction
Check direction
original top side
Open from
left
Open from
right
d
d
Rear
Register
Bac
Finished
Check
Set t
top s
7
Book➔
Duplex
Book➔
Book
d
If you set the originals in the optional Document Processor,
copying will start automatically.
If you set an original on the platen, a message will appear
telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next
step.
Metric specifications
<for 1-sided or 2-sided originals>
Press the [Start] key.
Scanning of the originals will start.
<for open-faced originals>
Paper s
copy.
Register
Original
Left/Right
binding
Top
binding
Finished
Left/Right
binding
Top
binding
Back
Original
C h e ck d i r e c
C h e ck d i r e
original.
d
d
Left
binding
Right
binding
Register
Ba
Finished
Che
Se
sid
BookR
Duplex
BookR
Book
Back Edge ed
8
Replace the first original with the next one and press the
[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.
9
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.
5-3
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
2. Copying two-page originals onto separate sheets
[Page separation/Split copy modes]
(1) Page separation/Split copy from book originals
1
Set the originals to be copied.
2
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
3
Touch the “2 sided/Separation” [“2-sided/Split”] key.
The “2 sided/Separation” [“2-sided/Split”] screen will be
displayed.
With this mode, the two facing pages of an open-faced original such
as a book, a magazine, and the like are each copied onto a separate
sheet of paper.
12 1 2
21 1 2
NOTES
Inch specifications
• Only 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 17", A5R, B5R, A4R, B4 and A3 size
originals and 11" x 8 1/2" size copy paper can be used in this mode.
Depending upon the size of the originals, the image will be enlarged
or reduced to fit the size of the copy paper.
Metric specifications
• Only A5R, B5R, A4R, B4, A3, 8 1/2" x 11" and 11" x 17" size
originals and A4 size copy paper can be used in this mode.
Depending upon the size of the originals, the image will be enlarged
or reduced to fit the size of the copy paper.
Inch specifications
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig. size
Combine
Exposure
mode
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
(2) Page separation/Split copy from 2-sided originals
2
1
1
2
2
With this mode, the two sides of a 2-sided original are each copied
onto a separate sheet of paper.
1
1
2
NOTE
The Document Processor (option) must be installed on your copier in
order to use this mode.
5-4
User choice
Set
11x81/2"
Select
paper
Basic
Metric specifications (Asia Pacific)
• Only A5R, B5R, A4R, B4, A3, 8 1/2" x 11" and 11" x 17" size
originals and B5 or A4 size copy paper can be used in this mode.
Depending upon the size of the originals, the image will be enlarged
or reduced to fit the size of the copy paper.
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Function
Program
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2-sided/
Split
Select
size orig.
Merge copy
Exposure
mode
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
User choice
Function
Program
Set
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
4
Touch the “2 sided / 1 sided” [“2-sided / 1-sided”] key or
the “Book / 1 sided” [“Book / 1-sided”] key, as appropriate
to the type of originals being copied and the type of finished
copies to be made.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
11x81/2"
2 sided/Separation
Register
1 sided
➔1 sided
2 sided
➔1 sided
Book
➔1 sided
Able to copy 1 sided (separate) or
2 sided copy using 1 sided original,
Book original or 2 sided original.
Back
6
Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel
and verify the direction in which the originals were set.
IMPORTANT!
If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not
correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly.
Inch specifications
Close
<for 1-sided or 2-sided originals>
1 sided
➔2 sided
2 sided
➔2 sided
Book
➔2 sided
Paper size
Register
Back
Paper size
Book
R1-sided
Book
R2-sided
Close
Back
Back
Close
Check direction
Set the book original
top side direct to back.
Left top
corner
Close
Metric specifications
A bl e t o c o py 1 - s i d e d ( s e p a ra t e ) o r
2 - s i d e d c o py u s i n g 1 - s i d e d o r i g i n a l ,
book original or 2-sided original.
<for 1-sided or 2-sided originals>
Paper size
Register
5
Register
Set
Rear
Register
2-sided / Split
Set
11x81/2"
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Ready to copy.
1-sided
R2-sided
2-sided
R2-sided
Paper size
Set
11x81/2"
Metric specifications
1-sided
R1-sided
2-sided
R1-sided
<for open-faced originals>
Back
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Specify the binding direction of the originals.
<for open-faced originals>
Set
Paper size
Register
Back
Set
Close
Check direction
Set book or iginal top
side direction to back.
Inch specifications
<for 2-sided originals>
<for open-faced originals>
Back Edge
ady to copy.
to copy.
Separation
Registe on
Register
Original
d
d
d
1 sided
➔2 sided
2 sided
➔2 sided
Book
➔2 sided
Original
Open from
left/right
1 sided
➔2 sided
2 sided
➔2 sided
Book
➔2 sided
Open from
top
Open from
left
Open from
right
7
<for 2-sided originals>
<for open-faced originals>
to copy.
Ready to copy.
Register
R
Original
Original
ed
sided
1-sided
R2-sided
ed
sided
k
sided
2-sided
R2-sided
Book
R2-sided
Left/Right
binding
Top
binding
Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start.
If you set the originals in the optional Document Processor,
copying will start automatically.
If you set an original on the platen, a message will appear
telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next
step.
Metric specifications
ided / Split
Left top
corner
-sided
R2-sided
-sided
R2-sided
Left
binding
Right
binding
Book
R2-sided
8
Replace the first original with the next one and press the
[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.
9
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.
5-5
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
3. Making a margin space on the copies [Margin mode]
(1) Standard margin
Inch specifications
The image of the original can be shifted to the left or right and up or
down to make a margin (blank) space on the copy. The width of each
margin can be set to any 1/8" increment between 1/8" and 3/4".
A setting of “0” will leave no margin space.
Metric specifications
The image of the original can be shifted to the left or right and up or
down to make a margin (blank) space on the copy. The width of each
margin can be set to any 1 mm increment between 1 mm and 18 mm.
A setting of “0” will leave no margin space.
(2) Separate front and back margin settings
Inch specifications
When you are making 2-sided copies, the margin positions and widths
can be selected separately for the front and back sides. The width of
each margin can be set to any 1/8" increment between 1/8" and 3/4".
A setting of “0” will leave no margin space.
Metric specifications
When you are making 2-sided copies, the margin positions and widths
can be selected separately for the front and back sides. The width of
each margin can be set to any 1 mm increment between 1 mm and 18
mm. A setting of “0” will leave no margin space.
B
A
B
1
A
Set the originals to be copied.
IMPORTANT!
Set originals so that the top edge is facing either the back or the left of
the copier. Setting them in the wrong direction may cause the margin
to be created in the incorrect position.
NOTES
• It is also possible for you to select the default setting for the location
and width of the margins. (See “Margin width” on page 7-80.)
• If you select to have a left margin created during 2-sided copying
and the location for the back side margin is set to “Auto”, a right
margin that is the same width as the margin on the front side will be
automatically created on the back side of the copies.
2
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
3
Touch the “Margin/Centering” [“Margin/Imag.shift”] key.
The “Margin/Centering” [“Margin/Image shift”] screen will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig. size
Combine
Exposure
mode
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
User choice
Set
11x81/2"
Function
Program
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2-sided/
Split
Select
size orig.
Merge copy
Exposure
mode
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
5-6
User choice
Function
Program
Set
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
4
7
Touch the “Margin” key. The screen to set the front side
margin will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
11x81/2"
Register
Margin/Centering
Back
If you want to create a margin on the back side of the copies
that lines up with that on the front side, touch the “Auto” key.
If you want to set the margins for the front and back sides
separately, touch the “Front/Back margin” key. The screen to
set the back side margin will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Close
Paper size
Ready to copy.
None
Reposition image to left/right or
top/bottom, and also center image
on paper.
Margin
Set
11x81/2"
Back
Back page margin
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Centering
Auto
Front/Back
margin
Metric specifications
If "AUTO" is selected for duplex
copying, rear will have same margin
setting as that for the front page.
Left top
corner
Rear
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Margin/Image shift
Set
Back
Close
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Reposition image to left/right or
t o p / b o t t o m a n d c e n t e r i m a g e o n p a p e r.
None
Back
Back page margin
Margin
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Image
shift
Auto
5
Set
Front/Back
margin
Use the up/down and left/right cursor keys to select the
desired location and width of each margin.
I f " AU TO " i s s e l e c t e d a t t h e d u p l ex
c o py i n g , b a ck s i d e w i l l h ave s a m e m a r g i n
s e t t i n g a s t h a t fo r t h e f r o n t p a g e.
Back Edge
Left top
corner
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
11x81/2"
Register
Margin/Centering
Close
8
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Front page
(0~3/4)
0
Back
Use the up/down and left/right cursor keys to select the
desired location and width of each margin.
Inch specifications
"
None
(0~3/4)
Margin
1
Left
Centering
/4
"
Back page
margin
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Au to
Left top
corner
Rear
Back
Back page margin
(0~ /4)
3
0
"
Auto
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Margin/Image shift
Register
Front/Back
margin
Set
Back
(0~3/4)
0
"
Left top
corner
Metric specifications
None
Ready to copy.
Margin
Rear
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Fr o n t p a g e
Paper size
Set
Au t o
Left
Image
shift
6
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Back page
Metric specifications
Set
11x81/2"
Back page
margin
Back Edge
Back
Back page margin
Left top
corner
B a ck p a g e
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Auto
If you are making 2-sided copies, touch the “Back page
margin” key. The “Back page margin” screen will be
displayed.
Front/Back
margin
Back Edge
Left top
corner
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
11x81/2"
Register
Margin/Centering
(0~3/4)
Top
1
/4
Back
IMPORTANT!
"
None
(0~3/4)
Margin
Left
Centering
1
Au t o
/
2 "
Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel
and verify the direction in which the originals were set.
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Front page
9
Back page
margin
Rear
Left top
corner
If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not
correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly.
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Margin/Image shift
Register
Back
Set
10
Press the [Start] key.
Copying will start.
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Fro n t p a g e
Top
None
Margin
Image
shift
Au to
Left
Back page
margin
Back Edge
Left top
corner
5-7
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
4. Centering the copy image [Centering/Image shift mode]
With this mode you can center the image on the copy paper when you
copy onto a paper size that is larger than that of the original.
4
Touch the “Centering” [“Imag.shift”] key.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
11x81/2"
Margin/Centering
Register
None
Reposition image to left/right or
top/bottom, and also center image
on paper.
Margin
Back
Close
Centering
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Margin/Image shift
1
Set
Back
Close
Set the originals to be copied.
Reposition image to left/right or
t o p / b o t t o m a n d c e n t e r i m a g e o n p a p e r.
None
Margin
Image
shift
IMPORTANT!
Set originals so that the top edge is facing either the back or the left of
the copier. Setting them in the wrong direction may cause the image
to be copied in the incorrect position.
5
Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel
and verify the direction in which the originals were set.
Inch specifications
2
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
Set
11x81/2"
Register
Margin/Centering
Back
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
3
None
Touch the “Margin/Centering” [“Margin/Imag.shift”] key. The
“Margin/Centering” [“Margin/Image shift”] screen will be
displayed.
Margin
Inch specifications
Set
Left top
corner
Select
paper
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig. size
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Function
Paper size
Ready to copy.
11x81/2"
Exposure
mode
User choice
Rear
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Basic
Able to center scanned image on paper.
Centering
Margin/Image shift
Combine
Register
Back
Set
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
None
Margin
A bl e t o c e n t e r s c a n n e d i m a g e o n p a p e r.
Image
shift
Program
Back Edge
Left top
corner
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2-sided/
Split
Exposure
mode
Image
quality
Sort/
Finished
Basic
5-8
Merge copy
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Function
Program
IMPORTANT!
If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not
correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly.
Select
size orig.
User choice
Set
6
Press the [Start] key.
Copying will start.
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
5. Adding a space next to the copy images for making notes [Memo mode]
With this mode you can leave a space for adding notes next to the
copied image. It is also possible to fit the images of 2 originals onto
the same copy page along with a blank space for each.
● Copying one original onto one copy page (layout A)
1
Set the originals to be copied.
2
Touch the “Function” tab and then the “N Down” key.
The content of the next portion of the “Function” tab will be
displayed.
3
Touch the “Memo pages” key. The “Memo pages” screen will
be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto
Rotation
OHP
backing
Proof Copy
Memo
pages
Eco Print
Orig. set
direction
Invert
Mirror
Modify
Copy
Basic
● Copying two originals onto one copy page (layout B)
Set
11x81/2"
Up
Down
User choice
Function
Program
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto
Rotation
OHP back
Test copy
Memo
pages
Eco Print
Orig. set
direction
Invert
Mirror
Modify
copy
Basic
4
NOTE
Only 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 8 1/2", 11" x 17", B5R, B5, A4R, A4, B4 and A3
size copy paper can be used in this mode.
Set
Up
Down
User choice
Function
Program
Touch the “Layout A” key or the “Layout B” key, as
appropriate. The screen to make the layout settings will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Memo pages
Layout
Set
11x81/2"
50%
Border line
None
None
Solid
Layout A
Dotted
Layout B
Borders
Back
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Rear
Left top
corner
Metric specifications
Register
Memo pages
Layout
Set
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Border line
None
None
Solid
Layout A
Dotted
Layout B
Cropmark
Back
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Back Edge
Left top
corner
5-9
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
5
Select the desired direction of the layout.
Inch specifications
<Layout A>
<Layout B>
to copy.
to copy.
Register
Layout
Register
Layout
Border line
Border line
None
None
Solid
Solid
Dotted
Dotted
Borders
Borders
Metric specifications
<Layout A>
<Layout B>
to copy.
to copy.
Register
Layout
Border line
None
Register
Layout
Border line
None
Solid
Solid
Dotted
Dotted
Cropmark
Cropmark
6
Select the type of the borderline that you want to use to
separate the different areas.
7
Press the [Start] key.
Scanning of the originals will start.
If you set the originals in the optional Document Processor,
copying will start automatically.
If you set an original on the platen, a message will appear
telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next
step.
8
Replace the first original with the next one and press the
[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.
9
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.
5-10
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
6. Making copies with clean edges [Border erase modes]
(1) Erasing blemishes from edges of copies
(Sheet erase mode)
Inch specifications
With this mode, shadows, lines, etc., that occur around the edges of
copies made from sheet originals can be erased. A border of equal
width will be erased around all sides of the copied image. The width of
the border to be erased can be set to any 1/8" increment between
1/8" and 3/4". A setting of “0” will result in no border being erased.
(The areas that will be erased are shown as a in the illustration.)
Metric specifications
With this mode, shadows, lines, etc., that occur around the edges of
copies made from sheet originals can be erased. A border of equal
width will be erased around all sides of the copied image. The width of
the border to be erased can be set to any 1 mm increment between
1 mm and 18 mm. A setting of “0” will result in no border being erased.
(The areas that will be erased are shown as a in the illustration.)
(2) Erasing blemishes from the edges and middle of
copies made from books (Book erase mode)
Inch specifications
With this mode, you can make clean copies, even from thick books.
The width of the outside border to be erased can be set to any 1/8"
increment between 1/8" and 3/4". The width of the center area to be
erased can be set to any 1/8" increment between 1/8" and 1 1/2".
A setting of “0” will result in no border being erased.
(The area that will be erased as the outside border is shown as a in
the illustration, while that of the center area is shown as b.)
Metric specifications
With this mode, you can make clean copies, even from thick books.
The width of the outside border to be erased can be set to any 1 mm
increment between 1 mm and 18 mm. The width of the center area to
be erased can be set to any 1 mm increment between 1 mm and
36 mm. A setting of “0” will result in no border being erased.
(The area that will be erased as the outside border is shown as a in
the illustration, while that of the center area is shown as b.)
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
a
a
a
a
b
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
NOTE
It is possible for you to change the default setting for the width of the
erased border. (See “Erased border width” on page 7-81.)
NOTE
It is possible for you to change the default setting for the width of the
erased borders. (See “Erased border width” on page 7-81.)
5-11
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
(3) Erasing blemishes from the edges of copies using
individual border settings (Individual border erase
mode)
Inch specifications
With this mode, shadows, lines, etc., that occur around the edges of
copies made from sheet originals can be erased, but in this case you
can designate separate widths for each of the top, bottom, left and
right borders. The width of each border to be erased can be set to any
1/8" increment between 0 and 2".
(The area that will be erased as the top border is shown as a, the
bottom border is shown as b, the left border as c, and the right
border as d, in the illustration.)
Metric specifications
With this mode, shadows, lines, etc., that occur around the edges of
copies made from sheet originals can be erased, but in this case you
can designate separate widths for each of the top, bottom, left and
right borders. The width of each border to be erased can be set to any
1 mm increment between 0 and 50 mm.
(The area that will be erased as the top border is shown as a, the
bottom border is shown as b, the left border as c, and the right
border as d, in the illustration.)
1
Set the original to be copied.
2
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
3
Touch the “Border Erase” [“Erase Mode”] key. The “Border
Erase” [“Erase Mode”] screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig. size
Combine
Exposure
mode
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
User choice
Set
11x81/2"
Function
Program
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
NOTE
The default settings for the border widths are the same values as that
set for the sheet erase mode.
Select
paper
2-sided/
Split
Select
size orig.
Merge copy
Exposure
mode
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
User choice
Function
Set
Program
If you want to select the sheet erase mode or the book erase
mode, go to the next step.
If you want to select the individual border erase mode, go
directly to step 6.
5-12
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
4
Touch the “Sheet Erase” [“Border erase”] key or the “Book
Erase” key, as appropriate. The screen to set the outside
border and the center area will be displayed.
6
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
Register
Back
Individual
BordrErase
Book
Erase
Register
Erase Mode
Back
Set
Erase the border shadow of original
or shadow from centor of book.
Individual
BordrErase
Individual
Erase Mode
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Close
Register
Erase Mode
Erase edge of original or center of book
and copy.
None
Border
erase
Back
Close
Individual
Erase Mode
Book
erase
Touch the “+” key or the “–” key to change the displayed
border width to that desired.
* In metric specification copiers, the desired border width can
also be entered directly by touching the “#-Keys” key and
then using the keypad.
7
Touch the key that corresponds to the border whose width
you want to change. The screen to set that border width will
be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
Register
Border Erase
2"
Register
(0~3/4)
Border
Back
Close
/4
"
Center
1
/2
Top
2"
Back
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Bottom
None
(0~11/2)
1
Set
11x81/2"
11x81/2"
Border Erase
Sheet
Erase
"
Individual
BordrErase
Book
Erase
None
2"
Left
2"
Right
Left top
corner
Rear
Individual
BordrErase
Book
Erase
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
Register
Erase Mode
6 mm
Register
Erase Mode
(0~18)
Back
(0~36)
6
Border
Center
12
Close
Top
6 mm
Back
Set
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Bottom
None
Border
erase
Book
erase
None
Border
erase
Set
Erase edge of original or center of book
and copy.
None
Book
erase
Sheet
Erase
Close
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
5
Back
Book
Erase
Metric specifications
Border
erase
Register
None
Sheet
Erase
Set
11x81/2"
Border Erase
Close
Erase the border shadow of original
or shadow from centor of book.
None
Paper size
Ready to copy.
11x81/2"
Border Erase
Sheet
Erase
Touch the “Individual BordrErase” [“Individual Erase Mode”]
key. The screen to set the top, bottom, left or right border will
be displayed.
Individual
Erase Mode
6 mm
Left
6 mm
Right
Back Edge
Left top
Corner
Individual
Erase Mode
Book
erase
#-Keys
#-Keys
Go directly to step 10.
5-12-1
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
8
Touch the “+” key or the “–” key to change the displayed
border width to that desired.
* In metric specification copiers, the desired border width can
also be entered directly by touching the “#-Keys” key and
then using the keypad.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Back
Individual Border Erase
(0~2)
/4
1
Top
Set
11x81/2"
"
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Rear
Left top
corner
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Back
Individual Erase Mode
(0~50)
6
Top
#-Keys
9
10
Set
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Back Edge
Left top
Corner
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 7.
If you want to change the width of any of the other borders,
repeat steps 7 through 9.
Press the [Start] key.
Copying will start.
5-12-2
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
7. Fitting the image of either two or four originals onto a single copy page
[Combine/Merge Copy modes]
With this mode, the images from either 2 or 4 originals can be
reduced and then combined onto a single copy. The borderline of
each original can also be marked with either a solid line or a dotted
line.
(2) 4 in 1
Use this mode when you want to copy four originals onto one sheet.
This mode can also be used in conjunction with the 2-sided copy
modes in order to copy eight originals onto one sheet.
(When setting the originals on the platen, be sure to set the originals
in the correct order: 1, 2, 3 and then 4.)
1
NOTE
Only 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 8 1/2", 11" x 17", B5R, B5, A4R, A4, B4 and A3
size copy paper can be used in this mode.
(1) 2 in 1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
2
1
4
3
1
3
2
4
3
1
4
2
Use this mode when you want to copy two originals onto one sheet.
This mode can also be used in conjunction with the 2-sided copy
modes in order to copy four originals onto one sheet.
(When setting the originals on the platen, be sure to set the originals
in the correct order: 1 and then 2.)
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
5-13
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
1
Set the originals to be copied.
4
2
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
Touch the “2 in 1” [“2-in-1”] key or the “4 in 1” [“4-in-1”] key, as
appropriate.
The screen to make the layout settings will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Inch specifications
Paper Size Set
11x81/2"
Ready to copy.
Set
11x81/2"
Register
Combine
Back
Close
Combine
11x81/2"
Plain
8 /2x11"
Color
11x81/2"
Plain
11x81/2"
Recycled
Basic
APS
Bypass
Plain
Sort:Off
Reduce
/Enlarge
Sort/
Finished
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
User choice
AMS
Function
2 or 4 original pages can combine on
one page.
None
Orig.image
quality
1
Reduce
/Enlarge
Sort:On
Metric specifications
Program
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Metric specifications
Paper Size
Ready to copy.
Set
Back
Register
Merge copy
Set
Close
Merge copy
Plain
Colour
Plain
APS
Bypass
Plain
Basic
User choice
Sort:Off
Reduce/
Enlarge
Sort/
Finished
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
Recycled
AMS
Function
Sort:On
Image
quality
None
Reduce/
Enlarge
2-in-1
4-in-1
Program
5
3
Select the desired direction of the layout.
Inch specifications
Touch the “Combine” [“Merge copy”] key. The “Combine”
[“Merge copy”] screen will be displayed.
to copy.
Inch specifications
2 sided/
Separation
11x8 /2"
Select
orig. size
Combine
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
User choice
Layout
Set
Border line
Function
None
None
Solid
Solid
Dotted
Dotted
Borders
Borders
Metric specifications
to copy.
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
User choice
Function
Border line
Register
L ayo u t
Border line
Set
None
None
Solid
Solid
Dotted
Dotted
Cropmark
Cropmark
Merge copy
Reduce/
Enlarge
Basic
5-14
Select
size orig.
Exposure
mode
Sort/
Finished
to copy.
Register
L ayo u t
2-sided/
Split
Border line
Program
Metric specifications
Select
paper
Register
Layout
1
Exposure
mode
Basic
to copy.
Register
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2 or 4 originals can be printed
o n o n e p a g e.
Program
6
Select the type of the borderline that you want to use to
separate the images.
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
7
Press the [Start] key.
Scanning of the originals will start.
If you set the originals in the optional Document Processor,
copying will start automatically.
If you set an original on the platen, a message will appear
telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next
step.
8
Replace the first original with the next one and press the
[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.
9
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.
5-15
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
8. Printing page numbers on copies [Print page numbers mode]
When you make copies from multiple originals, you can have page
numbers printed on the corresponding copies in numerical order from
the first original. There are three styles of page numbers to choose
from: “-1-”, “P.1” and “1/n”.
* If you select “1/n” as the style of page numbers, the denominator will
indicate the total number of pages.
A
B
C
D
3
Touch the “Page #” [“Page numbering”] key. The “Page #”
[“Page numbering”] screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig. size
Combine
Exposure
mode
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
E
Basic
-1-
User choice
Set
11x81/2"
Function
Program
-2-3-4-5-
A
B
C
D
Metric specifications
-1-2-
A
B
C
A
D
B
E
C
D
Paper size
Ready to copy.
E
E
-1-
Select
paper
2-sided/
Split
Select
size orig.
Merge copy
Exposure
mode
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Set
-2-3-
A
Basic
B
C
D
User choice
Function
Program
E
P.1
P.2
P.3
4
P.4
P.5
A
B
C
D
E
Touch the key that corresponds to the style of page numbers
that you want to use. The screen to make settings for that
style will be displayed.
1/5
2/5
Inch specifications
3/5
4/5
5/5
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
11x81/2"
Back
Close
Page #
Register
None
Page # can be added on bottom of copy.
NOTE
Page numbers will be printed relative to the middle of the bottom of
the page. (The arrow in the illustration indicates the direction in which
the originals are set.)
Metric specifications
-1-1-
Abcde
Abcde
-1-
Abcde
Page numbering
Abcde
-1-
1
Set the originals to be copied.
2
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
5-16
Paper size
Ready to copy.
None
P.1
-1-
1/n
Register
Back
Set
Close
Pa g e # c a n b e a d d e d o n b o t t o m o f c o py.
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
5
If you want printing of the page numbers to be started from a
page other than the first page, touch the “Setting 1st page”
key.
The “Setting 1st page” screen will be displayed.
8
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
Register
Start page #
Start #
Setting
1st page
Setting
start #
Finish Page #
Denominator #
Last page
Setting
last page
Back
Close
Register
Star t page #
1
Star t #
1
Setting
1st page
Setting
Start page
Last page #
Denominator #
Set
Close
Auto
Set denominator #
Left top
corner
Rear
Back
Close
Star t page #
1
-1-
Au t o
Set
Denomin. #
Back Edge
Inch specifications
Paper size
Set
11x81/2"
Back
Setting 1st page
Page
Setting
1st page
Setting
Start page
Denominator #
Back
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
1/n
Last page
Au t o
Set
Denomin. #
Back Edge
Left top
corner
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to select the first page
number that will be printed.
* The desired page number can also be entered directly by
touching the “# keys” [“#-Keys”] key and then using the
keypad.
Inch specifications
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Ready to copy.
+
Paper size
Set
81/2x11"
Back
Setting start #
Rear
1
Last page #
Setting
last page
9
Star t #
Set
P.1
Left top
corner
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to select from which page
printing of the page numbers will start.
Ready to copy.
Register
Page numbering
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
None
Last page
Paper size
Ready to copy.
P.1
Setting
last page
6
Setting
start #
Denominator #
Last page
Paper size
Page numbering
1/n
Setting
1st page
Back
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Metric specifications
Ready to copy.
-1-
Start #
Finish Page #
Setting
last page
Left top
corner
Rear
Metric specifications
None
Register
Start page #
Auto
Set
11x81/2"
Page #
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
None
Set denominator #
Paper size
Ready to copy.
11x81/2"
Page #
None
If you want the first page number that is printed to be
something other than “1”, touch the “Setting start #” [“Setting
Start page”] key. The “Setting start #” screen will be
displayed.
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Left top
corner
+
Metric specifications
# keys
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Back
Setting 1st page
Pa g e
Ready to copy.
Paper size
Back
Setting start #
7
Left top
corner
Metric specifications
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Back Edge
Rear
Set
Set
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Left top
corner
#-Keys
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 5.
10
Back Edge
Left top
corner
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 8.
5-17
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
11
If you want the last page number that is printed to be on a
copy other than that for the last original, touch the “Setting
last page” key. The “Setting last page” screen will be
displayed.
13
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Page #
Start page #
Start #
Setting
1st page
Setting
start #
Finish Page #
Denominator #
Last page
Auto
Setting
last page
Set denominator #
Set
11x81/2"
Set
11x81/2"
Register
None
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to select, counting from the
final copy, how many pages you do NOT want to have page
numbers printed on.
Back
Back
Setting last page
Page
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Close
+
Last page
Manual
Left top
corner
Rear
Left top
corner
Rear
Metric specifications
Metric specifications
Ready to copy.
Star t page #
1
P.1
-1-
1/n
1
Setting
1st page
Setting
Start page
Last page #
Denominator #
Last page
Setting
last page
12
Star t #
Back
Pa g e
Check direction
Check direction of
or iginal.
Manual
Back Edge
Back Edge
Paper size
14
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 11.
If you selected the “1/n” style, the “Set denominator #”
[“Set Denomin. #”] key will be displayed.
15
If you want to manually select the denominator for the page
numbers, touch the “Set denominator #” [“Set Denomin. #”]
key. The “Setting denominator #” screen will be displayed.
Set
11x81/2"
Back
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Inch specifications
Last page
Manual
Rear
Left top
corner
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Start page #
Setting last page
Paper size
Back
Set
None
Setting
start #
Finish Page #
Denominator #
Setting
last page
Check direction
Check direction of
or iginal.
Start #
Setting
1st page
Last page
Close
Back
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Auto
Set denominator #
Rear
Left top
corner
Metric specifications
Last page
Manual
Back Edge
Left top
corner
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Page numbering
Star t page #
1
Setting
1st page
None
P.1
-1-
1/n
Last page #
Last page
Setting
last page
5-18
Set
11x81/2"
Page #
Metric specifications
Ready to copy.
Left top
corner
Left top
corner
Inch specifications
Setting last page
Close
Last page
Touch the “Manual” key.
The screen to designate the last page will be displayed.
Ready to copy.
Back
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Close
Auto
Set
Denomin. #
Set
Set
Setting last page
Register
Page numbering
None
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Paper size
Star t #
1
Setting
Start page
Back
Set
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Denominator #
Au t o
Set
Denomin. #
Back Edge
Left top
corner
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
16
Touch the “Manual” key.
The screen to designate the denominator will be displayed.
18
Inch specifications
Ready to copy.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Paper size
Set
Register
Close
Finished
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Manual
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Ready to copy.
Back
Close
Check direction
Set the book original
top side direct to back.
Book➔
Book
Left top
corner
Metric specifications
Paper size
Paper size
Set
Set
Back
Setting denominator #
Register
Finished
Book➔
Duplex
Rear
Left top
corner
Metric specifications
Register
Close
Finished
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Back
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Left/Right
binding
Top
binding
Auto
Manual
Back Edge
17
Back
Set
11x81/2"
Open from
left/right
Open from
top
Auto
Rear
Paper size
Set
11x81/2"
11x81/2"
Back
Setting denominator #
Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel
and verify the direction in which the originals were set.
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to select the desired
denominator for the page numbers.
* The desired denominator can also be entered directly by
touching the “# keys” [“#-Keys”] key and then using the
keypad.
19
Register
Finished
Back
Set
Close
Check direction
Set book or iginal top
side direction to back.
BookR
Duplex
BookR
Book
Back Edge
Left top
corner
Paper size
Left top
Corner
Press the [Start] key.
Copying will start.
Inch specifications
Ready to copy.
Paper size
Set
81/2x11"
Back
Setting denominator #
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Auto
+
Manual
# keys
Rear
Left top
corner
Metric specifications
Ready to copy.
Paper size
Back
Setting denominator #
Set
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Auto
Manual
#-Keys
Back Edge
Left top
corner
5-19
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
9. Overlaying one image over another [Form overlay mode]
This mode can be used to scan the first original (the “form”) into
memory and have its image overlaid onto copies made from
subsequent originals. If the optional Hard Disk is installed on your
copier, it is also possible to register and store in memory, in advance,
the images that you want to use as original forms.
3
Touch the “On” key.
The screen to set the shading level of the form image will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
A
B
C
A
B
C
Set
11x81/2"
Forms Overlay
Register
Off
Overlay first scanned image onto
the scanned image or on registered from.
Back
Close
On
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Form overlay
Close
Overlay 1st image on the scanned
image or on registered form.
Of
NOTE
Back
Set
On
Refer to “(2) Form registration” on page 6-1 for the procedure to
register images as forms.
1
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to select the level of shading
that you want to use for the original form.
The desired shading level can be set to any 10% increment
between 10% and 100%.
* A sample of the effect that the selected shading level will
produce will be displayed to the right of the entry field.
2
Touch the “Forms Overlay” [“Form overlay”] key. The “Forms
Overlay” [“Form overlay”] screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
4
Place from first then press start.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2 sided/
Separation
Register
Forms Overlay
Set
11x81/2"
Select
orig. size
Back
Close
Back
Close
(10~100)
50
Exposure
%
Combine
Off
Exposure
mode
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Sort/
Finished
Basic
User choice
Function
Form
Selected
Metric specifications
Program
Set form.
Press Start Key.
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2-sided/
Split
Scan form once
On
Register
Form overlay
Set
(10
Select
size orig.
Exposure
100)
50
%
Merge copy
Off
Exposure
mode
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
User choice
Function
On
Form
selection
Program
5
5-20
Scan form once
If the optional Hard Disk is installed on your copier, it is also
possible to register and store in memory, in advance, the
images that you want to use as original forms. If you want to
use a previously registered image as the form, touch the
“Form Selected” [“Form selection”] key and go to the next
step.
If you want to scan in a new image, go directly to step 9.
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
6
9
Touch the “Loading Form” key.
A list of registered forms will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Back
Select Form
Scan form
once
Loading
Form
If you are using the platen, set the original that you want to
use as the form.
Close
10
Overlay first scanned image onto
the scanned image or on registered from.
If you are using the optional Document Processor, make sure
that the original that you want to use as the form is on top of
the originals that you want to copy.
Press the [Start] key.
Copying will start.
If a message appears telling you to set the next original, go
to the next step.
Metric specifications
y
Setselection
form.
Form
Paper size
Back
Set
Close
Back
Close
Press Start key.
Form selection
Scan form
once
Loading
Form
7
Overlay 1st image on the scanned
image or on registered form.
11
Replace the first original with the next one and press the
[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.
12
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.
Select from that list the image that you want to use and then
touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 4.
Inch specifications
Back
Select Form
Form
Scan form
once
Loading
Form
600dpi
Form 005
11x81/2"
Form 004
11x8 /2"
Close
Up
1
Form 003
81/2x11"
Form 002
11x81/2"
Form 001
11x81/2"
Down
The arrow means direction of registered form.
Set original and form directions.
Metric specifications
Back
Form selection
Form
600dpi
Close
Up
Form006
Scan form
once
Loading
Form
Form005
Form004
Form003
Form002
Down
The arrow means direction of registered form.
Set original and form directions.
8
Set the originals that you want to copy and go directly to step
10.
5-21
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
10. Making booklets from sheet originals [Booklet/Stitching mode]
With this mode, you can use 1-sided or 2-sided originals to make
open-faced, two-sided copies in such a way that the finished copies
can be stacked and folded into a booklet format. You can also select
to have color paper or relatively thick paper fed as front and/or back
covers to the copy sets.
3 If “Top” is selected as the binding direction...
Copying will be performed so that the stacked and folded pages of the
finished copies read from top to bottom.
NOTES
1
• Only 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 8 1/2", 11" x 17", B5R, B5, A4R, A4, B4 and
A3 size copy paper can be used in this mode.
• It is possible for you to change the drawer[cassette] that will be used
to feed the cover sheets. (See “Cover drawer[cassette]” on
page 7-71.)
Inch specifications
• If the optional Document Finisher with Center Bind & Fold Unit is
installed on your copier, you will be able to select center binding
(stapling) and folding. Only 8 1/2" x 11" and 11" x 17" size copy paper
can be center folded and stapled.
Metric specifications
• If the optional Document Finisher with Center Bind & Fold Unit is
installed on your copier, you will be able to select center binding
(stapling) and folding. Only A4R, B4 and A3 size copy paper can be
center folded and stapled.
2
3
4
4
5
2
3
6
7
1
8
6
5
7
8
4 It is possible for you to select whether or not to copy onto the
front and/or back cover sheets.
Front cover
Back cover
Do NOT copy
a
b
a
b
Copy on outside
Copy on inside
1 If “Left” is selected as the binding direction...
Copying will be performed so that the stacked and folded pages of the
finished copies read from left to right.
Copy on both sides
2 If “Right” is selected as the binding direction...
Copying will be performed so that the stacked and folded pages of the
finished copies read from right to left.
4
5
6
7
8
2
8
5
7
5
4
7
5-22
3
1
3
8
1
2
6
3
2
6
1
1
2
4
NOTES
• The asterisk “ ” indicates the side of the cover on which copying
will be accomplished.
• The illustrations above are an example of when “Left” is selected as
the binding direction.
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
1
Set the first original to be copied.
5
2
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
Specify the binding direction of both the originals and the
finished copies.
Inch specifications
Paper size
2 sided mode.
Register
Booklet
3
Original
Touch the “Booklet” key. The “Booklet” screen will be
displayed.
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig. size
Combine
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
User choice
Set
11x81/2"
Exposure
mode
Function
Open from
left
Booklet
2-sided
Left/Right
Open from
right
None
Book
➔Booklet
2-sided
Top/Bottom
Open from
top
Saddle
Stitch
Close
Left top
corner
Rear
Paper size
Duplex Mode.
Register
Finished
Program
Stitching
Off
Paper size
Select
paper
2-sided/
Split
Select
size orig.
Merge copy
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Function
1 sided
Original
Exposure
mode
User choice
Back
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Stitching
Front cvr
None
Booklet
Ready to copy.
Stitching
Metric specifications
Metric specifications
Basic
Finishing
Off
Inch specifications
Set
11x81/2"
Set
6
Program
None
1-sided
Booklet
2-sided
Left/Right
Left
binding
Right
binding
Book
RBooklet
2-sided
Top/Bottom
Top
binding
Set
Back
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Stitching
Front cov.
None
Center
Staple
Back Edge
Left top
corner
If “It is impossible to copy in present setting mode. Change
setting of original and finishing mode.” appears, check (on
the right side of the touch panel) whether both the orientation
of the originals and the finish mode setting are correct or not.
Inch specifications
4
Touch the “Booklet” key. The screen to specify the binding
direction of the originals and the finished copies will be
displayed.
It is impossible to copy in present setting mode.
Change setting of original and finishing mode.
Register
Booklet
Original
Finishing
Stitching
Off
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Booklet
Set
11x81/2"
Register
Back
Paper size
Set
11x81/2"
Back
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Stitching
Front cvr
None
1 sided
Open from
left
Booklet
2-sided
Left/Right
Open from
right
None
Book
➔Booklet
2-sided
Top/Bottom
Open from
top
Saddle
Stitch
Rear
Left top
corner
Close
Metric specifications
None
Booklet
E d i t o n e o r t wo s i d e d o r i g i n a l p a g e s
and out put a book.
U s e B o o k - b o o k l e t fo r b o o k o r i g i n a l .
It is impossible to copy in present setting mode.
Change setting of original and finishing mode.
Register
Booklet
Book
➔Booklet
Original
Finished
Stitching
Off
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Booklet
None
Booklet
Register
Back
Set
Stitching
Front cov.
2-sided
Left/Right
Left
binding
Right
binding
2-sided
Top/Bottom
Top
binding
Center
Staple
None
1-sided
Booklet
Book
RBooklet
Paper size
Back
Set
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
None
Back Edge
Left top
corner
Close
Edit 1- and 2-sided originals
and output as book.
U s e B o o k R b o o k l e t fo r b o o k o r i g i n a l .
Book
RBooklet
5-23
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
7
If the optional Document Finisher with Center Bind & Fold
Unit is installed on your copier, the “Saddle Stitch” [“Center
Staple”] key will be displayed and you will be able to select
center binding (stapling) and folding of the copy sets. In this
case, if you DO want the center stapling and folding
operation to be performed, touch the “Saddle Stitch” [“Center
Staple”] key and go to the next step.
9
If you want to add covers, touch the “Stitching Front cvr”
[“Stitching Front cov.”] key and go to the next step.
If you do NOT want to add covers, go directly to step 11.
Inch specifications
Paper size
2 sided mode.
Register
Booklet
Original
If you do NOT want the stapling and folding operation to be
performed, go directly to step 9.
Paper size
2 sided mode.
Set
Register
Finishing
Stitching
Off
None
1 sided
Open from
left
Stitching
Front cvr
Booklet
2-sided
Left/Right
Open from
right
None
Book
➔Booklet
2-sided
Top/Bottom
Open from
top
Saddle
Stitch
Back
Stitching
Front cvr
None
1 sided
Open from
left
Booklet
2-sided
Left/Right
Open from
right
None
Book
➔Booklet
2-sided
Top/Bottom
Open from
top
Saddle
Stitch
Register
Booklet
Finished
Stitching
Off
None
1-sided
Booklet
2-sided
Left/Right
Left
binding
Right
binding
Book
RBooklet
2-sided
Top/Bottom
Top
binding
Original
Rear
Finished
Left top
corner
Stitching
Off
None
1-sided
Booklet
2-sided
Left/Right
Left
binding
Right
binding
Book
RBooklet
2-sided
Top/Bottom
Top
binding
Stitching
Front cov.
None
Center
Staple
Back Edge
Back
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
or iginal.
10
Touch the “Cover” key and select whether or not (and where)
to copy on each of the front and back covers.
Inch specifications
Back Edge
Left top
corner
Paper size
2 sided mode.
Back
Blank
Back copy
Blank
Back copy
Cover
Front copy
2 sided
copy
Front copy
2 sided
copy
Pape
Front cover
Set
81/2x11"
100%
Back
Close
Off
Metric specifications
Paper size
Stitch. front cover.
Back
Bind &
Fold
5-24
Back cover
Front cover
Metric specifications
Bind
& Fold
Close
Rear cover
Duplex Mode.
Off
Set
11x81/2"
No cover
Saddle Stitch
Left top
corner
Set
Inch specifications
Duplex Mode.
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Front cover
Saddle Stitch
Set
Back
Register
Booklet
Stitching
Front cov.
None
Center
Staple
Paper size
Touch the “Bind & Fold” key.
* It is possible for you to center staple and fold, up to 10 copy
sheets (40 layout pages) at one time.
2 sided mode.
Left top
corner
Rear
Duplex Mode.
Paper size
Duplex Mode.
8
Close
Metric specifications
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Metric specifications
Or iginal
Back
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Stitching
11x81/2"
Booklet
Original
Finishing
Off
Inch specifications
Set
11x81/2"
Paper size
Back
Set
Close
No cover
Blank
Back copy
Blank
Back copy
Cover
Front copy
2-sided
copy
Front copy
2-sided
copy
Set
Close
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
11
Press the [Start] key.
Scanning of the originals will start.
If you set the originals in the optional Document Processor,
copying will start automatically.
If you set an original on the platen, a message will appear
telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next
step.
12
Replace the first original with the next one and press the
[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.
13
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.
5-25
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
11. Making booklets from book originals [Book to Booklet mode]
4
6
6
AB
2
5
● Without a cover
AB
2
6
AB
3
5
1
2
4
When the finished copies are folded, the front and back of the copy
set will be blank.
1
5-26
5
1
AB
3
AB
3
4
3
2
1
• Only 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 8 1/2", 11" x 17", A5R, B5R, A4R, B4 and A3
size originals and 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 8 1/2", 11" x 17", B5R, B5, A4R,
A4, B4 and A3 size copy paper can be used in this mode.
• It is possible for you to change the drawer[cassette] that will be used
to feed the cover sheets. (See “Cover drawer[cassette]” on page
7-71.)
Inch specifications
• If the optional Document Finisher with Center Bind & Fold Unit is
installed on your copier, you will be able to select center binding
(stapling) and folding. Only 8 1/2" x 11" and 11" x 17" size copy paper
can be center folded and stapled.
Metric specifications
• If the optional Document Finisher with Center Bind & Fold Unit is
installed on your copier, you will be able to select center binding
(stapling) and folding. Only A4R, B4 and A3 size copy paper can be
center folded and stapled.
The original that will be used as the cover will be scanned first so that,
when the finished copies are folded, that page will act as the front and
back cover to the copy set.
4
NOTES
● With a cover
6
With this mode, you can add covers, and either copy onto them or not,
so that the finished copy sets will appear like a magazine, etc.
5
1
Set the open-faced (book, etc.) original to be copied.
2
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
3
5
Touch the “Booklet” key. The “Booklet” screen will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig. size
Combine
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
User choice
Set
Function
4
None
Book
Left
Open from
left
Booklet
Book
Right
Open from
right
Copy front
2-sided/
Split
Select
size orig.
Merge copy
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Function
Set
Copy on
front cvr
None
Register
Original
Finished
C o py f r o n t
Off
None
Booklet
Book
Left
Book
Right
Left
binding
Right
binding
Inch specifications
Paper size
Set
11x81/2"
Booklet
Register
None
E d i t o n e o r t wo s i d e d o r i g i n a l p a g e s
and out put a book.
U s e B o o k - b o o k l e t fo r b o o k o r i g i n a l .
Back
6
None
If the optional Document Finisher with Center Bind & Fold
Unit is installed on your copier, the “Saddle Stitch” [“Center
Staple”] key will be displayed and you will be able to select
center binding (stapling) and folding of the copy sets. In this
case, if you DO want the center stapling and folding
operation to be performed, touch the “Saddle Stitch” [“Center
Staple”] key and go to the next step.
Close
If you do NOT want the stapling and folding operation to be
performed, go directly to step 8.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Set first page.
Press "Start" key.
Metric specifications
Register
Original
Finishing
Back
Close
None
Book
Left
Open from
left
Booklet
Book
Right
Open from
right
Edit 1- and 2-sided originals
and output as book.
U s e B o o k R b o o k l e t fo r b o o k o r i g i n a l .
Back
Close
Check direction
Set the book original
top side direct to back.
Copy on
front cvr
None
Saddle
Stitch
Book
➔Booklet
Booklet
Copy front
Set
Off
Register
Set
11x81/2"
Booklet
Ready to copy.
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
Set book original top
s i d e d i r e c t i o n t o b a ck .
Copy on
front cov.
Book
➔Booklet
Paper size
Back
Set
Center
Staple
Book
RBooklet
Program
Ready to copy.
Paper size
Set first page.
Press "START" button.
Booklet
Touch the “Book / Booklet” key. The screen to specify the
binding direction of the originals and the finished copies will
be displayed.
None
Close
Metric specifications
Select
paper
Booklet
Back
Check direction
Set the book original
top side direct to back.
Saddle
Stitch
Book
➔Booklet
Exposure
mode
Booklet
Finishing
Off
Paper size
Ready to copy.
User choice
Register
Original
Program
Set
11x81/2"
Booklet
Metric specifications
Basic
Paper size
Set first page.
Press "Start" key.
11x81/2"
Exposure
mode
Basic
Specify the binding direction of both the originals and the
finished copies.
Metric specifications
Book
RBooklet
Paper size
Set first page.
Press "START" button.
Register
Booklet
Original
Finished
C o py f r o n t
Off
None
Booklet
Book
RBooklet
Book
Left
Book
Right
Left
binding
Right
binding
Back
Set
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
Set book original top
s i d e d i r e c t i o n t o b a ck .
Copy on
front cov.
None
Center
Staple
5-27
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
7
Touch the “Bind & Fold” key.
* It is possible for you to center staple and fold, up to 10 copy
sheets (40 layout pages) at one time.
9
Touch the “On” key.
Inch specifications
Set first page.
Press "Start" key.
Inch specifications
Pape
Set first page.
Press "Start" key.
Copy on front cover
Set
81/2x11"
100%
Back
Saddle Stitch
Paper size
Set
11x81/2"
Back
Close
Check direction
Set the book original
top side direct to back.
Close
When selecting "ON" for copying on the
front cover, follow the instruction.
1. Scan front cover book original
2. Start scan book originals
Off
On
Off
Bind &
Fold
Metric specifications
Set first page.
Press "START" button.
Metric specifications
Copy on front cover
Paper size
Set first page.
Press "START" button.
Set
Back
Saddle Stitch
Paper size
Back
Set
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
Set book original top
s i d e d i r e c t i o n t o b a ck .
Close
Off
On
W h e n s e l e c t i n g " O N " fo r c o py i n g o n t h e
f r o n t c ove r, fo l l ow t h e i n s t r u c t i o n .
1 . S c a n f r o n t c ove r b o o k o r i g i n a l .
2 . S t a r t s c a n b o o k o r i g i n a l s.
Off
Bind
& Fold
8
If you want to add covers, touch the “Copy on front cvr”
[“Copy on front cov.”] key. The “Copy on front cover” screen
will be displayed.
At this point, if you do NOT want to copy onto the covers, go
directly to step 10.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Set first page.
Press "Start" key.
Set
11x8 /2"
1
Register
Booklet
Original
Finishing
Copy front
Off
None
Book
Left
Open from
left
Booklet
Book
Right
Open from
right
Back
IMPORTANT!
If you DO want to copy onto the covers, be absolutely certain to set
the original that you want to have copied onto the cover first.
10
Close
Press the [Start] key.
Scanning of the original will start.
When a message appears telling you to set the next original,
go to the next step.
Check direction
Set the book original
top side direct to back.
Copy on
front cvr
None
Saddle
Stitch
Book
➔Booklet
Metric specifications
Paper size
Set first page.
Press "START" button.
Register
Booklet
Or iginal
Finished
Copy front
Off
None
Booklet
Book
RBooklet
5-28
Book
Left
Book
Right
Left
binding
Right
binding
Back
Set
Close
Check direction
Set book or iginal top
side direction to back.
Copy on
front cov.
None
Center
Staple
11
Replace the first original with the next one and press the
[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.
12
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
12. Automatic sorting of copy sets without the Document Finisher
[Sort/Finished mode]
Since copying in this mode is performed after multiple originals are
scanned and memorized, copies can be sorted into the required
number of sets even without the optional Document Finisher.
3
Touch the “Sort/Finished” key. The “Sort/Finished” screen will
be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
When “Sort:ON” and “On” [“1 set”] are
selected
3
2
1
3
3
2
2
1
1
Select
paper
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig. size
Combine
Exposure
mode
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
User choice
Set
11x81/2"
Function
Program
3
2
Metric specifications
1
Paper size
Ready to copy.
When “Sort:OFF” and “On” [“Output each
page”] are selected
1
1
1
3
2-sided/
Split
Select
size orig.
Merge copy
Exposure
mode
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
2
2
2
User choice
Function
Program
2
1
Select
paper
Set
3
3
3
4
Touch the “Sort:ON” key.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
(when there is paper loaded of the same
size but different orientation)
Register
Sort/Finished
Sort
Set
11x81/2"
Back
Close
Offset
Sort:Off
Off
Sort:On
On
Rear
NOTES
Metric specifications
• If you do not have paper of the same size but different orientations
available for paper feed, copies will be ejected without being
“sorted” in this way.
• You can also select whether or not the Sort and/or the Finished
modes will be the default setting in the initial mode. (See “Sort/
Finished mode ON/OFF” on page 7-78.)
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Sort/Finished
Sor t
Back
Set
Close
Group
Sort:Off
Off
Sort:On
1 set
1
Set the originals to be copied.
5
Touch the “On” [“1 set”] key.
2
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
6
Use the keypad to set the number of copies to be made.
7
Press the [Start] key.
Copying will start.
5-29
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
13. Auto rotation function
If the orientation of the original is different from that of the paper
loaded in the drawers[cassettes], the image will be automatically
turned 90 degrees counter-clockwise for copying. No special setting is
required in order to use this function.
2
Touch the “Auto Rotation” key. The “Auto Rotation” screen
will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto
Rotation
OHP
backing
Proof Copy
Memo
pages
Eco Print
Orig. set
direction
Invert
Mirror
Modify
Copy
Basic
Set
11x81/2"
Up
Down
User choice
Function
Program
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto
Rotation
OHP back
Test copy
Memo
pages
Eco Print
Orig. set
direction
Invert
Mirror
Modify
copy
Set
Up
Down
NOTES
• This function will only work with 5 1/2" x 8 1/2", 8 1/2" x 11",
11" x 8 1/2", A6R, B6R, A5R, B5R, B5, A4R and A4 size copy paper.
• You can also select whether or not the Auto Rotation mode will be
the default setting in the initial mode. (See “Auto Rotation mode ON/
OFF” on page 7-79.)
Basic
3
User choice
Function
Program
Touch the “No Rotate” key.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
If you want to disengage the auto rotation function, perform the
following procedure.
1
Touch the “Function” tab and then the “▼ Down” key.
The content of the next portion of the “Function” tab will be
displayed.
Set
11x81/2"
Auto Rotation
Register
No Rotate
When original and paper have different
direction, image will be rotated.
Back
Close
Rotate
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto Rotation
No rotate
Rotate
5-30
Register
Back
Set
Close
W h e n o r i g i n a l a n d p a p e r h ave d i f fe r e n t
direction, original will be rotated
a u t o m a t i c a l l y.
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
14. Adding a front and/or back cover to your copy sets [Cover mode]
With this mode, you can select to have color paper or relatively thick paper fed as front and/or back covers to your copy sets.
NOTE
It is possible for you to change the drawer[cassette] that will be used to feed the cover sheets. (See “Cover drawer[cassette]” on page 7-71.)
You can select separately whether you want both sides or only one side of both the front and back covers to be copied onto, or to have either or
both of them left completely blank. Select also whether or not you even want to include a back cover at all.
Front cover
Back cover
2 sided copy[Duplex Copy]*
Front copy
Back copy*
Blank
No back cover
* The illustrations above show the result when sets of 2-sided copies are being made.
If you are making sets of 1-sided copies, copying will not be performed on the rear side of the covers even if the 2-sided copy [Duplex Copy] or
Back copy settings are selected.
5-31
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
1
Set the originals to be copied.
5
2
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
Select the desired settings for the front cover.
Inch specifications
3
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Touch the “Cover Mode” key. The “Cover Mode” screen will be
displayed.
Set
11x81/2"
Cover Mode
Register
Front cover
Rear cover
No cover
Blank
Back copy
No cover
Cover
Front copy
2 sided
copy
Cover
Back
Close
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
11x81/2"
Metric specifications
Select
paper
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig. size
Combine
Exposure
mode
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Basic
User choice
Function
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Cover Mode
Fr o n t c ove r
Back
Set
Close
B a ck c ove r
Booklet
Program
No cover
Blank
Back copy
No cover
Cover
Front copy
Duplex
Copy
Cover
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2-sided/
Split
Select
size orig.
Merge copy
Exposure
mode
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
4
User choice
Function
Set
6
Touch the “Cover” key or the “No cover” key, as appropriate,
to select whether or not you want to include a back cover.
If you selected “Cover”, the screen to make the back cover
settings will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Program
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Touch the “Cover” key. The screen to make the front cover
settings will be displayed.
Set
11x81/2"
Cover Mode
Register
Front cover
Rear cover
Back
Close
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Cover Mode
Set
11x81/2"
Register
Back
No cover
Blank
Back copy
No cover
Cover
Front copy
2 sided
copy
Cover
Close
Front cover
Metric specifications
No cover
Cover
Insert Color or Thick, etc paper
as a front/back cover.
Able to copy on same paper.
Set the cover paper for specify
drawer.
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Cover Mode
Fr o n t c ove r
Back
Set
Close
B a ck c ove r
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Cover Mode
Register
Back
Set
No cover
Blank
Back copy
No cover
Cover
Front copy
Duplex
Copy
Cover
Close
Front cover
No cover
Inser t front & back cover paper (Colour/
Thick etc...) to head & end of copy.
Cover
Set cover paper in dedignated
paper cassette.
7
Select the desired settings for the back cover.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
11x81/2"
Cover Mode
Register
Front cover
Rear cover
Back
Close
No cover
Blank
Back copy
No cover
Blank
Back copy
Cover
Front copy
2 sided
copy
Cover
Front copy
2 sided
copy
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
5-32
Cover Mode
Register
Fr o n t c ove r
B a ck c ove r
Back
Set
Close
No cover
Blank
Back copy
No cover
Blank
Back copy
Cover
Front copy
Duplex
Copy
Cover
Front copy
Duplex
Copy
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
8
Press the [Start] key.
Scanning of the originals will start.
If you set the originals in the optional Document Processor,
copying will start automatically.
If you set an original on the platen, a message will appear
telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next
step.
9
Replace the first original with the next one and press the
[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.
10
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.
5-33
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
15. Original size selection mode
With this mode, if you manually select a size for the original, only that
size image will be scanned for copying. Use this mode as well when
copying from originals of non-standard sizes.
3
Touch the “Select orig. size” [“Select size orig.”] key. The
“Select original size” [“Select size original”] screen will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
8 1/2" x 11"
A4
A
B
C
Select
paper
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig. size
Combine
Exposure
mode
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
User choice
Set
11x81/2"
Function
Program
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
NOTES
• You can register the size of non-standard originals that you often
use as a custom original size. (See “4. Original size registration” on
page 7-90.)
• ALWAYS set non-standard sized originals on the platen.
• Once you select the original size under this mode, you can copy with
originals set on the platen even with the optional Document
Processor open.
• If this mode is used in combination with the Centering/Image shift
mode, you can, for example, have the image of non-standard sized
originals centered on standard sized copy paper. (See “4. Centering/
Image shift mode” on page 5-8.)
1
Set the originals to be copied.
2
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
Select
paper
2-sided/
Split
Select
size orig.
Merge copy
Exposure
mode
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
4
User choice
Function
Set
Program
Select the size of the originals.
If you want to select a standard scanning size, touch the key
that corresponds to the desired size and then go directly to
step 9.
If you want to select a standard size other than those
displayed, go to the next step.
If you want to select the dimensions of the scan area
manually, go directly to step 7.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
11x81/2"
Back
Register
Select original size
Close
User regist.
Auto
81/2 x 14"
11 x 15"
51/2 x 51/2"
Select
size
11 x 17"
51/2 x 81/2"
A4
81/2 x 81/2"
Input size
81/2 x 11"
81/2 x 51/2"
Cardstock
A4
11 x 11"
Other
stand. Size
11 x 81/2"
9 x 9"
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Back
Register
Select size original
Set
Close
Use regist
Auto
100X100mm
Select
size
150X150mm
200X200mm
Input size
Others
stand. Size
Folio
120X120mm
NOTE
If you have registered a custom original size, you will be able to select
that size for use in this mode. (See “4. Original size registration” on
page 7-90.)
5-34
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
5
Touch the “Other stand. Size” [“Others stand.Size”] key.
6
Select the size of the originals and then proceed to step 9.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
11x81/2"
Back
Register
Select original size
A3
B4
B5
8K
Select
size
A5
B5
Folio
16K
Input size
A5
B5
81/2 x 13"
Other
stand. Size
A6
B6
P. Card
Close
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Select size original
Select
size
11 x 17"
81/2 x 13"
81/2 x 14"
Pstcard
Input size
51/2 x 81/2"
8K
Others
stand. Size
81/2 x 51/2"
16K
Back
Set
Close
7
Touch the “Input size” key. The screen to set the dimensions
of the scan area will be displayed.
8
Based on the left rear corner of the platen being a setting of
“0”, touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change the dimensions
of the scan area to the desired setting.
* In metric specification copiers, the dimensions can also be
entered directly by touching the “#-Keys” key and then
using the keypad.
Inch specifications
Paper Size
11x81/2"
Ready to copy.
Register
Select original size
2
115/8
2
2
Back
Set
Close
17
"
2
"
Select
size
Set original on platen and input
s c a n n i n g ra n g e. ( Y s i d e, X s i d e )
Input size
Other
stand. Size
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Select size original
Input size
9
Close
S c a n n i n g ra n g e c a n b e s e t w i t h
X-Y direction when original is
p l a c e d a t l e f t r e a r c o r n e r.
Select size
Others
stand. Size
Back
Set
#-Keys
#-Keys
Press the [Start] key.
Copying will start.
5-35
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
16. Feeding paper as a backing sheet for OHP transparencies
[Transparency + backing sheet mode]
When 2 or 3 transparencies are piled on top of one another, static
electricity can cause problems. This mode automatically places a
backing sheet between the transparencies during copying for easy
handling. You can also select whether or not to have the image of the
original copied onto the backing sheet, or even make multiple copies
from the same original.
1
Set the originals to be copied.
2
Set the transparency film on the multi-bypass tray.
IMPORTANT!
When copying onto transparencies, ALWAYS use the multi-bypass
tray.
B
A
● Copying onto the backing sheet
With this setting, after the original is copied onto the transparency, the
same image will be copied onto the backing sheet as well. (The
asterisk “*” in the illustration indicates the transparencies.)
IMPORTANT!
• Fan through the transparencies before setting them.
• Up to 25 transparencies can be set on the multi-bypass tray at one
time.
• Make sure that paper of the same size and orientation as the
transparencies has been loaded into a drawer[cassette].
3
Touch the “Function” tab and then the “▼ Down” key.
The content of the next portion of the “Function” tab will be
displayed.
4
Touch the “OHP backing” [“OHP back”] key. The “OHP
backing” [“OHP back”] screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto
Rotation
OHP
backing
Proof Copy
Memo
pages
Eco Print
Orig. set
direction
Invert
Mirror
Modify
Copy
Basic
Set
11x81/2"
Up
Down
User choice
Function
Program
Metric specifications
● Leaving the backing sheet blank
With this setting, the original will be copied onto the transparency but
the backing sheet will be left blank. (The asterisk “*” in the illustration
indicates the transparencies.)
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto
Rotation
OHP back
Test copy
Memo
pages
Eco Print
Orig. set
direction
Invert
Mirror
Modify
copy
Basic
5-36
Up
Down
User choice
Function
Program
Set
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
5
Touch the “Copy” key or the “Blank” key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications
Paper Size
11x81/2"
Ready to copy.
OHP backing
backing
None
Copy
Register
Back
Set
Close
I n s e r t a bl a n k p a p e r b e t we e n p i e c e o f
O H P f i l m , o r c o py t o a O H P b a ck p a p e r.
P l a c e t h e O H P f i l m i n t h e by p a s s.
Blank
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Back
Set
OHP back
bac
Register
Close
None
I n s e r t bl a n k p a p e r b e t we e n O H P f i l m s o r
c o py t o O H P b a ck p a p e r.
Copy
P l a c e O H P f i l m o n by p a s s.
Blank
6
Press the [Start] key.
Copying will start.
5-37
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
17. Inverting black and white [Invert mode]
With this mode, you can make copies where the black and white
areas of the image are inverted (or reversed).
* If multiple inverted copies are being made, “Please wait Now
cleaning” may be displayed.
5
Touch the “On” key.
Inch specifications
Paper Size
11x81/2"
Ready to copy.
Invert
Off
On
Register
Back
Set
Close
C o py t h e s c a n n e d i m a g e w i t h r eve r s i n g
bl a ck a n d w h i t e p a r t s.
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Invert
Off
On
1
Set the originals to be copied.
2
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
3
Touch the “▼ Down” key. The content of the next portion of
the “Function” tab will be displayed.
4
Touch the “Invert” key. The “Invert” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto
Rotation
OHP
backing
Proof Copy
Memo
pages
Eco Print
Orig. set
direction
Invert
Mirror
Modify
Copy
Basic
Set
11x81/2"
Up
Down
User choice
Function
Program
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto
Rotation
OHP back
Test copy
Memo
pages
Eco Print
Orig. set
direction
Invert
Mirror
Modify
copy
Basic
5-38
Up
Down
User choice
Function
Program
Set
6
Press the [Start] key.
Copying will start.
Register
Back
C o py s c a n n e d i m a g e w i t h
bl a ck a n d w h i t e p a r t s r eve r s e d .
Set
Close
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
18. Making mirror image copies [Mirror image mode]
5
With this mode, you can make mirror image copies.
Touch the “On” key.
Inch specifications
Paper Size
11x81/2"
Ready to copy.
Mirror
Register
Back
Set
Close
Off
On
R eve r s e s c a n n e d i m a g e l e f t t o r i g h t ,
m i r r o r i m a g e.
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Mirror
1
Set the originals to be copied.
2
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
3
Touch the “▼ Down” key. The content of the next portion of
the “Function” tab will be displayed.
4
Touch the “Mirror” key. The “Mirror” screen will be displayed.
Register
Back
Set
Close
Off
On
6
R eve r s e d s c a n n e d i m a g e l e f t t o r i g h t
a s a r e f l e c t i o n i n t h e m i r r o r.
Press the [Start] key.
Copying will start.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto
Rotation
OHP
backing
Proof Copy
Memo
pages
Eco Print
Orig. set
direction
Invert
Mirror
Modify
Copy
Basic
Set
11x81/2"
Up
Down
User choice
Function
Program
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto
Rotation
OHP back
Test copy
Memo
pages
Eco Print
Orig. set
direction
Invert
Mirror
Modify
copy
Basic
Set
Up
Down
User choice
Function
Program
5-39
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
19. Making a test copy prior to large volume copying [Proof mode]
With this mode, you can use the same settings to create a single set
of test copies in order to verify the results prior to actually starting to
make a large number of copies or copy sets. This way, if there is a
problem with the copies, you can cancel print out in order to change
the settings and eliminate a great majority of miss-copying.
5
Touch the “On” key.
Inch specifications
Paper
Ready to copy.
Proof Copy
Off
On
Set
81/2x11
Register
Back
Close
W h e n " O n " i s s e l e c t e d , c o py i n g s t o p s
after one set is ejected.
T h i s i s u s e f u l fo r c h e ck i n g f i n i s h i n g .
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Test copy
Off
On
1
Set the originals to be copied.
2
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
3
Touch the “▼ Down” key. The content of the next portion of
the “Function” tab will be displayed.
4
Touch the “Proof Copy” [“Test copy”] key. The “Proof Copy”
[“Test copy”] screen will be displayed.
6
Register
Back
Set
Close
I f " O n " i s s e l e c t e d , c o py i n g s t o p s a f t e r
one set is ejected.
F i n i s h i n g r e s u l t c a n t h e n b e c h e cke d .
Press the [Start] key.
Copying will start.
If a message appears telling you to set the next original, go
to the next step.
7
Replace the first original with the next one and press the
[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.
8
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying of the test copy set will
start.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto
Rotation
OHP
backing
Proof Copy
Memo
pages
Eco Print
Orig. set
direction
Invert
Mirror
Modify
Copy
Basic
Set
11x81/2"
Up
Down
User choice
Function
Program
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto
Rotation
OHP back
Test copy
Memo
pages
Eco Print
Orig. set
direction
Invert
Mirror
Modify
copy
Basic
5-40
Up
Down
User choice
Function
Program
Set
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
9
Once the test copy set is complete, a screen will be
displayed in order to verify whether or not you want to make
the initially designated number of copy sets at the present
settings, and the copier will enter a waiting-to-copy state.
Check the test copies.
Inch specifications
C h e ck p r o o f c o py.
To s t o p a n d r e t r y, p r e s s " C a n c e l " key.
To c o n t i nu e t o p r i n t , p r e s s " S t a r t " key.
Or ig. page
11x81/2"
1 sided
Rear
Count/Set
100%
APS
11x81/2"
2 sided
Sort
Output
Cancel
Inner tray
Change
Preset
Job130
Metric specifications
C h e ck t e s t c o py.
To s t o p a n d r e t r y , p r e s s " C a n c e l " key.
To c o n t i nu e t o p r i n t , p r e s s " S t a r t " key.
Original
A4
1-sided
Rtop/Rear
Count / set
100%
APS
A4
2-sided
Sort
Output
Cancel
Inner tray
Change
Preset
JOB130
● If there is no problem with the copies…
Press the [Start] key and copying of the initially designated
number of copy sets will start.
If you want to change the number of copies to be made,
touch the “Change Preset” key and enter the actual number
of copies you do want to make.
● If there is some problem with the copies…
Touch the “Cancel” key to cancel the copy job and start the
procedure from the beginning.
5-41
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
20. Making more of the same copies after a copy job is finished
[Repeat copy mode]
With this mode, if you think you might want to make another set of the
same copies even after the initial copy job is finished, simply turn the
repeat copy mode ON and you can make the necessary number of
additional copies later. In order to maintain privacy, you can make it
necessary to enter a security code in order to use the repeat copy
mode so that, if the entered code doesn’t match the registered
security code, it will not be possible to use the repeat copy mode.
4
Touch the “Modify Copy” key. The “Modify Copy” screen will
be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto
Rotation
OHP
backing
Proof Copy
Memo
pages
Eco Print
Orig. set
direction
Invert
Mirror
Modify
Copy
Basic
Set
11x81/2"
Up
Down
User choice
Function
Program
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto
Rotation
OHP back
Test copy
Memo
pages
Eco Print
Orig. set
direction
Invert
Mirror
Modify
copy
Basic
NOTES
• The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to
use this mode.
• All data for repeat copying will be deleted when the power switch is
turned OFF.
• Repeat copying registration is not available for print out under
document management or with the form overlay mode.
• You can prohibit repeat copying as well as make repeat copying the
default setting in the initial mode. (See “Repeat copying ON/OFF” on
page 7-83.)
5
Set
Up
Down
User choice
Function
Program
Touch the “On” key.
Inch specifications
Paper Size
11x81/2"
Ready to copy.
Register
Modify Copy
Back
Set
Close
Security
Off
# keys
On
W h e n s e l e c t [ O n ] , d a t a c a n b e s ave d .
Yo u c a n r e c a l l a n d r e - p r i n t a t a ny t i m e.
Yo u c a n s e t t h e p a s swo r d t o s e c u r e
s ave d d o c u m e n t .
Metric specifications
(1) Registering a copy job for repeat copying
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Modify copy
Back
Set
Close
Security
1
2
Set the originals to be copied.
Off
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
On
#-Keys
W h e n s e l e c t [ O n ] , j o b c a n b e s ave d .
Yo u c a n r e c a l l a n d r e - p r i n t a t a ny t i m e.
Yo u c a n s e t a p a s swo r d t o s e c u r e s ave d
document.
If you want to register a security code, go to the next step.
3
5-42
Touch the “▼ Down” key. The content of the next portion of
the “Function” tab will be displayed.
If you do NOT want to register a security code, go directly to
step 7.
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
6
Touch the “# keys” [“#-Keys”] key to highlight that key and
then enter the security code that will enable repeat copying
for these originals.
Inch specifications
Paper Size
11x81/2"
Ready to copy.
Register
Modify Copy
Back
Set
Close
Security
Off
# keys
On
W h e n s e l e c t [ O n ] , d a t a c a n b e s ave d .
Yo u c a n r e c a l l a n d r e - p r i n t a t a ny t i m e.
Yo u c a n s e t t h e p a s swo r d t o s e c u r e
s ave d d o c u m e n t .
(2) Printing out with the repeat copy mode
Once you press the [Repeat Copy] key, the “Modify copy” list will be
displayed so that you can verify the copy jobs that are registered for
repeat copying. It is possible to reprint, check the contents of, and
delete the copy jobs that are registered in this list.
1 Reprinting a registered copy job
1
Press the [Repeat Copy] key. The “Modify copy” list will be
displayed.
2
Select the copy job that you want to reprint and touch the
“Reprint” key.
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Modify copy
Back
Set
Close
Security
Off
#-Keys
On
W h e n s e l e c t [ O n ] , j o b c a n b e s ave d .
Yo u c a n r e c a l l a n d r e - p r i n t a t a ny t i m e.
Yo u c a n s e t a p a s swo r d t o s e c u r e s ave d
document.
NOTES
• The security code can be between 1 and 8 digits long.
• If you forget the security code that you enter here, repeat copying
will not be possible for these originals. Be sure to keep some sort of
record of the security code.
Inch specifications
Job
7
Press the [Start] key.
Copying will start.
End
Modify copy
Input source
Set
Registration
7
1
10/10 22:37
Norm. copy
Copy
3
5
10/10 22:40
Norm. copy
Copy
10
2
10/10 22:45
Norm. copy
Copy
1
6
10/10 22:50
119
Copy
120
121
122
Original
Reprint
Delete
Type
Norm. copy
Check
details
Modify Copy
If a message appears telling you to set the next original, go
to the next step.
10/10 22:50
Metric specifications
End
Modify copy
Job
8
Replace the first original with the next one and press the
[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.
Input source
Original
Set
Registration
Type
7
1
10/10 22:37
Norm. copy
Copy
3
5
10/10 22:40
Norm. copy
Copy
10
2
10/10 22:45
Norm. copy
Copy
1
6
10/10 22:50
Norm. copy
119
Copy
120
121
122
Reprint
9
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.
Modify copy
Delete
Check
details
10/10 22:50
If you designated a security code when you registered the
copy job for repeat copying, the code input screen will be
displayed. In this case, go to the next step.
If you did NOT designate a security code when you
registered the copy job for repeat copying, the screen to
select the number of copies or copy sets to be made will be
displayed. In this case, go directly to step 4.
5-43
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
3
Use the keypad to enter the appropriate security code and
the touch the “Enter” key. If the entered code matches the
registered one, the screen to select the number of copies or
copy sets to be made will be displayed.
2 Checking the contents of registered copy jobs
1
Press the [Repeat Copy] key. The “Modify copy” list will be
displayed.
2
Select the copy job that you want to check the content of and
touch the “Check detail” key.
Inch specifications
Stop
Enter the re-print code.
(Enter by #key)
Clear
Enter
Metric specifications
Stop
Enter the re-print code.
(Enter #-key)
Clear
Inch specifications
Enter
End
Modify copy
Job
NOTES
• To reenter a mistaken security code, touch the “Clear” key.
• If you touch the “Stop” key, the touch panel will return to the screen
in step 2.
Input source
Original
Set
Registration
Type
119
Copy
7
1
10/10 22:37
Norm. copy
120
Copy
3
5
10/10 22:40
Norm. copy
121
Copy
10
2
10/10 22:45
Norm. copy
122
Copy
1
6
10/10 22:50
Reprint
Delete
Norm. copy
Check
details
Modify Copy
10/10 22:50
Metric specifications
End
Modify copy
Job
4
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to set the number of copies or
copy sets to be made.
Inch specifications
Input source
Original
Set
Registration
Type
7
1
10/10 22:37
Norm. copy
Copy
3
5
10/10 22:40
Norm. copy
Copy
10
2
10/10 22:45
Norm. copy
Copy
1
6
10/10 22:50
Norm. copy
119
Copy
120
121
122
Reprint
Stop
Reprint
Printing
Metric specifications
Stop
Set
Printing
5
5-44
Touch the “Printing” key.
Print out will start.
Delete
Check
details
10/10 22:50
If you designated a security code when you registered the
copy job for repeat copying, the code input screen will be
displayed. In this case, go to the next step.
Set
Reprint
Modify copy
If you did NOT designate a security code when you
registered the copy job for repeat copying, the “Check
details / Reprint” screen will be displayed. In this case,
go directly to step 4.
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
3
Use the keypad to enter the appropriate security code and
the touch the “Enter” key. If the entered code matches the
registered one, the “Check details / Reprint” screen will be
displayed.
3 Deleting a registered copy jobs
1
Press the [Repeat Copy] key. The “Modify copy” list will be
displayed.
2
Select the copy job that you want to delete and touch the
“Delete” key. A verification screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Stop
Enter the re-print code.
(Enter by #key)
Clear
Enter
Metric specifications
Stop
Enter the re-print code.
(Enter #-key)
Clear
Inch specifications
Enter
End
Modify copy
Job
4
Check the contents of the selected job. You can also check
the content of the first page of the copy job by touching the
“Print from 1st” [“Head print”] key.
Input source
Original
Set
Registration
119
Copy
7
1
10/10 22:37
Norm. copy
120
Copy
3
5
10/10 22:40
Norm. copy
121
Copy
10
2
10/10 22:45
Norm. copy
122
Copy
1
6
10/10 22:50
Reprint
Inch specifications
Norm. copy
Check
details
Modify Copy
Item
10/10 22:50
Metric specifications
Details
3
5
11 x 8 1/2"
copy
10/10 22:40
Print
from 1st
End
Modify copy
Job
Job120
Input source
Original
Set
Registration
Type
7
1
10/10 22:37
Norm. copy
Copy
3
5
10/10 22:40
Norm. copy
Copy
10
2
10/10 22:45
Norm. copy
Copy
1
6
10/10 22:50
Norm. copy
119
Copy
120
121
122
Reprint
Metric specifications
Modify copy
Check details / Reprint
Delete
Check
details
10/10 22:50
Close
Item
Original
Set
Print size
Input source
Registration date
Delete
Close
Check details / Reprint
Orig. page
Set
Print size
Input source
Registration date
Type
Details
3
5
A4
Copy
10/10 22:40
Head
print
Job120
5
Once you have finished checking the content of the copy job,
touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
6
If you want to check the contents of another registered copy
job, repeat steps 2 through 5.
7
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
5-45
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
3
Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications
Stop
Job # : 117
Delete this job. Do you really want to delete?
Yes
No
Metric specifications
Stop
Job # : 117
Delete this job. Do you really want to delete?
Yes
No
If you selected “Yes”, the selected copy job will be canceled
and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen
in step 2 without canceling the selected job.
4
If you want to cancel another registered copy job, repeat
steps 2 through 3.
5
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
5-46
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
21. Copying a large volume of originals in one operation
[Batch scanning mode]
With this mode, you can scan multiple sets of originals and then have
them all copied at the same time. Scan one set of originals of the
same type and then register that as a single step in the copy job, and
you can copy an extremely large volume of originals in one batch.
4
Touch the “On” key.
Inch specifications
Continuous scanning
Off
On
A B C
A
B
Paper Size
11x81/2"
Place originals then press Start key.
Register
Back
Set
Close
C o py s c a n n e d i m a g e s o f f.
Platen as one job or scanned originals
u s i n g d o c u m e n t p r o c e s s o r.
C
Metric specifications
Paper size
Set original.
Press Start key.
1
Set the originals to be copied.
2
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
3
Touch the “Batch scanning” [“Large # of originals”] key.
The “Continuous scanning” [“Multiple scanning”] screen will
be displayed.
Set
Multiple scanning
Register
Off
Originals scanned through the platen
and Document Processor can be
p r o c e s s e d a s o n e c o py j o b.
On
Back
Close
5
Press the [Start] key.
Scanning of the originals will start.
6
Replace the first originals with the next set and press the
[Start] key. Scanning of those next originals (the next step in
the copy job) will start.
7
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig. size
Combine
Exposure
mode
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
User choice
Set
11x81/2"
Function
Program
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2-sided/
Split
Select
size orig.
Merge copy
Exposure
mode
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
User choice
Function
Set
Program
5-47
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
22. Saving on toner use [Eco print mode]
With this mode, you can reduce the amount of toner that is used to
make the copies.
Use this mode with, for example making test copies, when you do not
especially need to print out high quality copies. You can also make
the eco print mode the default setting in the initial mode. (See “Eco
print mode ON/OFF” on page 7-66.)
* Images will be printed out relatively lighter than normal.
With the eco print
mode turned OFF
4
Touch the “Eco Print” key. The “Eco Print” screen will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto
Rotation
OHP
backing
Proof Copy
Memo
pages
Eco Print
Orig. set
direction
Invert
Mirror
Modify
Copy
With the eco print
mode turned ON
Basic
Set
11x81/2"
Up
Down
User choice
Function
Program
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto
Rotation
OHP back
Test copy
Memo
pages
Eco Print
Orig. set
direction
Invert
Mirror
Modify
copy
Basic
1
Set the originals to be copied.
2
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
5
Up
Down
User choice
Function
Program
Touch the “Off” key or the “On” key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications
Paper Size
Ready to copy.
Set
11 x 81/2"
Register
Eco Print
Print
3
Set
Touch the “▼ Down” key. The content of the next portion of
the “Function” tab will be displayed.
Back
Close
Eco Print
It is possible to reduce
toner consumption.
Image is light.
Eco print is saving toner consumption,
and it is economically.
Off
On
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Eco Print
Back
Set
Close
Eco Print
To n e r c o n s u m p t i o n
can be reduced.
Image resolution reduced.
E c o P r i n t e n a bl e s t o n e r c o n s u m p t i o n
reduction.
Off
6
5-48
Press the [Start] key.
Copying will start.
On
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
23. Original set direction
It is necessary to specify the direction in which the originals were set
whenever you use the 2-sided copy modes, the page separation/split
copy modes, the margin mode, the centering/image shift mode, the
memo mode, the border erase modes, the combine/merge copy
modes, the print page numbers mode, the booklet/stitching mode, the
auto selection/filing mode (optional), the staple mode (optional) and
the punch mode (optional). You can also use the following procedure
to perform the setting as well.
1
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
2
Touch the “▼ Down” key. The content of the next portion of
the “Function” tab will be displayed.
4
Touch the “Rear” [“Back Edge”] key or the “Left top corner”
key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications
Paper Size
Ready to copy.
Register
Orig. set direction
Set
11 x 81/2"
Back
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
"Check direction original" can be shown
at right side of display.
Follow the steps. If setting mode is
wrong, incorrect copy will result.
Rear
Left top
corner
Metric specifications
Orig. set direction
3
Touch the “Orig.set direction” key. The “Orig.set direction”
screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Register
Back
Set
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
" C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o r i g i n a l " c a n b e s h ow n
a t r i g h t s i d e o f d i s p l ay.
Fo l l ow t h e s t e p s. I f s e t t i n g m o d e i s
w r o n g , i n c o r r e c t c o py w i l l r e s u l t .
Back Edge
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Left top
corner
Set
11x81/2"
Auto
Rotation
OHP
backing
Proof Copy
Memo
pages
Eco Print
Orig. set
direction
Invert
Mirror
Modify
Copy
Basic
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Up
Down
User choice
Function
Program
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto
Rotation
OHP back
Test copy
Memo
pages
Eco Print
Orig. set
direction
Invert
Mirror
Modify
copy
Basic
Set
Up
Down
User choice
Function
Program
5-49
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
24. Memorizing frequently used settings [Program function]
Up to eight combinations of copy modes and other functions displayed
on the operation panel can be registered as a single program using
this function. You can also register a name for each registered
program.
5
Use the displayed keyboard to enter the desired name and
then touch the “End” key.
Inch specifications
Stop
Name to display
AllDel.
(1) Registering a program
1
2
q
1
End
Limit:16 letters including #
Catalog A
Set the desired copy modes, etc., to be registered.
3
w
a
4
e
s
z
Touch the “Program” tab. The content of the “Program” tab
will be displayed.
3
Touch the “Register” key.
r
d
x
6
t
7
y
f
c
Capital
2
5
g
v
Letter
u
h
b
Del. prev
8
9
i
j
n
0
o
k
p
l
m
,
Num./Sym.
-
=
[
;
.
`
]
\
'
/
Space
Metric specifications
Stop
Name to display
End
Limit: 16 letters inc. # key
Catalog A
Inch specifications
AllDel.
Paper Size
Ready to copy.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Del. prev
8
9
0
-
=
`
Set
11 x 81/2"
q
w
a
e
s
r
d
t
y
f
g
u
h
i
j
o
k
p
l
[
;
]
\
`
'
Reg./delete
Recall
z
x
c
v
b
n
m
,
.
/
Register
Capital
Letter
Symbol 1
Symbol 2
Space
Delete
Change
name
Basic
User choice
Function
Program
NOTE
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Recall
Set
Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on
entering characters.
Reg./delete
Register
Delete
6
Change
name
Basic
4
User choice
Function
Program
Touch any key that is marked “No registration” and that
corresponds to the program key (1 – 8) under which you
want to register the settings. The screen to register a name
for that program will be displayed.
Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.
If you selected “Yes”, the selected program will be registered
and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.
Copying is now possible using the settings that were
registered under that program.
Inch specifications
Stop
Register program.
Program # : 1
Inch specifications
Program name :Catalog A
The set program is registered. Is it correct?
End
Register present setting
Select program number.
Yes
No registration
No registration
No registration
No registration
No registration
No registration
No registration
No registration
No
Metric specifications
Stop
Register program.
Program # : 1
Metric specifications
Program name : Catalog A
The set program is registered. Is it correct?
End
Register present setting
Select program number.
5-50
Yes
No registration
No registration
No registration
No registration
No registration
No registration
No registration
No registration
No
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
3
(2) Using programmed settings to make copies
1
Touch the “Program” tab. The content of the “Program” tab
will be displayed.
2
Touch the program key under which the settings that you
want to use are registered.
Touch the program key (1 – 8) for which you want to change
the registered name.
The screen to register a name for that program will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
End
Registration name change
Select the number for changing name.
Inch specifications
Paper Size
Ready to copy.
Set
11 x 8 /2"
1
Recall
Catalog A
File A
Catalog B
File B
Catalog C
No registration
Catalog D
List A
Reg./delete
Catalog A
File A
Catalog B
File B
Register
Delete
Catalog C
Metric specifications
List A
Catalog D
Basic
Change
name
User choice
Function
End
Registration name change
Program
Select the number for changing name.
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Recall
Set
Catalog A
File A
Catalog B
File B
Catalog C
No registration
Catalog D
List A
Reg./delete
Catalog A
File A
Catalog B
File B
Register
Delete
Catalog C
List A
Catalog D
Basic
Change
name
User choice
Function
4
Program
Once you have deleted the old name and entered the new
one, press the “End” key.
Inch specifications
3
Set the originals to be copied and press the [Start] key.
Copying will start using the settings that were registered
under that program.
Stop
Name to display
AllDel.
1
2
q
3
w
a
4
e
s
z
(3) Changing a registered program name
Touch the “Program” tab. The content of the “Program” tab
will be displayed.
2
Touch the “Change name” key.
5
r
d
x
6
t
7
y
f
c
Capital
1
End
Limit:16 letters including #
Catalog A
g
v
Letter
u
h
b
Del. prev
8
9
i
j
n
0
o
k
p
l
m
,
Num./Sym.
-
=
[
;
.
`
]
\
'
/
Space
Metric specifications
Stop
Name to display
End
Limit: 16 letters inc. # key
Catalog A
AllDel.
Inch specifications
1
Paper Size
Ready to copy.
q
Set
11 x 81/2"
Recall
File A
Catalog B
File B
z
4
e
s
Capital
Register
3
w
a
Reg./delete
Catalog A
2
r
d
x
5
t
f
c
Letter
6
y
g
v
7
u
h
b
Symbol 1
9
i
j
n
Del. prev
8
0
o
k
m
Symbol 2
p
l
,
[
;
.
=
`
]
\
`
'
/
Space
Delete
Catalog C
List A
Catalog D
Basic
Change
name
User choice
Function
NOTE
Program
Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on
entering characters.
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Recall
Reg./delete
Catalog A
File A
Catalog B
File B
Register
Delete
Catalog C
Change
name
List A
Catalog D
Basic
Set
User choice
Function
Program
5
Once “The set program is registered. Is it correct?” is
displayed, check the entered name and, if it is correct, touch
the “Yes” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
5-51
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
4
(4) Deleting a registered program
Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications
1
Touch the “Program” tab. The content of the “Program” tab
will be displayed.
2
Touch the “Delete” key.
Stop
Delete program.
P r o gra m #
P r o gra m n a m e
Catalog A
T h i s p r o gra m w i l l b e d e l e t e d . A r e yo u s u r e ?
Inch specifications
Yes
Paper Size
Ready to copy.
No
Set
11 x 8 /2"
1
Recall
Metric specifications
Reg./delete
Catalog A
File A
Catalog B
File B
Register
Stop
Delete program.
Delete
Catalog C
Basic
Change
name
List A
Catalog D
User choice
Function
P r o gra m #
Program
P r o gra m n a m e
Catalog A
T h i s p r o gra m w i l l b e d e l e t e d . A r e yo u s u r e ?
Metric specifications
YES
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Recall
Reg./delete
Catalog A
File A
Catalog B
File B
If you selected “Yes”, the selected program will be deleted and the
touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3
without deleting the selected program.
Register
Delete
Catalog C
Basic
3
Change
name
List A
Catalog D
User choice
Function
Program
Touch the program key (1 – 8) that corresponds to the
program that you want to delete.
lnch specifications
End
Delete registration
Select the number of program to delete.
Catalog A
File A
Catalog B
File B
Catalog C
No registration
Catalog D
List A
Metric specifications
End
Delete registration
Select the number of program to delete.
Catalog A
5-52
File A
Catalog B
File B
Catalog C
No registration
Catalog D
List A
NO
Set
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
25. Registration keys
You can register up to 3 functions and/or modes, from among those
displayed in the “Function” tab, under the registration keys. The
functions and modes in the “Basic” tab and the “User choice” tab can
be registered under registration keys as well.
3
Touch the “4 in 1” key and then the “Register” key.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Combine
(1) Registering a function or mode under a function
key
Layout
Border line
None
None
Perform the following procedure when you want to register a function
or mode under a registration key.
To register a function or mode under a registration key, refer to the
following sample procedure (which shows how to register the “4 in 1”
combine/merge copy mode under a registration key).
Borders
Left top
corner
Paper size
Register
L ayo u t
Border line
None
In order to register functions and/or modes under registration keys,
you must first turn the setting ON under “Registration keys ON/OFF”
on page 7-84.
2
Rear
Metric specifications
Merge copy
Touch the “Combine” [“Merge copy”] key. The “Combine”
[“Merge copy”] screen will be displayed.
Close
Dotted
IMPORTANT!
1
Back
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Solid
Ready to copy.
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
Set
11x81/2"
50%
4
None
Solid
2-in-1
Dotted
4-in-1
Cropmark
Back
Set
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Back Edge
Left top
corner
In the “Register” screen, touch the “Register” key once again.
The screen to register functions and/or modes under
registration keys will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Select item.
Register
lnch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
End
Register
11x81/2"
Delete
Select
paper
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig. size
Exposure
mode
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
User choice
Function
Combine
Metric specifications
Select item.
Program
Register
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
End
Register
Delete
Select
paper
2-sided/
Split
Select
size orig.
Merge copy
Exposure
mode
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
User choice
Function
Program
5-53
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
5
Touch the registration key under which you want to register
the function. “Register this selecting mode. OK?” will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
NOTE
If, in the screen to register functions and/or modes under registration
keys, you select a previously registered key, the following screen will
be displayed.
End
Register present setting
Inch specifications
Select the number of program to registered.
Register this function.
Stop
No
registrat.
T h i s nu m b e r i s a l r e a d y r e g i s t e r e d .
No
registrat.
No
registrat.
R e g i s t e r N o.
1
R e g i s t e r t h i s s e l e c t i n g m o d e. O K ?
Yes
No
Metric specifications
End
Register present setting
Metric specifications
Select the number of program to registered.
Register this function.
No
registrat.
Stop
T h i s nu m b e r i s a l r e a d y r e g i s t e r e d
No
registrat.
No
registrat.
R e g i s t e r N o.
1
R e g i s t e r t h i s s e l e c t i n g m o d e. O K ?
YES
6
Touch the “Yes” key. The “Combine” [“Merge copy”] screen
will be displayed again.
Inch specifications
Stop
Register this function.
Register No.
NO
If you selected “Yes”, the selected function will be registered under the
registration key.
If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 5
without registering the selected function.
1
Register this selecting mode. OK?
Yes
7
No
Metric specifications
Inch specifications
Register this function.
Stop
Register No.
Paper size
Ready to copy.
1
Register this selecting mode. OK?
YES
Touch the “Close” key. The “Combine” [“Merge copy”] key will
now appear on the right side of the touch panel as a
registration key.
NO
Select
paper
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig. size
Combine
Exposure
mode
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
User choice
Set
81/2x11"
Function
Combine
Program
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2-sided/
Split
Select
size original
Merge copy
Exposure
mode
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Down
Merge copy
Image
quality orig.
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Sort/
Finished
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
User choice
Function
Set
Program
NOTE
The functions and modes in the “Basic” tab and the “User choice” tab
can be registered under registration keys as well. A “Register” key will
be displayed in the screen for those function and modes which can be
registered under the registration keys.
5-54
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
3
(2) Deleting a registration key
Perform the following procedure when you want to delete a
registration key.
1
In the “Register” screen, touch the “Delete” key once again.
The screen to delete registration keys will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Select item.
Touch the registration (to the right of the “Basic” tab) that you
want to delete. (Example: “Combine” [“Merge copy”])
Register
End
Register
lnch specifications
Delete
Paper Size Set
11x81/2"
Ready to copy.
Combine
11x81/2"
Plain
81/2x11"
Color
1
11x8 /2"
Plain
11x81/2"
Recycled
Basic
Orig.image
quality
AMS
APS
Auto
Exposure
Bypass
Plain
Exposure
mode
User choice
Function
Sort:Off
Reduce
/Enlarge
Metric specifications
Reduce
/Enlarge
Sort:On
Select item.
Sort/
Finished
Program
Register
End
Register
Metric specifications
Paper Size
Ready to copy.
Delete
Set
Merge copy
Image
quality
Plain
Colour
Plain
AMS
APS
Auto
Exposure
Bypass
Plain
Exposure
mode
Recycled
Basic
User choice
Function
Sort:Off
Reduce/
Enlarge
Sort:On
Reduce/
Enlarge
4
Sort/
Finished
Program
Touch the registration key (1 – 3) that corresponds to the
program that you want to delete. “Are you sure you want to
delete?” will be displayed.
Inch specifications
2
In the resulting screen for that function or mode (example:
the “Combine” [“Merge copy”] screen), touch the “Register”
key. The “Register” screen will be displayed.
Delete registration
End
S e l e c t t h e nu m b e r o f p r o gra m t o d e l e t e.
Combine
Orig. Image
quality
lnch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
11x81/2"
50%
Register
Combine
Layout
Border line
None
None
Set
Reduce
/Enlarge
Back
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Metric specifications
Solid
Delete registration
Dotted
Borders
Rear
Left top
corner
End
S e l e c t t h e nu m b e r o f p r o gra m t o d e l e t e.
Merge copy
Image
quality
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Merge copy
L ayo u t
Border line
None
None
Solid
2-in-1
Dotted
4-in-1
Cropmark
Back
Set
Reduce/
Enlarge
Close
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Back Edge
Left top
corner
5-55
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
5
Touch the “Yes” key. The “Combine” [“Merge copy”] screen
will be displayed again.
Inch specifications
Delete registration.
Stop
Register No.
1
Are you sure you want to delete?
Yes
No
Metric specifications
Delete registration.
Stop
Register No.
1
Are you sure you want to delete?
YES
6
NO
Touch the “Close” key. The “Combine” [“Merge copy”] key will
be deleted from on the right side of the touch panel.
Inch specifications
Paper Size Set
11x81/2"
Ready to copy.
11x81/2"
Plain
81/2x11"
Color
11x81/2"
Plain
11x81/2"
Recycled
Basic
Orig.image
quality
AMS
APS
Bypass
Plain
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
User choice
Function
Sort:Off
Sort:On
Reduce
/Enlarge
Reduce
/Enlarge
Sort/
Finished
Program
Metric specifications
Paper Size
Ready to copy.
Image
quality
Plain
Colour
Plain
5-56
AMS
APS
Bypass
Plain
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
Recycled
Basic
Set
User choice
Function
Sort:Off
Sort:On
Reduce/
Enlarge
Program
Sort/
Finished
Reduce/
Enlarge
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
26. Easily add covers and insert sheets between various sets of originals in
one operation [Job build mode]
The job build function enables you to scan different sets of originals
into memory in separate steps and then copy them all at one time.
Each set of scanned originals is then seen as one step in the copy
process and you can select different copy modes for each step
(enlarge/reduce, border erase, original type [2-sided originals, 1-sided
originals or open-faced book originals]). You can choose to have a
blank sheet of paper fed in between each set of originals, as well as
have front and rear covers included for the full set, AND do this all
during 2-sided copying!
NOTE
This procedure will assume that the color paper to be used as the
front cover and the middle insert (originals “A” and “C”), as well as for
the back cover, will be set on the multi-bypass, and that there is plain
copy paper loaded in drawer[cassette] No.1.
● Step 1: Accessing the “Job build” screen
1
3 C-2
1 B-3
2 B-1
A-1
B-1
Press the [Job build] key.
The “Job build” screen will be displayed.
2
C-1
A-3
A-1
(1) Using the job build mode
The following procedure shows one way of using the job build mode
and explains how to perform that operation under the situation
indicated in the examples below.
● Making the settings that apply to all steps
First, the settings for the 2-sided copy modes and the repeat copy
mode must be made.
NOTES
[Example]
<Finished copies>
(The asterisk “*” in the illustration indicates the blank sheets.)
• The repeat copy mode is used to enable you to make an additional
number of copy sets later.
• It is also possible to select other settings and functions, as desired,
besides those given in the example procedure. (See “(2) Selecting
the settings and functions” on page 5-62.)
2
2-
2-1
2
1-
1-1
A-1
1
2
2
Touch the “1 sided/2 sided” key.
The “1 sided/2 sided” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
Job Build - Step1
11x81/2”
Select
paper
<Originals>
Offset
Finished
Basic
A
1
B
1-2
1-1
C
2
D
2-2
2-1
End
1 sided
Original
type
1 sided copy
1 sided/
2 sided
Back Edge
AMS
Reduce
/Enlarge
Insert
page
1 sided copy-Left
Finished page #:0
Orig. set
direction
Quality
Edit
Metric specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key.
Job Build-Step 1
End
1-sided
Select
paper
Group
Finished
Basic
Original
type
AMS
Reduce/
Enlarge
Quality
1-sided Copy
1-sided/
2-sided
Back Edge
Insert
blank page
1-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 0
Orig. set
direction
Edit
5-57
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
3
Touch the “2 sided copy” key and then touch the “Open from
left” [“Left binding”] key. Finally, touch the “Close” key. The
touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
5
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
Back
1 sided/ 2 sided copy
Finished
Close
Open from
left
Open from
right
On
Left top
corner
Rear
Metric specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key.
Back
1-sided / 2-sided Copy
Finished
Close
Left
binding
Right
binding
Off
Back Edge
Left top
corner
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
Job Build - Step1
Margin/
Centering
Basic
● Making the settings for the first original (“A” in the illustration on
page 5-57.)
The multi-bypass is to be selected for color paper feed under the
“Select paper” screen.
6
Touch the “Select paper” key. The “Select paper” screen will
be displayed.
End
Auto
Select
orig.size
Off
Insert page
Modify
Copy
2 sided copy-Left
Finished page # : 0
None
Print from
Rear page
Inch specifications
Place originals then press Start key.
Page #
Job Build - Step1
Quality
Offset
Finished
Set
Ready to Job build.
Basic
Set original. Press Start key.
Job Build - Step1
None
Margin/
Imag.shift
Basic
End
Edit
Metric specifications
Off
1-sided
Original
type
2 sided copy
1 sided/
2 sided
Back Edge
AMS
Reduce
/Enlarge
Insert
page
2 sided copy-Left
Finished page #:0
Print from
Rear page
Orig. set
direction
Quality
Edit
End
Auto
Select
size orig.
None
Modify
copy
None
Page
numbering
Quality
Insert
blank page
2-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 0
Print from
rear page
Metric specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key.
Job Build-Step 1
End
Edit
1-sided
Select
paper
Group
Finished
Basic
5-58
Set
Ready to Job build.
11x81/2”
Select
paper
Erase
Mode
Close
When select [On], job can be saved.
WhenYou
thecan
mode
is set
[On],
it can
recall
and
re-print
at anytime.
save a
jobcan
data
and
reprint it anytime.
You
set
a password
to secure saved
And you
can set that other user are not
document.
able to reprint.
On
Touch the “Edit” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the
“Modify Copy” key. The “Modify Copy” screen will be
displayed.
None
Back
Modify copy
Check direction
Check direction of
original.
Top
binding
Border
Erase
Set
Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key.
Off
Close
W h e n s e l e c t [ O n ] , d a t a c a n b e s ave d .
Yo u c a n r e c a l l a n d r e - p r i n t a t a ny t i m e.
Yo u c a n s e t t h e p a s swo r d t o s e c u r e
s ave d d o c u m e n t .
Off
Metric specifications
4
Back
Modify Copy
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Open from
top
1-sided
Copy
2-sided
Copy
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
1 sided
copy
2 sided
copy
Touch the “On” key.
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 4.
Original
type
AMS
Reduce/
Enlarge
Quality
2-sided Copy
1-sided/
2-sided
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
Edit
Insert
blank page
2-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 0
Print from
rear page
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
7
Touch the “Bypass” key.
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 6.
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
Back
Select paper
● Step 3: Making the settings for the second originals (“B” in the
illustration on page 5-57.)
Drawer[Cassette] No.1 is to be selected for plain paper feed under the
“Select paper” screen.
10
Touch the “Select paper” key. The “Select paper” screen will
be displayed.
Close
Inch specifications
11x8 /2”
Plain
11x81/2”
Plain
11x81/2”
Color
81/2x14”
Plain
1
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Bypass
Plain
Set
Job Build - Step3
11x81/2”
Select
paper
Offset
Metric specifications
Finished
Set
Ready to Job build.
Basic
Cancel
1 sided
Original
type
AMS
Reduce
/Enlarge
Quality
2 sided copy
1 sided/
2 sided
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
Insert
page
2 sided copy-Left
Finished page #:2
Next copy page: Front
Print from
Rear page
Scanning
finished
Edit
Set original. Press Start key.
Select paper
Back
Close
Metric specifications
Plain
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Plain
Colour
Bypass
Plain
Job Build - Step3
Plain
Group
Finished
Set the first original (“A”) to be copied. Press the [Start] key.
Scanning of the originals will start.
Basic
11
● Step 2: Leaving the back side of the first original (“A”) blank
9
Touch the “Print from Front page” key.
Leaving the back side of the original blank will allow the next
copy to start on the front side of the next page.
Offset
Finished
Basic
AMS
Quality
Insert
blank page
2-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 2
Next copy page: Front
2 sided copy
1 sided/
2 sided
Scanning
finished
Edit
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
Print from
Front page
Set
Back
11x81/2”
Plain
11x81/2”
Plain
11x81/2”
Color
81/2x14”
Plain
Insert
page
2 sided copy-Left
Finished page #:1
Next copy page: Rear
Print from
rear page
Touch the key that corresponds to drawer[cassette] No. 1.
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 10.
Cancel
Reduce
/Enlarge
Quality
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
Select paper
Set
Job Build - Step2
1 sided
AMS
Reduce/
Enlarge
1-sided/
2-sided
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Original
type
Original
type
2-sided Copy
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
11x81/2”
Select
paper
Cancel
1-sided
Select
paper
8
Set
Close
Bypass
Plain
Scanning
finished
Edit
Metric specifications
Metric specifications
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Select paper
Job Build- Step2
Group
Finished
Basic
Set
Back
Close
Cancel
1-sided
Select
paper
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Set
Original
type
AMS
Reduce/
Enlarge
Quality
Plain
2-sided Copy
1-sided/
2-sided
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
Edit
Insert
blank page
2-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 1
Next copy page: Rear
Plain
Print from
front page
Colour
Bypass
Plain
Plain
Scanning
finished
12
Set the second originals (“B”) to be copied. Press the [Start]
key.
Scanning of the originals will start.
5-59
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
● Step 4: Making the settings for the third original (“C” in the
illustration on page 5-57.)
The multi-bypass is to be selected for color paper feed under the
“Select paper” screen.
13
● Step 5: Leaving the back side of the third original (“C”) blank
16
Touch the “Select paper” key. The “Select paper” screen will
be displayed.
Inch specifications
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Inch specifications
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Offset
Finished
Basic
11x81/2”
Select
paper
Cancel
1 sided
Original
type
AMS
Reduce
/Enlarge
Quality
Offset
2 sided copy
1 sided/
2 sided
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
Insert
page
2 sided copy-Left
Finished page #:4
Next copy page: Front
Finished
Basic
Print from
Rear page
Scanning
finished
Edit
AMS
Finished
Basic
14
Reduce/
Enlarge
Quality
Select
paper
Group
2-sided Copy
1-sided/
2-sided
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
Insert
blank page
2-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 4
Next copy page: Front
Finished
Basic
Print from
rear page
Quality
1 sided/
2 sided
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
2 sided copy-Left
Finished page #:5
Next copy page: Rear
Scanning
finished
Edit
Set
Cancel
Original
type
AMS
Reduce/
Enlarge
Quality
2-sided Copy
1-sided/
2-sided
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
Insert
blank page
2-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 5
Next copy page: Rear
Print from
front page
Scanning
finished
Edit
● Step 6: Making the settings for the fourth originals (“D” in the
illustration on page 5-57.)
Drawer[Cassette] No.1 is to be selected for plain paper feed under
the “Select paper” screen.
17
Inch specifications
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Touch the “Select paper” key. The “Select paper” screen will
be displayed.
Set
Inch specifications
Back
Select paper
Print from
Front page
Scanning
finished
Edit
Touch the “Bypass” key.
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 13.
11x8 /2”
Plain
11x81/2”
Plain
11x81/2”
Color
81/2x14”
Plain
Reduce
/Enlarge
1-sided
Cancel
Group
AMS
Insert
page
Job Build - Step5
Set
Job Build- Step4
Original type
Original
type
2 sided copy
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Select paper
Cancel
1 sided
Metric specifications
Metric specifications
1-sided
Set
Job Build - Step5
Set
Job Build - Step4
11x81/2”
Select
paper
Touch the “Print from Front page” key.
Leaving the back side of the original blank will allow the next
copy to start on the front side of the next page.
Close
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Set
1
Job Build - Step6
11x81/2”
Select
paper
Bypass
Plain
Offset
Finished
Metric specifications
Basic
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Select paper
Reduce
/Enlarge
Quality
1 sided/
2 sided
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
2 sided copy-Left
Finished page #:6
Next copy page: Front
Print from
Rear page
Scanning
finished
Edit
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Set
Job Build - Step6
Plain
Cancel
1-sided
Bypass
Plain
Plain
Select
paper
Group
Finished
Basic
5-60
AMS
Insert
page
Metric specifications
Close
Plain
15
Original
type
2 sided copy
Set
Back
Colour
Cancel
1 sided
Set the third original (“C”) to be copied. Press the [Start] key.
Scanning of the original will start.
Original
type
AMS
Reduce/
Enlarge
Quality
2-sided Copy
1-sided/
2-sided
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
Edit
Insert
blank page
2-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 6
Next copy page: Front
Print from
rear page
Scanning
finished
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
18
Touch the key that corresponds to drawer[cassette] No. 1.
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 17.
21
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Set
Back
Select paper
11x8 /2”
Plain
11x81/2”
Plain
11x81/2”
Color
81/2x14”
Plain
Touch the “Bypass” key.
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 20.
Close
11x8 /2”
Plain
11x81/2”
Plain
11x81/2”
Color
81/2x14”
Plain
Bypass
Plain
Bypass
Plain
Metric specifications
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Select paper
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Set
Back
Select paper
Close
Plain
Set
Back
Close
Plain
Plain
Plain
Bypass
Plain
Colour
Plain
19
Close
1
Metric specifications
Colour
Back
Select paper
1
Set
Bypass
Plain
Plain
Set the fourth originals (“D”) to be copied. Press the [Start]
key.
Scanning of the originals will start.
22
Touch the “Insert page” [“Insert blank page”] key.
Inch specifications
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Set
Job Build - Step7
● Step 7: Making the settings for a blank rear cover
The multi-bypass is to be selected for color paper feed under the
“Select paper” screen.
20
11x81/2”
Select
paper
Offset
Finished
Basic
Touch the “Select paper” key. The “Select paper” screen will
be displayed.
Offset
Finished
Basic
1 sided
AMS
Reduce
/Enlarge
Quality
2 sided copy
1 sided/
2 sided
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
2 sided copy-Left
Finished page #:8
Next copy page: Front
Select paper
Print from
Rear page
Finished
23
Finished
Basic
AMS
Reduce/
Enlarge
Quality
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
Edit
Print from
Rear page
Scanning
finished
Edit
Set
Cancel
Original
type
AMS
Reduce/
Enlarge
Quality
2-sided Copy
1-sided/
2-sided
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
Insert
blank page
2-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 8
Next copy page: Front
Print from
rear page
Scanning
finished
Edit
The job build set-up procedure is complete. Touch the
“Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.
Inch specifications
2-sided Copy
1-sided/
2-sided
2 sided copy-Left
Finished page #:8
Next copy page: Front
Set
Cancel
Original
type
Group
Basic
Job Build - Step7
Group
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
Scanning
finished
Edit
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Select paper
Quality
1-sided
Insert
page
Metric specifications
1-sided
Reduce
/Enlarge
1 sided/
2 sided
Job Build - Step7
Cancel
Original
type
AMS
Insert
page
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Set
Job Build - Step7
11x81/2”
Select
paper
Original
type
2 sided copy
Metric specifications
Inch specifications
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Cancel
1 sided
Insert
blank page
2-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 8
Next copy page: Front
Print from
rear page
Scanning
finished
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Set
Job Build - Step8
11x81/2”
Select
paper
Offset
Finished
Basic
Cancel
1 sided
Original
type
AMS
Reduce
/Enlarge
Quality
2 sided copy
1 sided/
2 sided
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
Insert
page
2 sided copy-Left
Finished page #:10
Next copy page: Front
Print from
Rear page
Scanning
finished
Edit
Metric specifications
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Set
Job Build - Step8
Cancel
1-sided
Select
paper
Group
Finished
Basic
Original
type
AMS
Reduce/
Enlarge
Quality
2-sided Copy
1-sided/
2-sided
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
Edit
Insert
blank page
2-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 10
Next copy page: Front
Print from
rear page
Scanning
finished
5-61
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
24
If there are no problems with the copy set you made, then
you can use the repeat copy mode to make any additional
number of copy sets as desired (see “(2) Printing out with the
repeat copy mode” on page 5-43).
2 Specifying the type of originals
This procedure specifies the type of originals being copied between
1-sided, 2-sided and open-faced.
1
(2) Selecting the settings and functions
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, touch the
“Original type” key. The “Original type” screen will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
1 Selecting the paper
This procedure selects the size of the copy paper.
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
Job Build - Step1
1
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, touch the
“Select paper” key. The “Select paper” screen will be
displayed.
11x81/2”
Select
paper
Offset
Finished
Inch specifications
Basic
Job Build - Step1
Finished
Basic
1 sided
Original
type
1 sided/
2 sided
Back Edge
AMS
Reduce
/Enlarge
Insert
page
Quality
Edit
Select
paper
Edit
Group
Basic
End
1-sided
1-sided Copy
1-sided/
2-sided
Back Edge
AMS
Reduce/
Enlarge
2
1-sided/
2-sided
Back Edge
AMS
Reduce/
Enlarge
Insert
blank page
1-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 0
Orig. set
direction
Quality
Edit
Insert
blank page
Select between “1 sided”, “2 sided” and “Book”, in
accordance with the originals being copied.
Inch specifications
1-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 0
Set
Ready to Job build.
Orig. set
direction
Quality
Original
type
1-sided Copy
Set
Job Build-Step 1
Original
type
End
1-sided
Orig. set
direction
Quality
Set
Job Build-Step 1
Set original. Press Start key.
Basic
1 sided copy-Left
Finished page #:0
Set original. Press Start key.
1 sided copy-Left
Finished page #:0
Ready to Job build.
Finished
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
Ready to Job build.
1 sided copy
Metric specifications
Group
Reduce
/Enlarge
End
Finished
Select
paper
1 sided/
2 sided
AMS
Insert
page
Metric specifications
Place originals then press Start key.
Offset
Original
type
1 sided copy
Set
Ready to Job build.
11x81/2”
Select
paper
End
1 sided
Place originals then press Start key.
Edit
Original type
Back
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
2
1 sided
Touch the key that corresponds to the drawer[cassette] which
contains the desired size of copy paper, and then touch the
“Close” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step
1.
2 sided
Book
Rear
Metric specifications
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key.
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
Original type
Back
Select paper
11x81/2”
Plain
11x81/2”
Plain
11x81/2”
Color
81/2x14”
Plain
Back
Close
Check direction
Check direction of original.
Close
1 sided
2-sided
Bypass
Plain
Book
Metric specifications
Back Edge
Left top
corner
NOTES
Set
Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key.
Select paper
Back
Plain
Plain
Colour
Left top
corner
Close
• If you selected “1 sided”, verify the direction in which the originals
were set.
• If you selected “2 sided”, specify the binding direction of the originals
and then verify the direction in which the originals were set.
• If you selected “Book”, specify the binding direction of the originals.
Bypass
Plain
Plain
3
5-62
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 1.
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
3 Selecting between 1-sided or 2-sided copies
This procedure selects the type of finished copies to be made
between 1-sided and 2-sided.
1
3
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, touch the “1
sided/2 sided” key. The “1 sided/2 sided” screen will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
Job Build - Step1
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 1.
4 Selecting how to finished up the copy sets
If the optional Document Finisher is installed on your copier, this
procedure lets you select whether to staple or hole punch the finished
copy sets.
1
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, touch the
“Finished” key. The “Finished” screen will be displayed.
End
1 sided
11x81/2”
Select
paper
Original
type
1 sided copy
1 sided/
2 sided
Back Edge
AMS
Offset
Reduce
/Enlarge
Finished
Basic
Inch specifications
Insert
page
Place originals then press Start key.
Orig. set
direction
Quality
Job Build - Step1
End
Edit
11x81/2”
Select
paper
Metric specifications
Offset
Finished
Set
Ready to Job build.
Basic
Set original. Press Start key.
Job Build-Step 1
1 sided
Original
type
1 sided copy
1 sided/
2 sided
Back Edge
AMS
Reduce
/Enlarge
Insert
page
1 sided copy-Left
Finished page #:0
Orig. set
direction
Quality
Edit
End
1-sided
Select
paper
Original
type
1-sided Copy
1-sided/
2-sided
Back Edge
AMS
Group
Reduce/
Enlarge
Finished
Basic
Metric specifications
Insert
blank page
Set original. Press Start key.
Orig. set
direction
Quality
Set
Ready to Job build.
1-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 0
Job Build-Step 1
End
Edit
1-sided
Select
paper
Group
Finished
NOTE
Basic
The setting in regard to making either 1-sided or 2-sided copies can
only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all
steps in the copy job.
2
Set
Ready to Job build.
1 sided copy-Left
Finished page #:0
Touch the “1 sided” key or the “2 sided” key, as appropriate,
and then select the binding direction you want for the
finished copies.
Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel
and verify the direction in which the originals were set.
Original
type
AMS
Reduce/
Enlarge
Quality
1-sided Copy
1-sided/
2-sided
Back Edge
Insert
blank page
1-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 0
Orig. set
direction
Edit
NOTE
The setting in regard to how the copy sets will be finished can only be
made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps
in the copy job.
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
Back
1 sided/ 2 sided copy
Finished
1 sided
copy
2 sided
copy
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Open from
left
Open from
right
Open from
top
Rear
Left top
corner
Metric specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key.
1-sided / 2-sided Copy
Finished
1-sided
Copy
2-sided
Copy
Back
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original.
Left
binding
Right
binding
Top
binding
Back Edge
Left top
corner
IMPORTANT!
If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not
correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly.
5-63
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
2
Select how you want the copy sets to be finished by touching
the “Staple mode” key, the “Saddle Stitch” [“Center Staple” ]
key or the “Punch mode” key, as appropriate.
Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel
and verify the direction in which the originals were set.
2
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
Back
Finished
Staple
Offset
No cover
Staple
mode
Off
Punch
No cover
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Punch
mode
Select the desired magnification ratio.
If you want to have the copy magnification ratio selected
automatically, touch the “AMS” key.
If you want to manually set the magnification ratio, touch the
“# keys” [“#-Keys”] key and then enter the desired ratio with
the keypad, or touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change the
displayed magnification ratio to the desired setting in 1%
increments.
You can also select the magnification ratio by touching the
preset zoom ratio keys at the right that corresponds to the
desired ratio.
Inch specifications
None
On
Saddle
Stitch
Rear
Set
Ready to Job build.
Left top
corner
Place originals then press Start key.
Back
Reduce/Enlarge
Metric specifications
(25
AMS
154 %
51/2x81/2"R81/2x14"
77 %
11x17" R81/2x14"
Standard
Zoom
100 %
129 %
81/2x11" R11x17"
64 %
11x17" R81/2x11"
XY Zoom
400 %
121 %
81/2x14" R81/2x17"
50 %
11x17" R51/2x81/2"
100
Set original. Press Start key.
Back
Finished
Group
Group
%
Set
Ready to Job build.
Staple
None
Off
Staple
Mode
1 set
1 set
None
Center
Staple
Punch
Close
Check direction
Check direction of original.
200 %
51/2x81/2"R11x17"
# keys
Punch
Mode
Close
400)
78 %
81/2x14" R81/2x11"
25 %
Metric specifications
Back Edge
Set
Ready to Job build.
Left top
corner
Set original. Press Start key.
Back
Reduce/Enlarge
Close
(25~400)
100
IMPORTANT!
%
Standard
Zoom
If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not
correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly.
141%
AMS
A 4➔A3
A 5➔A4
127%
100%
75%
11x15"➔A 4
70%
A3➔A4
A4➔A5
Folio➔A3
400%
XY Zoom
106%
50%
11x15"➔A3
90%
200%
#-Keys
25%
Folio➔A4
A 5➔A 3
Metric specifications (Asia Pacific)
3
Set
Ready to Job build.
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 1.
Set original. Press Start key.
Back
Reduce/Enlarge
Close
(25~400)
141%
A 4➔A 3
B 5➔B 4
81%
B 4➔A 4
B 5➔A 5
Standard
Zoom
100%
122%
A 4➔B 4
A 5➔B 5
70%
A 3➔A 4
B 4➔B 5
XY Zoom
400%
115%
B 4➔A 3
B 5➔A 4
50%
86%
A 3➔B 4
A 4➔B 5
25%
100
5 Making copies at an enlarged or reduced magnification ratio
This procedure selects the magnification ratio of the finished copies.
#-Keys
1
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, touch the
“Reduce/Enlarge” key. The “Reduce/Enlarge” screen will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
Job Build - Step1
11x81/2”
Select
paper
Offset
Finished
Basic
End
1 sided
Original
type
1 sided copy
1 sided/
2 sided
Back Edge
AMS
Reduce
/Enlarge
Insert
page
1 sided copy-Left
Finished page #:0
Orig. set
direction
Quality
Edit
Metric specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key.
Job Build-Step 1
End
1-sided
Select
paper
Group
Finished
Basic
5-64
Original
type
AMS
Reduce/
Enlarge
Quality
1-sided Copy
1-sided/
2-sided
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
Edit
Insert
blank page
1-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 0
3
%
AMS
200%
A 5➔A 3
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 1.
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
6 Specifying the direction that the originals were set
This procedure specifies the direction of the set originals.
1
7 Setting the scanning density
This procedure sets the copy exposure for the finished copies.
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, touch the
“Orig.set direction” key. The “Orig.set direction” screen will be
displayed.
1
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
Job Build - Step1
Offset
Finished
Basic
Job Build - Step1
End
1 sided
Original
type
1 sided copy
1 sided/
2 sided
Back Edge
AMS
Reduce
/Enlarge
Insert
page
1 sided copy-Left
Finished page #:0
Set
Basic
2
1 sided copy-Left
Finished page # : 0
Quality
Edit
Set
Ready to Job build.
Job Build - Step1
End
1-sided Copy
1-sided/
2-sided
Back Edge
AMS
Reduce/
Enlarge
Insert
page
Eco Print
Set original. Press Start key.
Job Build-Step 1
Group
Orig. image
quality
Off
Metric specifications
Set original. Press Start key.
Finished
Exposure
mode
Basic
Ready to Job build.
Original
type
Text+Photo
Edit
Metric specifications
Select
paper
End
Density 4
Orig. set
direction
Quality
1-sided
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
11x81/2”
Select
paper
Touch the “Quality” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch
the “Exposure mode” key. The “Exposure mode” screen will
be displayed.
Manual 4
Insert
blank page
Exposure
mode
1-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 0
End
Text + Photo
Image
quality
Off
Insert
blank page
Eco Print
1-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 0
Orig. set
direction
Quality
Basic
Edit
Touch the “Rear” [“Back Edge”] key or the “Left top corner”
key, as appropriate, according to the direction of the
originals.
2
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Quality
Edit
If you want to have the copy exposure selected
automatically, touch the “Auto” key.
If you want to manually set the exposure, touch the “Manual”
key and then touch the “Lighter” key or the “Darker” key to
move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the
exposure as desired.
Place originals then press Start key.
Back
Org. set direction
Inch specifications
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
" C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o r i g i n a l " c a n b e s h ow n
a t r i g h t s i d e o f d i s p l ay.
Fo l l ow t h e s t e p s. I f s e t t i n g m o d e i s
w r o n g , i n c o r r e c t c o py w i l l r e s u l t .
Back
Exposure mode
Rear
Close
Left top
corner
Auto
Metric specifications
Manual
Lighter
Darker
Set
Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key.
Back
Orig. set direction
Metric specifications
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original.
Set
Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key.
" C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o r i g i n a l " c a n b e s h ow n
a t r i g h t s i d e o f d i s p l ay.
Fo l l ow t h e s t e p s. I f s e t t i n g m o d e i s
w r o n g , i n c o r r e c t c o py w i l l r e s u l t .
Back
Exposure mode
Back Edge
Close
Left top
corner
Auto
Manual
Lighter
Darker
IMPORTANT!
If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not
correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly.
3
3
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 1.
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 1.
5-65
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
9 Turning the eco print mode ON
This procedure allows you to turn the eco print mode ON in order to
save on toner use.
8 Setting the image quality
This procedure sets the image quality according to the type of
originals being copied.
1
Touch the “Quality” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch
the “Orig. image quality” key. The “Orig. image quality”
screen will be displayed.
1
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Place originals then press Start key.
Job Build - Step1
Place originals then press Start key.
Job Build - Step1
End
Text+Photo
Exposure
mode
Orig. image
quality
Off
Insert
page
Eco Print
End
Density 4
Text+Photo
Exposure
mode
Orig. image
quality
Off
Insert
page
Eco Print
1 sided copy-Left
Finished page # : 0
1 sided copy-Left
Finished page # : 0
Basic
Basic
Set
Ready to Job build.
Set
Ready to Job build.
Density 4
Touch the “Quality” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch
the “Eco Print” key. The “Eco Print” screen will be displayed.
Quality
Quality
Edit
Edit
Metric specifications
Metric specifications
Set original. Press Start key.
Job Build - Step1
Set original. Press Start key.
Job Build - Step1
Manual 4
Exposure
mode
End
Text + Photo
Image
quality
Off
Manual 4
Exposure
mode
Insert
blank page
Eco Print
Quality
End
Text + Photo
Image
quality
Off
Insert
blank page
Eco Print
1-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 0
1-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 0
Basic
Basic
Set
Ready to Job build.
Set
Ready to Job build.
Quality
Edit
Edit
NOTE
2
Select the image quality mode by touching the “Manual” key
and then touching the “Text+Photo” key, the “Photo” key or
the “Text” key, as appropriate.
The setting in regard to whether or not to use the eco print mode can
only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all
steps in the copy job.
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
Orig.image quality
Back
Close
2
Touch the “On” key to turn the eco print mode ON.
Inch specifications
Text+Photo
Photo
Text+Photo : Set this mode to copy orig.
w i t h m i xe d t ex t a n d p h o t o
Photo : Add a dimensional effect of photo
Text : Copy a pencil or fine line.
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
Back
Eco Print
Text
Close
Eco Print
I t i s p o s s i bl e t o r e d u c e
toner consumption.
Image is a little light.
Metric specifications
Eco Print i s s av i n g t o n e r c o n s u m p t i o n ,
a n d i t i s e c o n o m i c a l l y.
Set
Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key.
Image quality orig.
Off
Back
On
Close
Metric specifications
Text+Photo
Photo
Text+Photo: Set this mode to copy
original mixed (text & photo).
Photo: Add a dimensional effect of photo.
Text : Copy pencil & fine line clearly.
Set
Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key.
Back
Eco Print
Text
Close
Eco Print
To n e r c o n s u m p t i o n
can be reduced.
Image resolution reduced.
3
E c o P r i n t e n a bl e s t o n e r c o n s u m p t i o n
reduction.
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 1.
Off
3
5-66
On
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 1.
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
0 Selecting the sheet erase mode
This procedure selects the sheet erase mode in order to erase the
shadows, lines, etc., that can occur around the edges of copies.
1
Touch the “Edit” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the
“Border Erase” [“Erase Mode”] key. The “Border Erase”
[“Erase Mode”] screen will be displayed.
! Manually selecting the size of the originals
This procedure allow you to select the size of the originals manually
using the touch panel.
1
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
Job Build - Step1
Select
orig.size
Place originals then press Start key.
Job Build - Step1
Off
Off
2 sided copy-Left
Finished page # : 0
Border
Erase
Page #
Basic
None
Quality
End
Insert page
Modify
Copy
None
None
Margin/
Centering
Set
Ready to Job build.
End
Auto
Off
Border
Erase
Touch the “Edit” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the
“Select orig. size” [“Select size orig.”] key. The “Select original
size” [“Select size original”] screen will be displayed.
Margin/
Centering
Edit
Basic
Auto
Off
Select
orig.size
Insert page
Modify
Copy
2 sided copy-Left
Finished page # : 0
None
Page #
Quality
Edit
Metric specifications
Metric specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key.
Off
Erase
Mode
None
Margin/
Imag.shift
Basic
End
Auto
Select
size orig.
None
Modify
copy
None
Set original. Press Start key.
Job Build - Step1
Insert
blank page
Off
2-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 0
Erase
Mode
Page
numbering
Quality
None
Margin/
Imag.shift
Edit
Basic
2
Touch the “Sheet Erase” [“Border erase”] key or “Individual
BordrErase” [“Individual Erase Mode”] key and then set the
desired border width.
2
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
Back
Border Erase
Close
Erase the border shadow of original.
None
Sheet
Erase
Set
Ready to Job build.
Job Build - Step1
Individual
BordrErase
End
Auto
None
Select
size orig.
Insert
blank page
Modify
copy
2-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 0
None
Page
numbering
Quality
Edit
If you want the size of the originals to be detected
automatically, touch the “Auto” key. If you want to select a
standard original size, touch the key that corresponds to the
desired size.
If you want to select another standard original size, touch the
“Other stand. Size” [“Others stand. Size”] key and select the
desired size.
If you want to select the dimensions of the originals manually,
touch the “Input size” key and then set the corresponding
dimensions.
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Metric specifications
Place originals then press Start key.
Back
Select original size
Set
Ready to Job build.
Back
Erase Mode
Border
erase
Auto
81/2 x 14"
11 x 15"
Select
size
11 x 17"
51/2 x 81/2"
A4
Input size
81/2 x 11"
81/2 x 51/2"
A4
Other
stand. Size
11 x 81/2"
Close
Erase edge of original copy.
None
Close
User regist.
Set original. Press Start key.
10 x 10"
9 x 9"
8 x 8"
12 x 12"
Individual
Erase Mode
Metric specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
3
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 1.
Set original. Press Start key.
Back
Select size original
Close
Use regist.
Auto
215x400mm
Select
size
215x400mm
Input size
Others
stand. Size
3
215x400mm
Folio
215x400mm
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 1.
5-67
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
@ Selecting the repeat copy mode
This procedure allow you to select the repeat copy mode so that you
can make any necessary number of additional copies later.
1
Touch the “Edit” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the
“Modify Copy” key. The “Modify Copy” screen will be
displayed.
# Selecting the margin mode or the centering/image shift mode
This procedure selects the margin mode or the centering/image shift
mode in order to create a margin space or center the copy image.
1
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
Job Build - Step1
Border
Erase
None
Margin/
Centering
Basic
Job Build - Step1
End
Auto
Select
orig.size
Off
Off
Insert page
Modify
Copy
Border
Erase
2 sided copy-Left
Finished page # : 0
None
None
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Quality
Edit
Basic
Metric specifications
Margin/
Imag.shift
Basic
None
Modify
copy
None
Off
Insert
blank page
Erase
Mode
2-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 0
None
Page
numbering
Quality
Margin/
Imag.shift
Edit
Basic
NOTES
None
Page #
Quality
Edit
Set
End
Auto
Select
size orig.
None
Modify
copy
None
Insert
blank page
2-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 0
Page
numbering
Quality
Edit
NOTE
• To make additional copies with the repeat copy mode, refer to
“(2) Printing out with the repeat copy mode” on page 5-43.
• The setting in regard to whether or not to use the repeat copy mode
can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will
apply to all steps in the copy job.
The setting in regard to the margin mode or the centering/image shift
mode can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will
apply to all steps in the copy job.
2
2
2 sided copy-Left
Finished page # : 0
Job Build - Step1
End
Auto
Select
size orig.
Insert page
Modify
Copy
Set original. Press Start key.
Job Build - Step1
None
Select
orig.size
Off
Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key.
Erase
Mode
End
Auto
Metric specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Off
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
Off
Touch the “Edit” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the
“Margin/Centering” [“Margin/Imag. shift”] key. The “Margin/
Centering” [“Margin/Imag. shift”] screen will be displayed.
Touch the “On” key to select the repeat copy mode.
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Inch specifications
Place originals then press Start key.
Modify Copy
Touch the “Margin” key or the “Centering” [“Imag.shift”] key,
as appropriate.
For more detailed information on these two settings, refer to
the explanation for the margin mode on page 5-6 or the
centering/image shift mode on page 5-8, as appropriate.
Back
Close
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
Margin/Centering
Off
On
None
Margin
Metric specifications
Close
Reposition image to left/right or
top/bottom, and also center image
on paper.
Centering
Set
Ready to Job build.
Metric specifications
Set original. Press Start key.
Modify copy
Back
W h e n s e l e c t [ O n ] , d a t a c a n b e s ave d .
Yo u c a n r e c a l l a n d r e - p r i n t a t a ny t i m e.
Yo u c a n s e t t h e p a s swo r d t o s e c u r e
s ave d d o c u m e n t .
Back
Close
Set
Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key.
Margin/Image shift
Off
On
When select [On], job can be saved.
WhenYou
thecan
mode
is set
[On],
it can
recall
and
re-print
at anytime.
save a
jobcan
data
and
reprint it anytime.
You
set
a password
to secure saved
And you
can set that other user are not
document.
able to reprint.
Reposition image to left/right or
top/bottom and center image on paper.
Image
shift
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 1.
3
5-68
Close
None
Margin
3
Back
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 1.
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
$ Selecting the print page numbers mode
This procedure selects the print page numbers mode in order to have
page numbers printed on the corresponding copies.
1
Touch the “Edit” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the
“Page #” [“Page numbering”] key. The “Page #” [“Page
numbering”] screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
Job Build - Step1
End
Auto
Off
Border
Erase
Select
orig.size
Off
2 sided copy-Left
Finished page # : 0
None
None
Margin/
Centering
Insert page
Modify
Copy
Page #
Basic
Quality
Edit
Metric specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key.
Job Build - Step1
Off
End
Auto
Select
size orig.
Erase
Mode
None
None
Modify
copy
None
Insert
blank page
2-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 0
Page
numbering
Margin/
Imag.shift
Basic
Quality
Edit
NOTE
The setting in regard to the print page numbers mode can only be
made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps
in the copy job.
2
For more detailed information on this setting, refer to the
explanation for the print page numbers mode on page 5-16.
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key.
Back
Page #
None
P.1
-1-
1/n
Close
Page # can be added on bottom of copy.
Metric specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key.
Back
Page numbering
None
P.1
-1-
1/n
Close
Page # can be added on bottom of copy.
3
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 1.
5-69
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
5-70
Section 6
1.
DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT
FUNCTIONS
Document management functions
NOTE
The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to use
this function.
(2) Form registration
1 Registering a form
Perform the following procedure when you want to register an images
as a “form” for use in the form overlay mode.
(1) What are the “document management” functions?
“Document management” functions refer to those functions that
enable you to scan and save documents onto the copier’s hard disk,
and then use that data for copying purposes.
Each function has it’s own separate “box” (the area where document
data is saved) on the hard disk and all data for that particular function
is saved into that specific box.
1
Set the document that you want to register as a form.
2
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document
Management” screen will be displayed.
3
Touch the “Form reg.” [“Form registr.”] key. The “Form
registration” screen will be displayed.
The following “document management” functions are available with
this copier:
● Form registration (pages 6-1 through 6-4)
You can store in a box on the copier’s hard disk, and you can then
manage the use of, those images that will be used as the “form” in the
form overlay mode.
● Shared data box (pages 6-4 through 6-8)
If you register data that will be shared by all users in the shared data
box, it will be possible for each user to print out that data at their own
convenience. This is useful, for example, for registering business
forms and the like that are frequently used my many people. The data
that you register here will be stored permanently until the procedure to
delete it is performed.
Inch specifications
Select function.
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
● Synergy print boxes (pages 6-9 through 6-19)
If you store multiple sets of documents in a synergy print box, you can
print out up to 10 of these sets at one time.
Shared Data Box
Document
reg.
Synergy Print Box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Document
reg.
Form box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Form
reg.
Box
Editing
Metric specifications
Select function.
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
Shared Data Box
Document
registr.
Box
Editing
Synergy Print Box
Document
printing
Document
registr.
Box
Editing
Form box
Document
printing
Form
registr.
Box
Editing
6-1
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
4
Touch the “Change name” key and then enter a name for the
form data.
If you do not want to register a name for the form data,
go directly to the next step.
Inch specifications
Original
Register
11x81/2"
81/2x11"
25/10/'01 19:20
Ready to register form(s).
Place originals then press Start key.
Cancel
Form registration
Form box
2 Checking registered forms and changing form names
Perform the following procedure when you want to verify the name of
a registered form, the size of the original document or the date and
time it was stored in memory, or when you want to print out the
document in order to check it. You can also use this procedure to
change the registered form name.
1
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document
Management” screen will be displayed.
2
Touch the “Box Editing” key under “Form box”.
The “Box editing” screen will be displayed.
Auto
Select
orig. size
Documents
Form006
Auto size
Select
regi. size
Change
name
Basic
100%
Reduce
/Enlarge
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
Edit
Quality
Metric specifications
Original
Register
A4
25/10/'01 19:20
Ready to register form(s).
A4
Set original. Press Start key.
Job cancel
Form registration
Form box
Auto
Select
size orig.
Documents
FORM006
Auto size
Select
regi. size
Change
name
Basic
100%
Reduce/
Enlarge
Quality
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
Edit
NOTE
Inch specifications
Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on
entering characters.
Select function.
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
Shared Data Box
5
Document
reg.
Touch the “Select orig. size” [“Select size orig.”], “Select regi.
size”, “Reduce/Enlarge” and/or “Orig. set direction” keys if
you want to perform the corresponding settings for the
originals being used.
If you want to access the “Scanning density” key and/or the
“Orig. image quality” [“Image quality”] key to make those
settings, touch the “Quality” key.
If you want to set access the “Border Erase” [“Erase Mode”]
key to make those settings, touch the “Edit” key.
6
7
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Document
reg.
Form box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Form
reg.
Box
Editing
Metric specifications
Select function.
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
Shared Data Box
Document
registr.
Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the document will start.
Once the document has been completely scanned, the touch
panel will return to the screen in step 3.
If you want to register another form, repeat steps 3
through 6.
Synergy Print Box
Synergy Print Box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
3
Document
registr.
Form box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Form
registr.
Box
Editing
Select the form that you want to check and then touch the
“Conf/Crrt. details” [“Check/Rev. details”] key. The “Check/
Correct details” [“Check/revise details”] screen will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
Close
Box editing
Form
Up
Form 005
11x81/2"
01/04/19
Form 004
11x81/2"
01/04/19
Form 003
81/2x11"
01/04/19
Form 002
11x81/2"
01/04/19
Form 001
11x81/2" 01/04/19
Order of
indication
Conf/Crrt.
details
Down
Delete
Up
Order of
indication
001/005
Document Management - Form box
Metric specifications
Close
Box editing
Form
Form 007
A4
25/10/01
Form 006
A4
25/10/01
Form 005
A4
25/10/01
Form 004
A4
25/10/01
Form 003
A4
25/10/01
001/007
6-2
Document Management - Form box
Check/Rev.
details
Down
Delete
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
3 Deleting a registered form
NOTE
It is possible to change the order of display for the registered forms.
To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then touch the “Sort
by date” key (and select either “New R Old” or “Old R New”) or the
“Sort by name” key (and select either “A R Z” or “Z R A”), as
appropriate.
4
Perform the following procedure when you want to delete a registered
form.
1
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document
Management” screen will be displayed.
2
Touch the “Box Editing” key under “Form Box”.
The “Box editing” screen will be displayed.
Check the displayed information.
If you want to print out the selected form, touch the “Print
Form” key.
If you want to change the name of the selected form, touch
the “Change form name” key and then enter the new name.
Inch specifications
Close
Check/Correct details
Item
User name
Document name
Size
Orig. set direction
Input source
Resolution
Registration date
Details
----------Form 001
11x17"
Back Edge
Copy
600dpi
25/10/'01 14:06
Change
form name
Print
Form
Inch specifications
Document Management - Form box - Box editing
Select function.
Metric specifications
Close
Check/revice details
End
Shared Data Box
Details
Item
User name
Document name
Size
Orig. set direction
Input source
Resolution
Registration date
25/10/'01 19:20
Document Management
----------FORM007
A4
Back Edge
Copy
600dpi
25/10/'01 14:06
Document
reg.
Change
form name
Synergy Print Box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Document
reg.
Form box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Form
reg.
Box
Editing
Print
Form
Metric specifications
Document Management - Form box - Box editing
Select function.
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
NOTE
Shared Data Box
Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on
entering characters.
Document
registr.
Synergy Print Box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
5
Once you have finished checking the information for that
form, touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 3.
If you want to check the information for another registered
form, repeat steps 3 through 5.
3
Document
registr.
Form box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Form
registr.
Box
Editing
Select the form that you want to delete and then touch the
“Delete” key. A verification screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Close
Box editing
Form
6
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the screen in step 2.
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Up
Form 005
11x81/2"
01/04/19
Form 004
11x81/2"
01/04/19
Form 003
81/2x11"
01/04/19
Form 002
11x81/2"
01/04/19
Form 001
11x81/2" 01/04/19
Order of
indication
Conf/Crrt.
details
Down
Delete
001/005
Document Management - Form box
Metric specifications
Close
Box editing
Form
Form 007
Up
A4
25/10/01
Form 006
A4
25/10/01
Form 005
A4
25/10/01
Form 004
A4
25/10/01
Form 003
A4
25/10/01
Order of
indication
Check/Rev.
details
Down
Delete
001/007
Document Management - Form box
6-3
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
(3) Shared data box
NOTE
It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents.
To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then touch the “Sort
by date” key (and select either “New R Old” or “Old R New”) or the
“Sort by name” key (and select either “A R Z” or “Z R A”), as
appropriate.
4
1 Storing documents in the box
Perform the following procedure when you want to register a set of
documents in the shared data box.
* Up to 100 sets of documents can be saved in the shared data box.
1
Set the documents to be stored.
2
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document
Management” screen will be displayed.
3
Touch the “Document reg.” [“Document registr.”] key under
“Shared Data Box”. The “Document registration” screen will
be displayed.
Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications
Stop
Form name : Form 001
This form will be deleted. Do you really want to delete it?
Yes
No
Metric specifications
Stop
Form name : FORM007
This form will be deleted. Are you sure?
Yes
No
Inch specifications
If you selected “Yes”, the selected form will be deleted and
the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.
If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen
in step 3 without deleting the selected form.
Select function.
Shared Data Box
Document
reg.
5
If you want to delete another registered form, repeat steps 3
and 4.
6
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
Synergy Print Box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Document
reg.
Form box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Form
reg.
Box
Editing
Metric specifications
Select function.
Shared Data Box
Document
registr.
Box
Editing
6-4
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
Synergy Print Box
Document
printing
Document
registr.
Box
Editing
Form box
Document
printing
Form
registr.
Box
Editing
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
4
Touch the “Change name” key and then enter a name for the
documents.
If you do not want to register a name for the documents, go
directly to the next step.
Inch specifications
Place originals then press Start key.
Auto
Job006
Change
name
1
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document
Management” screen will be displayed.
2
Touch the “Document printing” key under “Shared Data Box”.
The “Document printing” screen will be displayed.
Cancel
Document registration
Documents
Perform the following procedure when you want to print out
documents that are stored in a shared data box.
Original
Register
11x81/2"
81/2x11"
25/10/'01 19:20
Ready to register document(s).
Shared Data Box
2 Printing out stored documents
Select
orig. size
1 sided
Original
type
Auto size
Select
regi. size
Reduce
/Enlarge
Basic
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
100%
Edit
Quality
Metric specifications
Original
Register
A4
25/10/'01 19:20
Ready to register document(s).
A4
Set original. Press Start key.
Job cancel
Document registration
Shared Data Box
Auto
Select
size orig.
Documents
Job001
Auto size
Select
regi. size
Change
name
Basic
1-sided
Original
type
100%
Reduce/
Enlarge
Quality
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
Edit
Inch specifications
Select function.
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
NOTE
Shared Data Box
Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on
entering characters.
Document
reg.
Synergy Print Box
Document
reg.
Document
printing
Box
Editing
5
6
7
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Form
reg.
Box
Editing
Metric specifications
Touch the “Select orig. size” [“Select size orig.”] key, the
“Select regi. size” key, the “Original type” key, the “Reduce/
Enlarge” key and/or the “Orig.set direction” key, if you want to
perform the corresponding settings.
If you want to access the “Scanning density” key and/or the
“Orig.image quality” [“Image quality”] key to make those
settings, touch the “Quality” key.
If you want to set access the “Border Erase” [“Erase Mode”]
key and/or the “Continuous scanning” [“Multiple scanning”]
key to make those settings, touch the “Edit” key.
Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the documents will start.
Once all of the documents have been completely scanned,
the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.
If you want to register another document, repeat steps 3
through 6.
Form box
Select function.
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
Shared Data Box
Document
registr.
Synergy Print Box
Document
printing
Document
registr.
Box
Editing
3
Form box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Form
registr.
Box
Editing
Select the documents to be printed out and then touch the
“Finish selecting” key.
Inch specifications
Cancel
Document printing
Document data box
Up
Job 005
1
25/10/01
Job 004
1
25/10/01
Job 003
1
25/10/01
Job 002
1
25/10/01
Job 001
1
25/10/01
Order of
indication
Conf/Crrt.
details
Down
Finish
selecting
001/010
Document Management - Shared Data Box
Metric specifications
Job cancel
Document printing
Document data box
JOB003
Up
1
25/10/01
JOB002
1
25/10/01
JOB001
1
25/10/01
Order of
indication
Check/Rev.
details
Down
001/003
Finish
Selecting
Document Management - Shared Data Box
6-5
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
3 Checking stored documents and changing their names
NOTE
It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents.
To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then touch the “Sort
by date” key (and select either “New R Old” or “Old R New”) or the
“Sort by name” key (and select either “A R Z” or “Z R A”), as
appropriate.
4
Touch the “Select paper” key, the “Sort/Finished” key and/or
the “1 sided/ 2 sided” key, to perform the corresponding
settings.
If you want to access the “Form Overlay” key, the “Margin”
key, the “Cover Mode” key, the “Page #” [“Page numbering”]
key, the “Booklet” key and/or the “Select of Output” key to
make those settings, touch the “Edit” key.
5
Press the [Start] key.
Print out will start.
Perform the following procedure when you want to verify the name of
stored documents, the size of the original documents or the date and
time they were stored in the shared data box, or when you want to
print out the first page of those document in order to check them. You
can also use this procedure to change the registered name for the
documents.
1
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document
Management” screen will be displayed.
2
Touch the “Document printing” key or the “Box Editing” key
under “Shared Data Box”. The “Document printing” screen or
the “Box editing” screen, as appropriate, will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Select function.
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
Shared Data Box
Document
reg.
Synergy Print Box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Document
reg.
Form box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Form
reg.
Box
Editing
Metric specifications
Select function.
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
Shared Data Box
Document
registr.
Box
Editing
6-6
Synergy Print Box
Document
printing
Document
registr.
Box
Editing
Form box
Document
printing
Form
registr.
Box
Editing
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
3
Select the documents that you want to check and then touch
the “Cont/Crrt. details” [“Check/Rev. details”] key.
The “Check/Correct details” [“Check/revice details”] screen
will be displayed.
5
Once you have finished checking the information for those
documents, touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return
to the screen in step 3.
If you want to check the information for other stored
documents, repeat steps 3 through 5.
6
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the screen in step 2.
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Inch specifications
Close
Box editing
Document data box
Up
Job 005
1
25/10/01
Job 004
1
25/10/01
Job 003
1
25/10/01
Job 002
1
25/10/01
Job 001
1
25/10/01
Order of
indication
Cont/Crrt.
details
Down
Delete
001/010
Document Management - Shared Data Box
Metric specifications
Close
Box editing
Document data box
Up
JOB003
1
25/10/01
JOB002
1
25/10/01
JOB001
1
25/10/01
Order of
indication
Check/Rev.
details
Down
Delete
001/003
Document Management - Shared Data Box
NOTE
It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents.
To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then touch the “Sort
by date” key (and select either “New R Old” or “Old R New”) or the
“Sort by name” key (and select either “A R Z” or “Z R A”), as
appropriate.
4
Check the displayed information.
If you want to print out the first page of the selected
documents, touch the “Print from 1st” [“Head Print”] key.
If you want to change the name of the selected documents,
touch the “Change doc.name” key and then enter the new
name.
Inch specifications
Close
Check/Correct details
Item
User name
Document name
Registration size
Orig. set direction
page #
Input source
Resolution
Registration date
Details
-------------------Job005
11x15"
Back Edge
1
Copy
600dpi
'25/10/01 14:39
Change
doc. name
Print
from 1st
Document Management - Shared Data Box - Box editing
Metric specifications
Close
Check/revise details
Item
User name
Document name
Registration size
Orig. set direction
page #
Input source
Resolution
Registration date
Details
-------------------Job006
A4
Back Edge
1
Copy
600dpi
'25/10/01 14:39
Change
doc. name
Head
print
Document Management - Shared Data Box - Box editing
NOTE
Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on
entering characters.
6-7
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
4 Deleting stored documents
NOTE
Perform the following procedure when you want to delete stored
documents.
1
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document
Management” screen will be displayed.
It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents.
To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then touch the “Sort
by date” key (and select either “New R Old” or “Old R New”) or the
“Sort by name” key (and select either “A R Z” or “Z R A”), as
appropriate.
4
Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications
Stop
Document name : JOB 005
This document(s) will be deleted. Do you want to delete it?
Yes
2
Touch the “Box Editing” key under “Shared Data Box”.
The “Box editing” screen will be displayed.
No
Metric specifications
Inch specifications
Stop
Select function.
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
Shared Data Box
Document
reg.
Synergy Print Box
Document
reg.
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Document name :JOB002
This document will be deleted. Are you sure?
Form box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Yes
Form
reg.
Box
Editing
If you selected “Yes”, the selected documents will be deleted
and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.
If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen
in step 3 without deleting the selected documents.
Metric specifications
Select function.
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
Shared Data Box
Document
registr.
Synergy Print Box
Document
printing
Document
registr.
Box
Editing
3
Form box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Form
registr.
Select the documents that you want to delete and then touch
the “Delete” key. A verification screen will be displayed.
Close
Box editing
Document data box
Up
Job 005
1
25/10/01
Job 004
1
25/10/01
Job 003
1
25/10/01
Job 002
1
25/10/01
Job 001
1
25/10/01
Order of
indication
Cont/Crrt.
details
Down
Delete
001/010
Document Management - Shared Data Box
Metric specifications
Close
Box editing
Document data box
Up
JOB003
1
25/10/01
JOB002
1
25/10/01
JOB001
1
25/10/01
Document Management - Shared Data Box
Order of
indication
Check/Rev.
details
Down
001/003
5
If you want to delete other stored documents, repeat steps 3
and 4.
6
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Box
Editing
Inch specifications
6-8
No
Delete
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
4
(4) Synergy print boxes
1 Storing documents in a box
Perform the following procedure when you want to register a set of
documents in a synergy print box.
Either touch the synergy print box in which you want to
register the documents, or enter its number using the
keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Document
registration” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Cancel
Document registration
1
Select box No.
Set the documents to be stored.
006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105
016 MNOP_0200104
002 EFGH_0000002
007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106
017 QRST_0200105
IJKL_0200003
008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101
018 UVWX_0200106
003
2
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document
Management” screen will be displayed.
Box No.
(with #key)
001 ABCD_0000001
004 MNOP_0000004 009
005 QRST_0000005
IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102
010 MNOP_0000104 015
IJKL_0200103
0
0
7
019 ABCD_050010
020 EFGH_0500102
Enter
1/5
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
Metric specifications
Job cancel
Document registration
Select box No.
001 ABCD_0000001
Box No.
(with # key)
006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105
016 MNOP_0200104
002 EFGH_0000002
007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106
017 QRST_0200105
IJKL_0200003
008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101
018 UVWX_0200106
003
004 MNOP_0000004 009
005 QRST_0000005
IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102
010 MNOP_0000104 015
IJKL_0200103
0
0
7
019 ABCD_050010
020 EFGH_0500102
Enter
1/ 5
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
3
Touch the “Document reg.” [“Document registr.”] key under
“Synergy Print Box”. The screen to select the synergy print
box will be displayed.
5
Inch specifications
Touch the “Change name” key and then enter a name for the
documents.
If you do not want to register a name for the documents, go
directly to the next step.
Inch specifications
Select function.
Original
Register
11x81/2"
81/2x11"
25/10/'01 19:20
Ready to register document(s).
25/10/'01 19:20
Place originals then press Start key.
End
Document Management
Cancel
Document registration
Shared Data Box
Synergy Print Box
Form box
007
Auto
Documents
Document
reg.
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Document
reg.
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Select
orig. size
Job001
Form
reg.
Auto size
Select
regi. size
Box
Editing
Change
name
Metric specifications
Basic
1 sided
Original
type
100%
Reduce
/Enlarge
Original
A4
Register
A4
25/10/'01 19:20
Ready to register document(s).
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
Document registration
Synergy Print Box
Auto
Select
size orig.
Documents
Box
Editing
Document
registr.
Box
Editing
Job cancel
Form box
007
Document
printing
Edit
Quality
Set original. Press Start key.
Document
registr.
Orig. set
direction
Metric specifications
Select function.
Shared Data Box
Back Eage
Document
printing
Job001
Form
registr.
Change
name
Original
type
Select
regi. size
100%
Reduce/
Enlarge
Basic
Quality
Auto size
Box
Editing
1-sided
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
Edit
NOTE
Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on
entering characters.
6-9
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
6
Touch the “Select orig. size” [“Select size orig.”] key, the
“Select regi. size” key, the “Original type” key, the “Reduce/
Enlarge” key and/or the “Orig.set direction” key, if you want to
perform the corresponding settings.
If you want to access the “Scanning density” key and/or the
“Orig.image quality” [“Image quality”] key to make those
settings, touch the “Quality” key.
If you want to set access the “Border Erase” [“Erase Mode”]
key and/or the “Continuous scanning” [“Multiple scanning”]
key to make those settings, touch the “Edit” key.
7
Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the documents will start.
Once all of the documents have been completely scanned,
the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.
If you want to register another document, repeat steps 3
through 7.
8
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
2 Combining and printing out stored documents
Perform the following procedure when you want to combine and print
out documents that are stored in a synergy print box.
1
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document
Management” screen will be displayed.
2
Touch the “Document printing” key under “Synergy Print
Box”. The screen to select the synergy print box will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
Select function.
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
Shared Data Box
Document
reg.
Synergy Print Box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Document
reg.
Form box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Form
reg.
Box
Editing
Metric specifications
Select function.
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
Shared Data Box
Document
registr.
Box
Editing
6-10
Synergy Print Box
Document
printing
Document
registr.
Box
Editing
Form box
Document
printing
Form
registr.
Box
Editing
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
3
Either touch the synergy print box that contains the
documents to be printed out, or enter its number using the
keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Document printing”
screen will be displayed.
4
Select the document sets in order of how you want them
printed. Up to 10 sets of documents can be selected.
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Cancel
Document printing
Cancel
Document printing
Select box No.
Box No.
(with #key)
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006
IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102
004 MNOP_0000004 009
IJKL_0000103
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104
Select:
2
JOB005
1
WED 15:32 2
JOB004
1
WED 15:33 1
JOB003
1
WED 15:34
013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106
JOB002
1
WED 15:35
014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101
JOB001
1
WED 15:37
011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105
003
007
015
0
0
7
IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102
Order of
indication
Print once
all data
Conf/Crrt.
details
Down
Select/
Cancel
001/005
Enter
1/ 5
Up
Finish
selecting
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
Metric specifications
Metric specifications
Job cancel
Document printing
Job cancel
Document Printineg
Select box No.
011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105
003
007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK
Box No.
(with # key)
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006
IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102
004 MNOP_0000004 009
IJKL_0000103
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104
0
0
013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106
015
1
WED 15:32 2
WED 15:33 1
JOB003
1
WED 15:34
JOB002
1
WED 15:35
JOB001
1
WED 15:37
IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102
001/005
Enter
1/ 5
2
1
JOB004
7
014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101
Select :
JOB005
Up
Order of
indication
Print once
all data
Check/ Rev.
details
Down
Select/
Cancel
Finish
selecting
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
NOTES
NOTES
• If that box was registered with a password, the password entry
screen will be displayed.
Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the
“Enter” key.
Inch specifications
• It is possible to change the order of display for the stored
documents. To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then
touch the “Sort by date” key (and select either “New R Old” or “Old
R New”) or the “Sort by name” key (and select either “A R Z” or “Z
R A”), as appropriate.
• If you want to print out more than one set of documents, they must
all be of the same size.
Stop
Enter password.
Password
(Enter by #key)
********
Clear
5
Touch the “Select paper” key, the “Sort/Finished” key and/or
the “1 sided/ 2 sided” key, to perform the corresponding
settings.
If you want to access the “Form Overlay” key, the “Margin”
key, the “Cover Mode” key, the “Page #” key, the “Booklet”
key and/or the “Select of Output” key to make those settings,
touch the “Edit” key.
6
Press the [Start] key.
Print out will start.
Enter
007
Metric specifications
Stop
Enter password.
Password
(Enter #-key)
********
Clear
Enter
007 Box Name ABCDEFG
• Refer to “7 Registering a password for a box” on page 6-18 for
information on registering the password.
6-11
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
3 Printing out the full contents of a box
NOTES
Perform the following procedure when you want to print out all of the
documents that are stored in a synergy print box at one time.
1
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document
Management” screen will be displayed.
• If that box was registered with a password, the password entry
screen will be displayed.
Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the
“Enter” key.
Inch specifications
Stop
Enter password.
Password
(Enter by #key)
********
Clear
Enter
007
Metric specifications
Stop
Enter password.
2
Password
Touch the “Document printing” key under “Synergy Print
Box”. The screen to select the synergy print box will be
displayed.
(Enter #-key)
********
Clear
Enter
007 Box Name ABCDEFG
Inch specifications
Select function.
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
Shared Data Box
Document
reg.
• Refer to “7 Registering a password for a box” on page 6-18 for
information on registering the password.
Synergy Print Box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Document
reg.
Form box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Form
reg.
4
Box
Editing
Metric specifications
Inch specifications
Select function.
End
Document
registr.
Synergy Print Box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Document
registr.
Cancel
Document printing
25/10/'01 19:20
Document Management
Shared Data Box
Touch the “Print once all data” key. Print out will start.
Once printing is completed, the touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
007
Select : 0
Job 005
1
WED 15:32
Job 004
1
WED 15:33
Job 003
1
WED 15:34
Job 002
1
WED 15:35
Job 001
1
WED 15:37
Form box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Form
registr.
Box
Editing
Up
Order of
indication
Print once
all data
Conf/Crrt.
details
Down
Select/
Cancel
001/005
Finish
selecting
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
Metric specifications
3
Either touch the synergy print box that contains the
documents to be printed out, or enter its number using the
keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Document printing”
screen will be displayed.
007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK
Inch specifications
Select box No.
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006
IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102
IJKL_0000103
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104
0
0
JOB003
1
WED 15:34
JOB002
1
WED 15:35
JOB001
1
WED 15:37
015
5
IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102
Enter
Job cancel
Select box No.
Box No.
(with # key)
011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105
IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102
IJKL_0000103
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104
0
0
013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106
014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101
015
IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102
1/ 5
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
Check/ Rev.
details
Down
Select/
Cancel
Finish
selecting
013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106
Document Printineg
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006
Up
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
Metric specifications
6-12
WED 15:33
Print once
all data
7
014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101
1/ 5
004 MNOP_0000004 009
WED 15:32
1
Order of
indication
011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
003
1
JOB004
001/005
Box No.
(with #key)
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105
003
Select : 0
JOB005
Cancel
Document printing
004 MNOP_0000004 009
Job cancel
Document printing
Enter
7
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
4 Checking stored documents and changing their names
Perform the following procedure when you want to verify the name of
stored documents, the size of the original documents or the date and
time they were stored in the synergy print box, or when you want to
print out the first page of those document in order to check them. You
can also use this procedure to change the registered name for the
documents.
3
Either touch the synergy print box that contains the
documents to be printed out, or enter its number using the
keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Document printing”
screen or the “Box editing” screen, as appropriate, will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
Cancel
Box editing
Select box No.
1
Box No.
(with #key)
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document
Management” screen will be displayed.
011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105
003
IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102
004 MNOP_0000004 009
IJKL_0000103
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104
013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106
014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101
015
IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102
Enter
1/ 5
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
Metric specifications
Job cancel
Box editing
Select box No.
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006
011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104
Box No.
(with # key)
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105
003
IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102
004 MNOP_0000004 009
IJKL_0000103
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104
013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106
014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101
015
IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102
1/ 5
Enter
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
2
Touch the “Document printing” key or the “Box Editing” key
under “Synergy Print Box”. The screen to select the synergy
print box will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Select function.
25/10/'01 19:20
• If that box was registered with a password, the password entry
screen will be displayed.
Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the
“Enter” key.
End
Document Management
Shared Data Box
NOTES
Synergy Print Box
Inch specifications
Form box
Stop
Enter password.
Document
reg.
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Document
reg.
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Form
reg.
Box
Editing
Password
(Enter by #key)
********
Clear
Metric specifications
Enter
Select function.
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
Shared Data Box
Synergy Print Box
007
Metric specifications
Form box
Stop
Enter password.
Document
registr.
Box
Editing
Document
printing
Document
registr.
Box
Editing
Document
printing
Form
registr.
Box
Editing
Password
(Enter #-key)
********
Clear
Enter
007 Box Name ABCDEFG
• Refer to “7 Registering a password for a box” on page 6-18 for
information on registering the password.
6-13
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
4
Select the documents that you want to check and then touch
the “Conf/Correct details” [“Check/Rev. details”] key. The
“Check/Correct details” [“Check/revise details”] screen will be
displayed.
NOTE
Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on
entering characters.
Inch specifications
End
Box editing
007
Up
JOB005
1
WED 15:32
JOB004
1
WED 15:33
JOB003
1
WED 15:34
JOB002
1
WED 15:35
JOB001
1
WED 15:37
Down
Order of
indication
Delete all
data / box
Conf/Crrt
details
Box
Password
6
Once you have finished checking the information for those
documents, touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return
to the screen in step 4.
If you want to check the information for other stored
documents, repeat steps 4 through 6.
7
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Delete
001/005
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
Metric specifications
Box editing
End
007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK
Up
JOB005
1
WED 15:32
JOB004
1
WED 15:33
JOB003
1
WED 15:34
JOB002
1
WED 15:35
JOB001
1
WED 15:37
Down
Order of
indication
Delete all
box data
Check/ Rev.
details
Box
Password
Delete
001/005
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
NOTE
It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents.
To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then touch the “Sort
by date” key (and select either “New R Old” or “Old R New”) or the
“Sort by name” key (and select either “A R Z” or “Z R A”), as
appropriate.
5
Check the displayed information.
If you want to print out the first page of the selected
documents, touch the “Print from 1st” [“Head print”] key.
If you want to change the name of the selected documents,
touch the “Change doc.name” key and then enter the new
name.
Inch specifications
Close
Check/Correct details
Item
User name
Document name
Registration size
Orig. set direction
page #
Input source
Resolution
Registration date
Details
-------------------Job006
11x81/2"
Back Edge
1
Copy
600dpi
'25/10/01 14:39
Change
doc. name
Print
from 1st
Document Management - Synergy Print Box - Box editing
Metric specifications
Close
Check/revise details
Item
User name
Document name
Registration size
Orig. set direction
page #
Input source
Resolution
Registration date
Details
-------------------Job006
A4
Back Edge
1
Copy
600dpi
'25/10/01 14:39
Document Management - Synergy Print Box - Box editing
6-14
Change
doc. name
Head
print
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
5 Deleting stored documents from a box
NOTES
Perform the following procedure when you want to delete stored
documents.
1
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document
Management” screen will be displayed.
• If that box was registered with a password, the password entry
screen will be displayed.
Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the
“Enter” key.
Inch specifications
Stop
Enter password.
Password
(Enter by #key)
********
Clear
Enter
007
Metric specifications
Stop
Enter password.
2
Password
Touch the “Box Editing” key under “Synergy Print Box”. The
screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed.
(Enter #-key)
********
Clear
Enter
Inch specifications
007 Box Name ABCDEFG
Select function.
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
Shared Data Box
Document
reg.
Synergy Print Box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Document
reg.
• Refer to “7 Registering a password for a box” on page 6-18 for
information on registering the password.
Form box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Form
reg.
Box
Editing
4
Metric specifications
Inch specifications
Select function.
Document
registr.
007
End
Synergy Print Box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Document
registr.
Form box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
End
Box editing
25/10/'01 19:20
Document Management
Shared Data Box
Select the documents that you want to delete and then touch
the “Delete” key. A verification screen will be displayed.
Form
registr.
Up
JOB005
1
WED 15:32
JOB004
1
WED 15:33
JOB003
1
WED 15:34
JOB002
1
WED 15:35
JOB001
1
WED 15:37
Down
Order of
indication
Delete all
data / box
Conf/Crrt
details
Box
Password
Delete
001/005
Box
Editing
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
Metric specifications
3
Either touch the synergy print box that contains the
documents to be deleted, or enter its number using the
keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Box editing” screen
will be displayed.
Box editing
End
007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK
Inch specifications
Up
JOB005
1
WED 15:32
JOB004
1
WED 15:33
JOB003
1
WED 15:34
JOB002
1
WED 15:35
JOB001
1
WED 15:37
Select box No.
Box No.
(with #key)
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006
Down
Delete all
box data
Check/ Rev.
details
Box
Password
Delete
001/005
Cancel
Box editing
Order of
indication
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105
003
IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102
004 MNOP_0000004 009
IJKL_0000103
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104
013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106
NOTE
014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101
015
IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102
1/ 5
Enter
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
Metric specifications
Job cancel
Box editing
Select box No.
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006
011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104
It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents.
To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then touch the “Sort
by date” key (and select either “New R Old” or “Old R New”) or the
“Sort by name” key (and select either “A R Z” or “Z R A”), as
appropriate.
Box No.
(with # key)
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105
003
IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102
004 MNOP_0000004 009
IJKL_0000103
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104
013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106
014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101
015
IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102
1/ 5
Enter
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
6-15
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
5
Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.
6 Deleting the full contents of a box
Inch specifications
Perform the following procedure when you want to delete the full
contents of a synergy print box in one step.
Stop
Document name : Job 005
1
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document
Management” screen will be displayed.
2
Touch the “Box editing” key under “Synergy Print Box”. The
screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed.
This document(s) will be deleted. Do you want to delete it?
Yes
No
Metric specifications
Stop
Document name : JOB005
This document will be deleted. Are you sure?
Yes
No
If you selected “Yes”, the selected documents will be deleted
and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 4.
If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen
in step 4 without deleting the selected documents.
Inch specifications
Select function.
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
6
If you want to delete other stored documents, repeat steps 4
and 5.
Shared Data Box
Document
reg.
7
Synergy Print Box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
Touch the “End” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
Document
reg.
Form box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Form
reg.
Box
Editing
Metric specifications
Select function.
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
Shared Data Box
Document
registr.
Synergy Print Box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
3
Document
registr.
Form box
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Form
registr.
Box
Editing
Either touch the synergy print box that contains the
documents to be deleted, or enter its number using the
keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Box editing” screen
will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Cancel
Box editing
Select box No.
Box No.
(with #key)
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006
011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105
003
IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102
004 MNOP_0000004 009
IJKL_0000103
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104
013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106
014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101
015
IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102
1/ 5
Enter
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
Metric specifications
Job cancel
Box editing
Select box No.
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006
011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104
Box No.
(with # key)
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105
003
IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102
004 MNOP_0000004 009
IJKL_0000103
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104
013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106
014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101
015
IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102
1/ 5
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
6-16
Enter
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
5
NOTES
Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications
• If that box was registered with a password, the password entry
screen will be displayed.
Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the
“Enter” key.
Stop
Document Number: 10
Inch specifications
All data in box will be deleted. Do you want to delete?
Stop
Enter password.
Yes
Password
Metric specifications
(Enter by #key)
********
No
Clear
Stop
Enter
007
Document Number : 5
Metric specifications
All data in box will be deleted. Are you sure?
Are you sure?
Stop
Enter password.
Yes
Password
(Enter #-key)
********
If you selected “Yes”, the entire contents of the selected box
will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in
step 4.
If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen
in step 4 without deleting any documents.
Clear
Enter
007 Box Name ABCDEFG
• Refer to “7 Registering a password for a box” on page 6-18 for
information on registering the password.
6
4
No
Touch the “Delete all data / box” [“Delete all box data”] key. A
verification screen will be displayed.
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
Touch the “End” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
Inch specifications
End
Box editing
007
Up
JOB005
1
WED 15:32
JOB004
1
WED 15:33
JOB003
1
WED 15:34
JOB002
1
WED 15:35
JOB001
1
WED 15:37
Down
Order of
indication
Delete all
data / box
Conf/Crrt
details
Box
Password
Delete
001/005
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
Metric specifications
Box editing
End
007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK
Up
JOB005
1
WED 15:32
JOB004
1
WED 15:33
JOB003
1
WED 15:34
JOB002
1
WED 15:35
JOB001
1
WED 15:37
Down
Order of
indication
Delete all
box data
Check/ Rev.
details
Box
Password
Delete
001/005
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
6-17
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
7 Registering a password for a box
For security and privacy purposes, you can register a password for
each synergy print box. In this case, it will be necessary to enter the
registered password in order to print out, check or delete any
documents stored in that box. Perform the following procedure when
you want to change the password settings for any box.
3
Either touch the synergy print box that you want to set the
password for, or enter its number using the keypad. Then
touch the “Enter” key. The “Box editing” screen will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
Cancel
Box editing
Select box No.
1
Box No.
(with #key)
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document
Management” screen will be displayed.
011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105
003
IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102
004 MNOP_0000004 009
IJKL_0000103
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104
013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106
014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101
015
IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102
Enter
1/ 5
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
Metric specifications
Job cancel
Box editing
Select box No.
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006
011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104
Box No.
(with # key)
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105
003
IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102
004 MNOP_0000004 009
IJKL_0000103
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104
013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106
014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101
015
IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102
1/ 5
Enter
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
2
Touch the “Box Editing” key under “Synergy Print Box”. The
screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Select function.
25/10/'01 19:20
End
Document Management
Shared Data Box
Synergy Print Box
NOTE
If that box was registered with a password, the password entry screen
will be displayed.
Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the
“Enter” key.
Form box
Inch specifications
Document
reg.
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Document
reg.
Document
printing
Box
Editing
Form
reg.
Stop
Enter password.
Box
Editing
Password
Metric specifications
(Enter by #key)
********
Clear
Select function.
End
Document Management
Shared Data Box
Document
registr.
Box
Editing
Synergy Print Box
Document
printing
Enter
25/10/'01 19:20
Document
registr.
Box
Editing
Form box
Document
printing
Form
registr.
007
Metric specifications
Stop
Enter password.
Box
Editing
Password
(Enter #-key)
********
Clear
Enter
007 Box Name ABCDEFG
6-18
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
4
Touch the “Box Password” key. A verification screen will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
End
Box editing
007
Up
JOB005
1
WED 15:32
JOB004
1
WED 15:33
JOB003
1
WED 15:34
JOB002
1
WED 15:35
JOB001
1
WED 15:37
Down
Order of
indication
Delete all
data / box
Conf/Crrt
details
Box
Password
Delete
001/005
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
Metric specifications
Box editing
End
007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK
Up
JOB005
1
WED 15:32
JOB004
1
WED 15:33
JOB003
1
WED 15:34
JOB002
1
WED 15:35
JOB001
1
WED 15:37
Order of
indication
Delete all
box data
Check/ Rev.
details
Box
Password
Down
Delete
001/005
Document Management - Synergy Print Box
5
Use the keypad to enter the new password for that box and
then touch the “Enter” key. The new password will be
registered and the touch panel will return to the screen in
step 4.
Inch specifications
Stop
Box Password
Enter password.
(Enter by #key)
New password
Clear
Enter
007
Metric specifications
Stop
Box Password
Enter password
New password
(Enter #-key)
********
Clear
Enter
007 Box Name ABCDEFG
NOTES
• The password can be between 1 and 8 digits long.
• If you decide not to register a password for that box, touch the
“Clear” key and then, with nothing entered in the password field,
touch the “Enter” key.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
6-19
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
2. Output management functions
(1) What are the “output management” functions?
The “Output management” functions use the “Print status” screen to manage printing conditions.
Objective
Procedure
When you want to know how many jobs are
scheduled to be printed before yours.
You can verify the documents that are waiting to be printed by checking the “Print status” screen.
The jobs in the list are printed in order from the top down, so you can easily see in which order
your documents will be printed.
* The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation.
When you want to know whether or not your
job (scheduled using the job reservation
function) was printed.
Check the “Print status” screen. If your job IS in the “Print status” screen, that job has not yet
been printed.
* The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation.
When you are using the printer functions of
this copier to print out data from a computer,
or using the fax functions of this copier to
receive fax data, and you want know the
status of your print job.
With the “output management functions”, jobs using the printer functions of this copier to print out
data from a computer or using the fax functions of this copier to receive fax data are displayed
just like any other copy job. These print jobs can be verified just like copy jobs by checking the
“Print status” screen. (A “ ” icon under the “Job” heading indicates a copy job, a “ ” icon
” icon indicates a fax job.)
indicates a print job, and a “
When you want to check the contents of a
copy job that is waiting to be printed.
The number of originals, number of copies to be made, the date the job was scheduled, and the
status of printing can all be verified in the “Print status” screen. In addition, if you need even more
detailed information on any particular job, just select that job and touch the “Conf/Crrt. details”
[“Check/ Correct details”] key to display the e size of the paper the job will be output to and, if it
has been designated, the location of ejection of the finished copies.
* The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation.
When you want to force-print a copy job that
is waiting to be printed immediately.
Select the job that you want to print immediately in the “Print status” screen and touch the “Move
ahead” [“Move up”] key to move that job upwards to the top of the list.
* It is only possible to change the printing order for copy jobs. It is not possible to move copy jobs
ahead of print and fax jobs.
* The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation.
OR, select the job that you want to print immediately in the “Print status” screen and touch the
“Interrupt print” key to stop the job that is currently being printed and start print out for the
selected job.
* The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to force-print a copy job.
When you want to cancel a copy job that is
waiting to be printed.
6-20
Select the job that you want to cancel in the “Print status” screen and touch the “Cancel/Delete”
key. The selected job will be canceled.
* The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation.
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
The following operations can be managed.
● When the optional Hard Disk is NOT installed
Check print
status
Change the
print order
Interrupt
printing
(force-print)
Cancel / Delete
Check job
contents
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
Cancel / Delete
Check job
contents
✕
✕
Copy job
✕
Print or Fax job
● When the optional Hard Disk IS installed
Check print
status
Change the
print order
*1
Copy job
Print or Fax job
Interrupt
printing
(force-print)
✕
*1 Print or fax jobs will automatically be moved to a position immediately after the job currently being printed. It is not possible to move copy jobs
ahead of print and fax jobs.
(2) Display of the output management functions
Press the [Job Queue] key. The “Print status” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Print management
End
Input source
Job
Original
Set
Registration
State
123
Copy
100
100
10/10 23:00
Printing
124
Printer
___
___
___
Waiting
127
Fax
___
___
___
Waiting
128
Copy
1
5
Move
behind
Move
ahead
interrupt
print
10/10 23:00
Cancel/
Delete
Waiting
Conf/Crrt.
details
10/10 23:50
Prt status
Metric specifications
Print management
Job
End
Input source
Original
Set
Registration
State
123
Copy
100
100
10/10 23:00
Printing
124
Printer
___
___
___
Waiting
127
Fax
___
___
___
Waiting
128
Copy
1
5
Move
up
Prnt status
Move
down
interrupt
print
10/10 23:00
Cancel /
Delete
Waiting
Check/ Rev.
details
10/10 23:50
6-21
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
(3) The “Print status” screen
This screen displays the currently set printing conditions and the job queue of documents waiting to be printed.
Inch specifications
Metric specifications
1
8
Print management
Job
1
End
Input source
Original
Set
Registration
8
Print management
Job
State
Original
Set
Registration
State
Copy
100
100
10/10 23:00
Printing
123
Copy
100
100
10/10 23:00
Printing
124
Printer
___
___
___
Waiting
124
Printer
___
___
___
Waiting
127
Fax
___
___
___
Waiting
127
Fax
___
___
___
Waiting
128
Copy
1
5
10/10 23:00
Waiting
128
Copy
1
5
Move
behind
interrupt
print
Cancel/
Delete
Move
up
Conf/Crrt.
details
3
4
5
6
1 Job queue
Displays information about each job in the queue.
The job at the top of the list is that job that is currently being
printed. The rest of the jobs will be printed in order from the top
down.
A “ ” icon under the “Job” heading indicates a copy job, a “ ”
” icon indicates a fax job.
icon indicates a print job, and a “
2 “Move ahead” key
Touching this key moves the currently selected (highlighted) job
upward in the job queue. A job can be moved as far as the second
highest position in the list. In this case, print out for that job will
begin as soon as the current job is completed. (This is only
available when the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier.)
3 “Move behind” [“Move down”] key
Touching this key moves the currently selected (highlighted) job
downward in the job queue. (This is only available when the
optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier.)
4 “Interrupt print” key
Touching this key interrupts the job that is currently being printed
and start print out for the currently selected (highlighted) job. (The
selected job will be moved to the top of the list.)
5 “Cancel/Delete” key
Touching this key cancels the currently selected (highlighted) job
and deletes it from the job queue. (This is only available when the
optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier.)
Move
down
interrupt
print
10/10 23:00
Cancel /
Delete
Waiting
Check/ Rev.
details
Prnt status
10/10 23:50
Prt status
2
7
End
Input source
123
Move
ahead
2
7
10/10 23:50
3
4
5
6
6 “Conf/Crrt.details” [“Check/Rev. details”] key
Touching this key displays the “Check/Correct details” [“Check/
revise details”] screen, enabling you, for example, to check the
contents of, or change the number of copies to be made for, the
currently selected (highlighted) job. (This is only available when
the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier.)
Inch specifications
Close
Check/Correct details
Item
Orig. page
Set
Print size
Input source
Registration date
Details
1
1
11x81/2"
Copy
11/01 15:31
Change
Preset
Job 5
Metric specifications
Close
Check/revise details
Item
Original
Set
Print size
Input source
Registration date
Details
1
1
A4
Copy
11/01 15:31
Change
Preset
Job 5
7 “M” and “N” cursor keys
Use these keys to select a job from the job queue.
8 “End” key
Touching this key quits the output management function. In this
case, the touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
6-22
Section 7
COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
1. Copy management mode
By registering a different department ID-code for each individual department that uses the copier, the copy management function will help you
manage the overall number of copies made by each department.
The copy management function in this copier offers the following features.
• Manage use of all optional functions (printer, scanner and fax) utilized by the same department ID-code.
• Manage up to 100 individual departments. (Up to 1000 when the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier.)
• Register department ID-codes of up to 8 digits (between 0 and 99999999).
• Check the total number of copies made under all department ID-codes as a whole or by each individual department.
• Set copy limits to any 1-page increment up to 999,999.
• Clear the copy counts for all department ID-codes at one time or for each individual department.
• Check copy counts for your own department without the need to enter the management code. Just enter the corresponding department ID-code.
IMPORTANT!
In order to access the “Change restrictions for use” procedure under “Editing copy management information”, it is necessary to select “On” under
“Copier function management ON/OFF”. When the optional Printer Kit, Printer/Scanner Kit or Fax Kit are installed in your copier, it is necessary to
select “On” under the corresponding “Printer function management ON/OFF”, “Scanner function management ON/OFF” or “Fax function
management ON/OFF” procedure. (See “(6) Changing the copy management default settings” on page 7-25.)
7-1
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
(1) Copy management procedures
Procedure
Description
Reference
page
• Register new department ID-codes
Perform this procedure when you want to register a new department ID-code and set the
restrictions for using the copier under that ID-code. Up to 100 department ID-codes can
be registered. (When the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier, up to 1000
department ID-codes can be registered.)
7-4
• Delete department ID-codes
Perform this procedure when you want to delete registered department ID-codes.
7-16
• Change registered information
Perform this procedure when you want to change a department name or the
corresponding ID-code.
7-17
• Change restrictions for use
Perform this procedure when you want to change the restrictions for using the copier
under each department ID-code.
7-20
• Check all departments
Perform this procedure when you want to check the total number of copies made under
all department ID-codes as a whole, print out a copy management report and clear the
copy counts for all of the registered department ID-codes.
7-21
• Check individual departments
Perform this procedure when you want to check the total number of copies made under
each individual department ID-code and/or clear the copy counts for individual
departments as well.
7-23
Turning the copy management
function ON/OFF
Perform this procedure and touch the “On” key when you want to turn the copy
management function ON, or touch the “Off” key to turn the copy management function
OFF.
7-25
Changing the copy management
default settings
Perform this procedure when you want to change the default settings for the copy
management function.
7-25
Editing copy management
information
Checking the copy management
counts
7-2
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
3
(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen
Perform the following procedure in order to access the copy
management menu screen.
1
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the
[Default Setting/Counter] key.
The “Default setting”screen will be displayed.
Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the 4-digit
management code.
The factory default management code for 30 cpm copiers is
“3000”, for 40 cpm copiers is “4000” and for 50 cpm copiers
is “5000”.
If the entered management code matches the currently
registered one, the copy management menu screen will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
Close
Enter the administrator number
Metric specifications
Close
Enter the administrator number
2
Touch the “Management” key on the right side of the touch
panel.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
4
Touch the key that corresponds to the desired procedure.
The setting screen for that procedure will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Close
Management
Metric specifications
Managem. Total
Management
Register/Sett.
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Copy
default
Machine
default
Management
total
End
Document
Management
Each Mgt.
Total
Management
edit
Management
Def. Set.
Off
On
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Default setting
Metric specifications
Close
Management
Managem. Total
Management
total
Register/Sett.
Each Mgt.
Total
Management
edit
Management
Management
Def. Set.
Off
On
Default setting
NOTES
• It is possible for you to change the 4-digit management code. (See
“Changing the management code” on page 7-56.)
• Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired
setting.
7-3
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
3
(3) Editing copy management information
Inch specifications
● Register new department ID-codes
Close
Management edit
Perform the following procedure when you want to register
department ID-codes (up to 8-digits per ID-code) and the
corresponding department name, and set certain restrictions for using
the copier under that ID-code.
1
Touch the “Register” key.
The “New register” screen will be displayed.
Department
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Access the copy management menu screen.
(See “Accessing the copy management menu screen”.)
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Order of
indication
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Limit
in use
Delete
Down
Register
001/010
Default setting - Management
Inch specifications
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Management edit
Default setting
End
Department
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Order of
indication
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Limit
in use
Delete
Down
001/010
Register
Default setting - Management
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
4
Select “ID-code” under the “Setting item” column on the left
side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “ID-code” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Cancel
New register
Setting item
ID-code
Name to display
2
Value
(No register)
(No register)
Touch the “Management edit” key.
The “Management edit” screen will be displayed.
Change #
Next
Inch specifications
Default setting - Management - Management edit
Close
Management
Managem. Total
Management
total
Management
Register/Sett.
Each Mgt.
Total
Management
edit
Management
Def. Set.
Metric specifications
Job cancel
New register
Setting item
ID-code
Name to display
Off
Value
(No register)
(No register)
On
Default setting
Change #
Next
Metric specifications
Default setting - Management - Management edit
Close
Management
Managem. Total
Management
total
Register/Sett.
Each Mgt.
Total
Management
edit
Management
Management
Def. Set.
Off
On
Default setting
7-4
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
5
Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the department
ID-code that you want to register (up to 8 digits).
You can enter any number between “0” and “99999999”.
8
Inch specifications
Enter the name for that department, and then touch the
“End” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4.
Inch specifications
Back
ID-code
Close
Stop
Name to display
End
Limit:32 letters including #
1st Sales Dept.
AllDel.
Del. prev
(0~99999999)
1
ID-code
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
-
=
`
0007
q
Clear
w
a
e
s
z
x
Metric specifications
t
y
f
c
Capital
Management - Management edit - New register
r
d
g
v
Letter
u
h
b
i
j
n
o
k
p
l
m
,
Num./Sym.
[
;
.
]
\
'
/
Space
Metric specifications
Back
ID-code
Close
Stop
Name to display
End
Limit: 32 letters inc. # key
1st Sales Dept.
AllDel.
Del. prev
(0~99999999)
1
ID-code
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
-
=
`
0007
q
Clear
w
a
x
t
y
f
c
g
v
Letter
u
h
b
i
j
n
Symbol 1
o
k
m
Symbol 2
p
l
,
[
;
.
]
\
`
'
/
Space
NOTE
6
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4.
7
Select “Name to display” under the “Setting item” column on
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
The “Name to display” screen will be displayed.
For information on how to enter the department name, refer to
“11. Entering characters” on page 7-104.
9
Inch specifications
Cancel
New register
r
d
Capital
Management - Management edit - New register
Setting item
e
s
z
ID-code
Name to display
4
Once you are finished registering that department's ID-code
and name, touch the “Next” key.
Inch specifications
Value
Cancel
New register
0007
(No register)
Setting item
ID-code
Name to display
Change #
Value
0007
1st Sales Dept.
Next
Change #
Default setting - Management - Management edit
Next
Default setting - Management - Management edit
Metric specifications
Job cancel
New register
Metric specifications
Setting item
ID-code
Name to display
Value
0007
(No register)
Job cancel
New register
Setting item
Change #
ID-code
Name to display
Next
Value
0007
1st Sales Dept.
Default setting - Management - Management edit
Change #
Next
Default setting - Management - Management edit
NOTES
• Be sure to register both of the setting items above, If you do not, an
error will occur and you will be unable to continue to the next step.
• If you attempt to register a department ID-code or a department
name that is already registered, an error will occur and you will be
unable to continue to the next step. In this case, select a different IDcode and/or name, as appropriate.
7-5
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
10
12
Set the restrictions for using the copier under that
department ID-code.
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Cancel
New register
0007
Close
Management edit
1st Sales Dept.
Department
Setting item
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Output limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Value
On
No limit
No limit
No limit
No limit
01
02
0001
0007
0014
00000015
00000016
Change #
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
1st Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
Registr.
Job cancel
Close
Department
Value
On
No limit
No limit
No limit
No limit
01
02
0001
0007
0014
00000015
00000016
Change #
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
1st Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
Registr.
Order of
indication
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Limit
in use
Delete
Down
001/011
Default setting - Management - Management edit
Register
Default setting - Management
NOTE
NOTE
For information on how to set restrictions, refer to “Setting the
restrictions for use” on page 7-7.
If you want to register an ID-code for a new department, touch the
“Register” key and repeat steps 4 through 12.
13
Once you are finished setting the restrictions for that
department ID-code, touch the “Registr.” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.
Inch specifications
Cancel
New register
0007
1st Sales Dept.
Setting item
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Output limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
Value
On
No limit
No limit
No limit
No limit
Change #
Registr.
Default setting - Management - Management edit
Metric specifications
Job cancel
New register
0007
1st Sales Dept.
Setting item
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Output limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
Value
On
No limit
No limit
No limit
No limit
Change #
Registr.
Default setting - Management - Management edit
7-6
Register
Management edit
1st Sales Dept.
Setting item
11
Delete
Down
Metric specifications
New register
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Output limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
Limit
in use
Default setting - Management
Metric specifications
0007
Mgt. Inf.
correction
001/011
Default setting - Management - Management edit
Order of
indication
Touch the “Close” key.
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Setting the restrictions for use
Perform the following procedure when you want to set certain restrictions for using the copier under each department ID-code.
The setting items available for restriction will differ depending upon whether you have selected “All” or “Each” as the “Copy/Printer output
management” setting. (See “Copy/Printer output management” on page 7-30.)
The following settings are available.
If “All” is selected as the “Copy/Printer output management” setting (“All” is the factory default setting)
Copier
Copying privileges ON/OFF
Scanning
Fax
transmission
●
Printing privileges ON/OFF
Output limitation
Printer
m
Reference
page
7-8
●
7-9
m
7-10
Scanning restrictions
7-11
Fax transmission restrictions
7-12
: The available settings are “No limit”, “Counter limit” and “Is not permitted”
m: The available settings are “No limit” and “Counter limit”
●: The available settings are “Can use” and “Is not permitted”
If “Each” is selected as the “Copy/Printer output management” setting
Copier
Printer
Scanning
Fax
transmission
Reference
page
Copying restrictions
7-13
Printing restrictions
7-14
Scanning restrictions
7-11
Fax transmission restrictions
7-12
: The available settings are “No limit”, “Counter limit” and “Is not permitted”
7-7
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
Copying privileges ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copying
privileges ON or OFF for the corresponding department ID-code.
3
To allow copying privileges for this ID-code, touch the “Can
use” key. To cancel copying privileges completely, touch the
“Is not permitted” key.
Inch specifications
NOTE
Copy limitation
Back
Close
Back
Close
This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the “Copier
function management ON/OFF” setting.
Can use
Is not
permitted
1
Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting
items. (See “Register new department ID-codes” on page 7-4
or “Change restrictions for use” on page 7-20.)
Management - Management edit - New register
Metric specifications
Inch specifications
Copy limitation
Close
Management edit
Department
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Order of
indication
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Can use
Is not
permited
Limit
in use
Delete
Down
Management - Management edit - New register
Register
001/010
Default setting - Management
NOTE
Metric specifications
Close
Management edit
Department
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Order of
indication
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Limit
in use
Delete
4
Down
001/010
Register
Default setting - Management
2
Select “Copy limitation” under the “Setting item” column on
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
The “Copy limitation” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Close
Limit in use
1st Sales Dept.
0007
Setting item
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Output limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
Value
On
On
No limit
No limit
No limit
Change #
Default setting - Management - Management edit
Metric specifications
Close
Limit in use
0007
1st Sales Dept.
Setting item
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Output limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
Value
On
On
No limit
No limit
No limit
Default setting - Management - Management edit
7-8
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Change #
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
Printing privileges ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure when the optional Printer Kit or
Printer/Scanner Kit is installed in your copier and you want to turn
printing privileges ON or OFF for the corresponding department IDcode.
3
To allow printing privileges for this ID-code, touch the “Can
use” key. To cancel printing privileges completely, touch the
“Is not permitted” key.
Inch specifications
Printer limitation
Back
Close
Back
Close
NOTE
This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the “Printer
function management ON/OFF” setting.
Can use
Is not
permitted
Management - Management edit - New register
1
Metric specifications
Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting
items.
(See “Register new department ID-codes” on page 7-4 or
“Change restrictions for use” on page 7-20.)
Printer limitation
Inch specifications
Can use
Department
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Is not
permited
Close
Management edit
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Order of
indication
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Management - Management edit - New register
Limit
in use
Delete
Down
NOTE
Register
001/010
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Default setting - Management
Metric specifications
Close
Management edit
Department
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Order of
indication
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Limit
in use
4
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Delete
Down
001/010
Register
Default setting - Management
2
Select “Printer limitation” under the “Setting item” column on
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
The “Printer limitation” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Close
Limit in use
1st Sales Dept.
0007
Setting item
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Output limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
Value
On
On
No limit
No limit
No limit
Change #
Default setting - Management - Management edit
Metric specifications
Close
Limit in use
0007
1st Sales Dept.
Setting item
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Output limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
Value
On
On
No limit
No limit
No limit
Change #
Default setting - Management - Management edit
7-9
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
Output limitation
Perform the following procedure when you want to set the maximum
number of copies and printouts that can be made under the
corresponding department ID-code. If the optional Printer Kit or
Printer/Scanner Kit is installed in your copier, this limit will apply to the
number of copies AND printouts that can be made in total.
2
Select “Output limitation” under the “Setting item” column on
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
The “Output limitation” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Close
Limit in use
1st Sales Dept.
0007
NOTE
Setting item
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Output limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
This setting will not be available when “Is not permitted” is selected for
both the “Copying privileges ON/OFF” and the “Printing privileges ON/
OFF” settings, or when “Is not permitted” is selected as the “Copying
privileges ON/OFF” setting and the optional Printer Kit or Printer/
Scanner Kit is NOT installed in your copier.
Value
On
On
No limit
No limit
No limit
Change #
Default setting - Management - Management edit
Metric specifications
Close
Limit in use
0007
1
Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting
items.
(See “Register new department ID-codes” on page 7-4 or
“Change restrictions for use” on page 7-20.)
Setting item
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Output limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
Inch specifications
Value
On
On
No limit
No limit
No limit
Change #
Default setting - Management - Management edit
Close
Management edit
Department
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
1st Sales Dept.
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Order of
indication
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Limit
in use
3
Delete
Down
Register
001/010
Default setting - Management
To set the maximum limit for copying and printing under this
ID-code, touch the “Counter limit” key and proceed to the
next step.
To allow unlimited copying and printing, touch the “No limit”
key and then proceed to step 5.
Inch specifications
Metric specifications
Output limitation
Department
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Back
Close
Back
Close
Close
Management edit
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Order of
indication
Mgt. Inf.
correction
No limit
Limit
in use
Counter
limit
Delete
Down
001/010
Register
Management - Management edit - New register
Default setting - Management
Metric specifications
Output limitation
No limit
Counter
limit
Management - Management edit - New register
NOTE
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
7-10
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
4
Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum
number of copies and printouts that can be made in total
under this ID-code. The limit can be set to any 1-page
increment up to 999,999.
Inch specifications
Back
Output limitation
Scanning restrictions
Perform the following procedure when you want to set the maximum
number of originals that can be scanned under the corresponding
department ID-code when the optional Printer/Scanner Kit is installed
in your copier.
Close
NOTE
(1~999,999)
Limited value
This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the
“Scanner function management ON/OFF” setting.
999,999
No limit
Clear
Counter
limit
Management - Management edit - New register
1
Metric specifications
Back
Output limitation
Close
(1~999,999)
Limited value
Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting
items.
(See “Register new department ID-codes” on page 7-4 or
“Change restrictions for use” on page 7-20.)
Inch specifications
999,999
No limit
Counter
limit
Close
Management edit
Clear
Department
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Management - Management edit - New register
5
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Order of
indication
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Limit
in use
Delete
Down
Register
001/010
Default setting - Management
Metric specifications
Close
Management edit
Department
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Order of
indication
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Limit
in use
Delete
Down
001/010
Register
Default setting - Management
2
Select “Scanner limitation” under the “Setting item” column
on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the
“Change #” key.
The “Scanner limitation” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Close
Limit in use
1st Sales Dept.
0007
Setting item
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Output limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
Value
On
On
No limit
No limit
No limit
Change #
Default setting - Management - Management edit
Metric specifications
Close
Limit in use
0007
1st Sales Dept.
Setting item
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Output limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
Value
On
On
No limit
No limit
No limit
Change #
Default setting - Management - Management edit
7-11
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
3
To set the maximum number of originals that can be scanned
under this ID-code, touch the “Counter limit” key and proceed
to the next step.
To allow unlimited scanning, touch the “No limit” key, and to
cancel scanning privileges completely, touch the “Is not
permitted” key and proceed to step 5.
Inch specifications
Fax transmission restrictions
Perform the following procedure when you want to set the maximum
number of documents that can be transmitted under the
corresponding department ID-code when the optional Fax Kit is
installed in your copier.
NOTE
Back
Scanner limitation
Close
This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the “Fax
function management ON/OFF” setting.
No limit
Counter
limit
Is not
permitted
1
Management - Management edit - New register
Metric specifications
Back
Scanner limitation
Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting
items.
(See “Register new department ID-codes” on page 7-4 or
“Change restrictions for use” on page 7-20.)
Inch specifications
Close
Close
Management edit
Department
No limit
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Counter
limit
Is not
permited
Management - Management edit - New register
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Order of
indication
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Limit
in use
Delete
Down
Register
001/010
Default setting - Management
NOTE
Metric specifications
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Close
Management edit
Department
4
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum
number of originals that can be scanned under this ID-code.
The scanning limit can be set to any 1-page increment up to
999,999.
Inch specifications
Back
Scanner limitation
Close
(1~999,999)
Limited value
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Delete
Down
001/010
Register
Default setting - Management
2
Select “Fax transm. Limitation” under the “Setting item”
column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the
“Change #” key.
The “Fax transm. Limitation” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Clear
Counter
limit
Is not
permitted
Close
Limit in use
1st Sales Dept.
0007
Management - Management edit - New register
Setting item
Metric specifications
Back
Scanner limitation
Value
On
On
No limit
No limit
No limit
Change #
999,999
No limit
Counter
limit
Close
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Output limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
Default setting - Management - Management edit
(1~999,999)
Limited value
Clear
Is not
permited
Management - Management edit - New register
Metric specifications
Close
Limit in use
0007
1st Sales Dept.
Setting item
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Output limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
Value
On
On
No limit
No limit
No limit
Default setting - Management - Management edit
7-12
Limit
in use
999,999
No limit
5
Order of
indication
Change #
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
3
To set the maximum number of documents that can be
transmitted under this ID-code, touch the “Counter limit” key
and proceed to the next step.
To allow unlimited fax transmission, touch the “No limit” key,
and to cancel fax transmission privileges completely, touch
the “Is not permitted” key and proceed to step 5.
Copying restrictions
Perform the following procedure when you want to set the maximum
number of copies that can be made under the corresponding
department ID-code.
NOTES
Inch specifications
Back
Fax Transm. Limitation
Close
• This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the
“Copier function management ON/OFF” setting.
No limit
Counter
limit
1
Is not
permitted
Management - Management edit - New register
Metric specifications
Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting
items.
(See “Register new department ID-codes” on page 7-4 or
“Change restrictions for use” on page 7-20.)
Inch specifications
Back
Fax Transm. Limitation
Close
Close
Management edit
Department
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
No limit
Counter
limit
Is not
permited
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Limit
in use
Delete
Down
Register
001/010
Management - Management edit - New register
Order of
indication
Default setting - Management
Metric specifications
NOTE
4
Department
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum
number of documents that can be transmitted under this IDcode. The document limit can be set to any 1-page increment
up to 999,999.
Back
Fax Transm. Limitation
Close
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Order of
indication
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Limit
in use
Delete
Down
001/010
Register
Default setting - Management
2
Inch specifications
Close
Management edit
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Select “Copy limitation” under the “Setting item” column on
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change
#” key.
The “Copy limitation” screen will be displayed.
(1~999,999)
Limited value
Inch specifications
999,999
No limit
Clear
Counter
limit
Close
Limit in use
Is not
permitted
1st Sales Dept.
0007
Setting item
Management - Management edit - New register
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
Metric specifications
Value
No limit
No limit
No limit
No limit
Change #
Back
Fax Transm. Limitation
Close
Default setting - Management - Management edit
(1~999,999)
Limited value
999,999
Metric specifications
No limit
Counter
limit
Clear
Is not
permited
Close
Limit in use
0007
1st Sales Dept.
Setting item
Management - Management edit - New register
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
Value
No limit
No limit
No limit
No limit
Change #
5
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Default setting - Management - Management edit
7-13
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
3
To set the maximum number of copies that can be made
under this ID-code, touch the “Counter limit” key and proceed
to the next step.
To allow unlimited copies, touch the “No limit” key, and to
cancel copying privileges completely, touch the “Is not
permitted” key and proceed to step 5.
Inch specifications
Printing restrictions
Perform the following procedure when the optional Printer Kit or
Printer/Scanner Kit is installed in your copier and you want to set the
maximum number of printouts that can be made under the
corresponding department ID-code.
NOTE
Back
Copy limitation
Close
This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the “Printer
function management ON/OFF” setting.
No limit
Counter
limit
Is not
permitted
1
Management - Management edit - New register
Metric specifications
Back
Copy limitation
Close
Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting
items.
(See “Register new department ID-codes” on page 7-4 or
“Change restrictions for use” on page 7-20.)
Inch specifications
Close
Management edit
Department
No limit
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Counter
limit
Is not
permited
Management - Management edit - New register
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Order of
indication
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Limit
in use
Delete
Down
Register
001/010
Default setting - Management
NOTE
Metric specifications
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Close
Management edit
Department
4
Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum
number of copies that can be made under this ID-code. The
copy limit can be set to any 1-page increment up to 999,999.
Inch specifications
Copy limitation
Back
Close
Back
Close
(1~999,999)
Limited value
999,999
No limit
Clear
Counter
limit
Is not
permitted
Management - Management edit - New register
Metric specifications
Copy limitation
(1~999,999)
Limited value
999,999
No limit
Counter
limit
Clear
Is not
permited
Management - Management edit - New register
5
7-14
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Delete
Down
001/010
Default setting - Management
Order of
indication
Register
Limit
in use
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
2
Select “Printer limitation” under the “Setting item” column on
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change
#” key.
The “Printer limitation” screen will be displayed.
4
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Close
Limit in use
Printer limitation
Back
Close
Back
Close
1st Sales Dept.
0007
Setting item
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
Value
(1~999,999)
No limit
No limit
No limit
No limit
Limited value
999,999
No limit
Clear
Counter
limit
Change #
Is not
permitted
Default setting - Management - Management edit
Management - Management edit - New register
Metric specifications
Metric specifications
Printer limitation
Close
Limit in use
1st Sales Dept.
0007
Setting item
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
(1~999,999)
Value
No limit
No limit
No limit
No limit
Limited value
999,999
No limit
Counter
limit
Change #
Clear
Is not
permited
Management - Management edit - New register
Default setting - Management - Management edit
3
Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum
number of printouts that can be made under this ID-code.
The printing limit can be set to any 1-page increment up to
999,999.
To set the maximum number of printouts that can be made
under this ID-code, touch the “Counter limit” key and proceed
to the next step.
To allow unlimited printing, touch the “No limit” key, and to
cancel printing privileges completely, touch the “Is not
permitted” key and proceed to step 5.
5
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Inch specifications
Printer limitation
Back
Close
Back
Close
No limit
Counter
limit
Is not
permitted
Management - Management edit - New register
Metric specifications
Printer limitation
No limit
Counter
limit
Is not
permited
Management - Management edit - New register
NOTE
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
7-15
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Delete department ID-codes
Perform the following procedure when you want to delete registered
department ID-codes.
1
3
Select the department ID-code that you want to delete, and
then touch the “Delete” key.
Inch specifications
Access the copy management menu screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen” on
page 7-3.)
Close
Management edit
Department
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Delete
Register
Machine
default
Default setting - Management
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Metric specifications
Close
Management edit
Department
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Machine
default
2
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Delete
Down
Inch specifications
Close
Management
Management
total
Register/Sett.
Each Mgt.
Total
Management
edit
Management
Management
Def. Set.
Off
On
Default setting
Metric specifications
Close
Management
Managem. Total
Management
total
Management
Register/Sett.
Each Mgt.
Total
Management
edit
Management
Def. Set.
Off
On
Default setting
7-16
Register
NOTE
It is possible for you to change the order of how the list of ID-codes is
displayed.
To so, touch the “Order of indication” key and then touch the “Sort by
code” key (and select either “1 / 9” or “9 / 1”) or the “Sort by Name”
key (and select either “A / Z” or “Z / A”), as appropriate.
Touch the “Management edit” key.
The “Management edit” screen will be displayed.
Managem. Total
Limit
in use
Default setting - Management
End
Copy
default
Order of
indication
Mgt. Inf.
correction
001/010
Default setting
Limit
in use
Down
001/010
Default setting
Order of
indication
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
4
Verify that this is the ID-code that you want to delete, and
touch the “Yes” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.
Inch specifications
Stop
● Change registered information
Perform the following procedure when you want to change a
previously registered department name or the corresponding ID-code.
1
Access the copy management menu screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen” on
page 7-3.)
Inch specifications
ID-code: 0007
Name to display: 1st Sales Dept.
Default setting / Counter
Are you sure you want to delete this ID-code?
Yes
Default setting
No
End
Copy
default
Metric specifications
Machine
default
Stop
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Metric specifications
ID-code: 0007
Name to display: 1st Sales Dept.
Default setting / Counter
Are you sure you want to delete this ID-code?
Yes
No
Default setting
End
Copy
default
NOTE
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
If you want to delete another ID-code, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
2
Touch the “Management edit” key.
The “Management edit” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Close
Management
Managem. Total
Management
total
Register/Sett.
Each Mgt.
Total
Management
edit
Management
Management
Def. Set.
Off
On
Default setting
Metric specifications
Close
Management
Managem. Total
Management
total
Management
Register/Sett.
Each Mgt.
Total
Management
edit
Management
Def. Set.
Off
On
Default setting
7-17
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
3
Select the department ID-code for which you want to change
the registered information, and then touch the “Mgt. Inf.
Correction” key.
The “Department inform. edit” [“Department info. Editing”]
screen will be displayed.
5
Inch specifications
ID-code
Inch specifications
Close
Management edit
Department
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Touch the “Clear” key to delete the old ID-code. Use the
numeric keys on the keypad to enter the new ID-code (up to
8 digits).
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Close
Back
Close
(0~99999999)
ID-code
Order of
indication
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Back
0007
Clear
Limit
in use
Delete
Management - Management edit
Down
Register
001/010
Metric specifications
Default setting - Management
ID-code
Metric specifications
Close
Management edit
Department
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
(0~99999999)
ID-code
Order of
indication
Mgt. Inf.
correction
0007
Clear
Limit
in use
Delete
Management - Management edit
Down
001/010
Register
Default setting - Management
To change the registered ID-code, proceed to the next step.
To change the registered department name, proceed to step
7.
6
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4. Proceed
to step 10.
Inch specifications
NOTE
ID-code
It is possible for you to change the order of how the list of ID-codes is
displayed.
To so, touch the “Order of indication” key and then touch the “Sort by
code” key (and select either “1 / 9” or “9 / 1”) or the “Sort by Name”
key (and select either “A / Z” or “Z / A”), as appropriate.
Back
Close
Back
Close
(0~99999999)
ID-code
0007
Clear
Management - Management edit
Metric specifications
4
Select “ID-code” under the “Setting item” column on the left
side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “ID-code” screen will be displayed.
ID-code
(0~99999999)
ID-code
Inch specifications
0007
Clear
Back
Department inform. edit
Setting item
ID-code
Name to display
Close
Management - Management edit
Value
0007
1st Sales Dept.
Change #
Default setting - Management - Management edit
Metric specifications
Back
Department info. Editing
Setting item
ID-code
Name to display
Value
0007
1st Sales Dept.
Change #
Default setting - Management - Management edit
7-18
Close
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
7
Select “Name to display” under the “Setting item” column on
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
The “Name to display” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Back
Department inform. edit
Setting item
Touch the “End” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 7.
10
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.
11
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
12
Touch the “Close” key.
Close
Value
ID-code
Name to display
9
0007
1st Sales Dept.
Change #
Default setting - Management - Management edit
Metric specifications
Back
Department info. Editing
Setting item
Close
Value
ID-code
Name to display
0007
1st Sales Dept.
Change #
Default setting - Management - Management edit
8
Touch the “AllDel.” key to delete the old department name,
then enter the new name.
Inch specifications
Stop
Name to display
End
Limit:32 letters including #
1st Sales Dept.
AllDel.
1
2
q
3
w
a
4
e
s
z
5
r
d
x
t
7
y
f
c
Capital
6
g
v
Letter
u
h
b
Del. prev
8
9
i
j
n
0
o
k
p
l
m
,
Num./Sym.
-
=
[
;
.
`
]
\
'
/
Space
Metric specifications
Stop
Name to display
End
Limit: 32 letters inc. # key
1st Sales Dept.
AllDel.
1
2
q
3
w
a
e
s
z
Capital
4
r
d
x
5
t
f
c
Letter
6
y
g
v
7
u
h
b
Symbol 1
9
i
j
n
Del. prev
8
0
o
k
m
Symbol 2
p
l
,
[
;
.
=
`
]
\
`
'
/
Space
NOTE
For information on how to enter the department name, refer to
“11. Entering characters” on page 7-104.
7-19
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Change restrictions for use
Perform the following procedure when you want to change the
restrictions for using the copier under each department ID-code.
3
Select the department ID-code for which you want to change
the restrictions, and then touch the “Limit in use” key.
The “Limit in use” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
IMPORTANT!
Close
Management edit
In order to access the “Change restrictions for use” procedure under
“Editing copy management information”, it is necessary to select “On”
under “Copier function management ON/OFF”. When the optional
Printer Kit, Printer/Scanner Kit or Fax Kit are installed in your copier, it
is necessary to select “On” under the corresponding “Printer function
management ON/OFF”, “Scanner function management ON/OFF” or
“Fax function management ON/OFF” procedure. (See “(6) Changing
the copy management default settings” on page 7-25.)
Department
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Order of
indication
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Limit
in use
Delete
Down
Register
001/010
Default setting - Management
Metric specifications
Close
Management edit
Department
1
01
02
0001
0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Access the copy management menu screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen” on
page 7-3.)
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Limit
in use
Delete
Down
001/010
Inch specifications
Order of
indication
Register
Default setting - Management
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
NOTE
It is possible for you to change the order of how the list of ID-codes is
displayed.
To so, touch the “Order of indication” key and then touch the “Sort by
code” key (and select either “1 / 9” or “9 / 1”) or the “Sort by Name”
key (and select either “A / Z” or “Z / A”), as appropriate.
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
4
Change the restrictions for using the copier under that
department ID-code as desired.
Inch specifications
Close
Limit in use
1st Sales Dept.
0007
Setting item
2
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Output limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
Touch the “Management edit” key.
The “Management edit” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Metric specifications
Close
Close
Limit in use
Management
Register/Sett.
0007
1st Sales Dept.
Setting item
Management
total
Each Mgt.
Total
Change #
Default setting - Management - Management edit
Management
Managem. Total
Value
On
On
No limit
No limit
No limit
Management
edit
Management
Def. Set.
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Output limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
Off
On
Default setting
Value
On
On
No limit
No limit
No limit
Change #
Default setting - Management - Management edit
Metric specifications
Close
Management
NOTE
Managem. Total
Management
total
Management
Register/Sett.
Each Mgt.
Total
Management
edit
Management
Def. Set.
For information on how to change restrictions, refer to “Setting the
restrictions for use” on page 7-7.
Off
On
Default setting
7-20
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
5
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.
(4) Checking the copy management counts
Inch specifications
● Check all departments
Close
Limit in use
1st Sales Dept.
0007
Setting item
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Output limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
Value
On
On
No limit
No limit
No limit
Change #
Perform the following procedure when you want to check the total
number of copies made under all department ID-codes as a whole,
print out a copy management report and clear the copy counts for all
of the registered department ID-codes.
1
Default setting - Management - Management edit
Metric specifications
Inch specifications
Close
Limit in use
0007
Access the copy management menu screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen” on
page 7-3.)
Default setting / Counter
1st Sales Dept.
Setting item
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
Output limitation
Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
Value
On
On
No limit
No limit
No limit
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Change #
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Default setting - Management - Management edit
Metric specifications
6
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
7
End
Copy
default
Touch the “Close” key.
Machine
default
2
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Touch the “Management total” key.
The “Management total” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Close
Management
Managem. Total
Management
total
Management
Register/Sett.
Each Mgt.
Total
Management
edit
Management
Def. Set.
Off
On
Default setting
Metric specifications
Close
Management
Managem. Total
Management
total
Management
Register/Sett.
Each Mgt.
Total
Management
edit
Management
Def. Set.
Off
On
Default setting
7-21
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
3
The total number of copies made under all department IDcodes as a whole will be displayed. If you want to print out a
copy management report, touch the “Print report” key.
5
When the confirmation message appears, touch the “Yes”
key.
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Stop
Close
Management Total
Number print.
Copy
Black & White:
Printer
100
300
Fax
Total
50
450
The counted number for this ID-code will be deleted
Are you sure?
Scan.Transm.
Counter
clear
Fax Transm.
Scanner
Scan # pages:
Fax
100
Trsm. # pages:
Commun.Time:
Yes
100
1Hrs 10Mins
No
Print
report
Default setting - Management
Metric specifications
Metric specifications
Stop
Close
Management Total
Number print.
Copy
Black & White:
Printer
100
300
Fax
Total
50
450
The counted number for this ID-code will be deleted
Are you sure?
Scan.Transm.
Counter
clear
Fax transm.
Scanner
Scan # pages:
Fax
100
Trsm. # pages:
Commun.Time:
Yes
100
1Hrs 10Mins
No
Print
report
Default setting - Management
NOTES
• The type of report printed out will vary according the setting selected
for “Copy/Printer output management” under the copy management
default settings.
• If any of the “Total size 1” through “Total size 5” settings is selected
under the copy management default settings, the total size report
will also be printed out.
4
To clear all of the copy counts, touch the “Counter clear” key.
Inch specifications
Close
Management Total
Number print.
Copy
Black & White:
Printer
100
300
Scan.Transm.
Fax
Total
50
450
Counter
clear
Fax Transm.
Scanner
Scan # pages:
Fax
100
Trsm. # pages:
Commun.Time:
100
1Hrs 10Mins
Print
report
Default setting - Management
Metric specifications
Close
Management Total
Number print.
Black & White:
Copy
Printer
100
300
Scan.Transm.
Fax
50
450
Counter
clear
Fax transm.
Scanner
Scan # pages:
Default setting - Management
7-22
Total
Fax
100
Trsm. # pages:
Commun.Time:
100
1Hrs 10Mins
Print
report
6
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
7
Touch the “Close” key.
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Check individual departments
Perform the following procedure when you want to check the total
number of copies made under each individual department ID-code
and/or clear the copy counts for individual departments as well.
3
Select the department ID-code for which you want to check
the copy counts, and then touch the “Total” key.
Inch specifications
Close
Each Management Total
1
Access the copy management menu screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen” on
page 7-3.)
Department
! 01
02
0001
! 0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Inch specifications
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Metric specifications
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Department
! 01
02
0001
! 0014
00000015
00000016
00000017
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Order of
indication
Total
Down
001/010
Default setting / Counter
Default setting - Management
End
Default setting
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Touch the “Each Mgt. Total” key.
The “Each Management Total” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Close
Management
Managem. Total
Management
total
Close
Each Management Total
Metric specifications
2
Down
Default setting - Management
Default setting
Machine
default
Total
001/010
Default setting / Counter
Machine
default
Up
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Order of
indication
Management
Register/Sett.
Each Mgt.
Total
Management
edit
Management
Def. Set.
Off
On
NOTES
• The “---ETC” displayed in the list indicates the number of printouts
that were made without entering an ID-code.
· The printouts included under “---ETC” are as follows:
· Report print out
· Printer error report print out
· Print out from a computer for which an ID-code is not set (When
the “Non-standard printer driver printout (Printer)” is set to “ON”
under the copy management default settings.)
· Fax reception print out
· Fax report print out
• It is possible for you to change the order of how the list of ID-codes
is displayed. To so, touch the “Order of indication” key and then
touch the “Sort by code” key (and select either “1 / 9” or “9 / 1”)
or the “Sort by Name” key (and select either “A / Z” or “Z / A”), as
appropriate.
Default setting
Metric specifications
Close
Management
Managem. Total
Management
total
Register/Sett.
Each Mgt.
Total
Management
edit
Management
Management
Def. Set.
Off
On
Default setting
7-23
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
4
The total number of copies made under that department IDcode will be displayed.
6
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Copy
Black & White:
Stop
Close
Each Management Total
Number print.
Printer
50
Total
30
Scan.Transm.
80
Fax
100
Trsm. # pages:
Commun.Time:
Default setting - Management
Number in( )
is limit value
Counter
clear
Fax Transm.
Scanner
Scan # pages:
The count value of this ID-code will be deleted
Are you sure?
100
1Hrs 10Mins
0007
Yes
Metric specifications
Close
Each Management Total
Copy
Black & White:
Printer
50
Total
30
Scan.Transm.
80
Fax
100
Trsm. # pages:
Commun.Time:
Stop
Number in( )
is limit value
Counter
clear
Fax transm.
Scanner
Scan # pages:
The count value of this ID-code will be deleted
Are you sure?
100
1Hrs 10Mins
Yes
Default setting - Management
0007
On the “Each Management Total” screen, the number in the brackets
following the number of copies made indicates the maximum number
of copies that can be made.
To clear all of the copy counts for that ID-code, touch the
“Counter clear” key.
Inch specifications
Close
Each Management Total
Number print.
Copy
Black & White:
Printer
50
Total
30
Scan.Transm.
80
Fax
100
Trsm. # pages:
Commun.Time:
Default setting - Management
Number in( )
is limit value
Counter
clear
Fax Transm.
Scanner
Scan # pages:
100
1Hrs 10Mins
0007
1st Sales Dept.
Metric specifications
Close
Each Management Total
Number print.
Copy
Black & White:
Printer
50
Total
30
Scan.Transm.
80
Default setting - Management
7-24
Fax
100
Trsm. # pages:
Commun.Time:
Number in( )
is limit value
Counter
clear
Fax transm.
Scanner
Scan # pages:
100
1Hrs 10Mins
0007
No
1st Sales Dept.
NOTE
5
No
1st Sales Dept.
Metric specifications
Number print.
When the confirmation message appears, touch the “Yes”
key.
1st Sales Dept.
7
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.
8
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
9
Touch the “Close” key.
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
(5) Turning the copy management function ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy
management ON or OFF.
1
Access the copy management menu screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen” on
page 7-3.)
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
(6) Changing the copy management default settings
Perform the following procedure when you want to change the default
settings for the copy management function.
The following default settings are available.
• Copier function management ON/OFF (Page 7-26.)
• Printer function management ON/OFF (Page 7-27.)
• Printer error report (Page 7-28.)
• Non-standard printer driver printout (Printer) (Page 7-29.)
• Copy/Printer output management (Page 7-30.)
• Scanner function management ON/OFF (Page 7-31.)
• Fax function management ON/OFF (Page 7-32.)
• Response to exceeded restriction (Page 7-33.)
• Default copy limit (Page 7-34.)
• Total count for specified paper size (1 to 5) (Page 7-35)
● Accessing the copy management default settings
1
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Access the copy management menu screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen” on
page 7-3.)
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
2
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
To turn copy management ON, touch the “On” key. To turn
copy management OFF, touch the “Off” key.
Metric specifications
Inch specifications
Close
Management
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Managem. Total
End
Management
Register/Sett.
Copy
default
Management
total
Each Mgt.
Total
Management
edit
Management
Def. Set.
Off
Machine
default
On
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Default setting
Metric specifications
Close
Management
Managem. Total
Management
total
Management
Register/Sett.
Each Mgt.
Total
Management
edit
Management
Def. Set.
Off
On
Default setting
3
Touch the “Close” key.
7-25
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
2
● Copier function management ON/OFF
Touch the “Management Def. Set.” key.
The “Managem. Def. Set.” screen will be displayed.
Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy
management ON or OFF for the copier functions of this machine.
Inch specifications
Close
Management
Managem. Total
Management
total
Register/Sett.
Management
edit
Each Mgt.
Total
1
Management
Management
Def. Set.
Select “Copy management” under the “Setting item” column
on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the
“Change #” key.
The “Copy management” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Off
On
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
Default setting
Setting item
Metric specifications
Close
Management
Managem. Total
Value
Copy management
Print. Managem.
Printer error report
Others Mgt. Reg. (print)
Copy/Printer output mgt.
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
On
On
On
On
All
On
On
Change #
Management
Register/Sett.
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Management
total
Management
edit
Each Mgt.
Total
Management
Def. Set.
Metric specifications
Off
On
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
Default setting
Setting item
3
Select the default setting that you want to change and then
touch the “Change #” key.
Inch specifications
On
On
On
On
All
On
On
Change #
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
Setting item
Copy management
Print. Managem.
Printer error report
Others Mgt. Reg. (print)
Copy/Printer output mgt.
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
Value
Copy management
Print. managem.
Printer error report
Others mgt. Reg. (print)
Copy/Printer output mgt.
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
Value
On
On
On
On
All
On
On
2
To turn copy management ON for the copier functions of this
machine, touch the “On” key.
Inch specifications
Change #
Copy management
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Back
Close
Back
Close
Copy management can be set up.
Metric specifications
Off
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
On
Setting item
Copy management
Print. managem.
Printer error report
Others mgt. Reg. (print)
Copy/Printer output mgt.
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
Value
On
On
On
On
All
On
On
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Metric specifications
Change #
Copy management
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Copy management can be set up.
NOTE
Off
On
Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired
setting.
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
NOTE
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
3
7-26
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Printer function management ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy
management ON or OFF for the printer functions of this machine.
2
To turn copy management ON for the printer functions of this
machine, touch the “On” key.
Inch specifications
Print. Managem.
NOTE
Back
Close
Back
Close
Printer management can be set up.
This setting is only available when the optional Printer Kit or Printer/
Scanner Kit is installed in your copier.
Off
On
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
1
Select “Print. Managem.” under the “Setting item” column on
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
The “Print. Managem.” screen will be displayed.
Metric specifications
Print. managem.
Printer management can be set up.
Inch specifications
Off
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
On
Setting item
Copy management
Print. Managem.
Printer error report
Others Mgt. Reg. (print)
Copy/Printer output mgt.
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
Value
On
On
On
On
All
On
On
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Change #
NOTE
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Metric specifications
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
Setting item
Copy management
Print. managem.
Printer error report
Others mgt. Reg. (print)
Copy/Printer output mgt.
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
Value
On
On
On
On
All
On
On
3
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Change #
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
7-27
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Printer error report
Perform the following procedure if you want an error report printed
anytime “On” is selected as the “Printer function management ON/
OFF” setting and printing is attempted with an invalid department IDcode.
2
To have a printer error report printed out, touch the “On” key.
If you do not want the printer error report printed out, touch
the “Off” key.
Inch specifications
Printer error report
Back
Close
Back
Close
Error report is output. at the time of Mgt. code mismatch.
NOTE
This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the “Printer
function management ON/OFF” setting.
Off
On
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
1
Metric specifications
Select “Printer error report” under the “Setting item” column
on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the
“Change #” key.
The “Printer error report” screen will be displayed.
Printer error report
Error report is output. at the time of Mgt. code mismatch.
Inch specifications
Off
Setting item
Copy management
Print. Managem.
Printer error report
Others Mgt. Reg. (print)
Copy/Printer output mgt.
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
On
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
Value
On
On
On
On
All
On
On
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Change #
NOTE
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Metric specifications
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
Setting item
Copy management
Print. managem.
Printer error report
Others mgt. Reg. (print)
Copy/Printer output mgt.
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
3
Value
On
On
On
On
All
On
On
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Change #
NOTE
If anyone attempts to print using an invalid department ID-code, an
error will occur under the printing functions and printout will not be
possible. When the [Printer] key is touched, “Department ID-code
mismatch.” will be displayed. Touch the “GO” key to print out an error
report.
Inch specifications
Department code mismatch.
Off line
Cancel
GO
Cancel
GO
Metric specifications
Department code mismatch.
Off line
7-28
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Non-standard printer driver printout (Printer)
Perform the following procedure when “On” is selected as the “Printer
function management ON/OFF” setting and you want to want to allow
the use of printer drivers other than those available under copy
management.
2
To allow the use of printer drivers other than those available
under copy management, touch the “On” key.
Inch specifications
Others Mgt. Reg. (print)
Back
Close
Back
Close
Output. of print. is possible for unspecif. ID-code
NOTE
Off
This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the “Printer
function management ON/OFF” setting.
On
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Metric specifications
1
Select “Others Mgt. Reg. (print)” under the “Setting item”
column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the
“Change #” key.
The “Others Mgt. Reg. (print)” screen will be displayed.
Others mgt. Reg. (print)
Output. of print. is possible for unspecif. ID-code
Off
Inch specifications
On
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Setting item
Copy management
Print. Managem.
Printer error report
Others Mgt. Reg. (print)
Copy/Printer output mgt.
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
Value
On
On
On
On
All
On
On
NOTE
Change #
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Metric specifications
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
Setting item
Copy management
Print. managem.
Printer error report
Others mgt. Reg. (print)
Copy/Printer output mgt.
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
3
Value
On
On
On
On
All
On
On
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Change #
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
7-29
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Copy/Printer output management
Perform the following procedure to determine whether management of
copier and printer functions will be handled together or separately.
2
To have copier and printer functions both handled together,
touch the “All” key. To have copier and printer functions each
handled separately, touch the “Each” key.
Inch specifications
NOTE
Copy/Printer output mgt.
Back
Close
Back
Close
Copy/Printer output management method setting.
If this setting is changed, it will affect which setting items are available
for restriction under the copy management function. (See “Setting the
restrictions for use” on page 7-7.)
All
Each
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
1
Select “Copy/Printer output mgt.” under the “Setting item”
column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the
“Change #” key.
The “Copy/Printer output mgt.” screen will be displayed.
Metric specifications
Copy/Printer output mgt.
Copy/Printer output management method setting.
Inch specifications
All
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
Each
Setting item
Copy management
Print. Managem.
Printer error report
Others Mgt. Reg. (print)
Copy/Printer output mgt.
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
Value
On
On
On
On
All
On
On
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Change #
NOTE
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Metric specifications
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
Setting item
Copy management
Print. managem.
Printer error report
Others mgt. Reg. (print)
Copy/Printer output mgt.
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
Value
On
On
On
On
All
On
On
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
7-30
3
Change #
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Scanner function management ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy
management ON or OFF for the scanner functions of this machine.
2
To turn copy management ON for the scanner functions of
this machine, touch the “On” key.
Inch specifications
Scanner Managem.
NOTE
Back
Close
Back
Close
Scanner management can be set up.
This setting is only available when the optional Printer/Scanner Kit is
installed in your copier.
Off
On
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
1
Select “Scanner Managem.” under the “Setting item” column
on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the
“Change #” key.
The “Scanner Managem.” screen will be displayed.
Metric specifications
Scanner Managem.
Scanner management can be set up.
Inch specifications
Off
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
On
Setting item
Copy management
Print. Managem.
Printer error report
Others Mgt. Reg. (print)
Copy/Printer output mgt.
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
Value
On
On
On
On
All
On
On
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Change #
NOTE
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Metric specifications
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
Setting item
Copy management
Print. managem.
Printer error report
Others mgt. Reg. (print)
Copy/Printer output mgt.
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
Value
On
On
On
On
All
On
On
3
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Change #
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
7-31
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Fax function management ON/OFF
2
Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy
management ON or OFF for the fax functions of this machine.
To turn copy management ON for the fax functions of this
machine, touch the “On” key.
Inch specifications
Fax Management
NOTE
Back
Close
Back
Close
Fax management can be set up.
This setting is only available when the optional Fax Kit is installed in
your copier.
Off
On
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
1
Select “Fax Management” under the “Setting item” column on
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
The “Fax Management” screen will be displayed.
Metric specifications
Fax Management
Fax management can be set up.
Inch specifications
Off
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
On
Setting item
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
Excess of limit Setting
Def. Val. of coun. limit
Total size 1
Total size 2
Total size 3
Value
On
On
Unable to use
999999
81/2x11" No specif.
81/2x11" No specif.
81/2x11" No specif.
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Change #
NOTE
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Metric specifications
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
Setting item
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
Excess of limit Setting
Def. Val. of coun. limit
Total size 1
Total size 2
Total size 3
Value
On
On
You cannot use
999999
A3 No specif.
B4 No specif.
A4 No specif.
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
7-32
3
Change #
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Response to exceeded restriction
Perform the following procedure to determine whether further use of
the machine by the corresponding department will be discontinued
immediately (starting with the current job) or with the next job, or if
only an error message will be generated when a department ID-code
has exceeded its set limit.
2
To discontinue further use of the machine immediately
(starting with the current job) when a department ID-code
has exceeded its set limit, touch the “Stop job immediatly”
key. To cancel further use of the machine starting from the
next job, touch the “Stop after job done” key. To have an error
message generated, touch the “Only warning” key.
Inch specifications
NOTE
Excess of limit Setting
Back
Close
Back
Close
Select proper setting when limit exceeded.
If the optional Printer/Scanner Kit or Fax Kit is installed on your copier,
even if you select here to have further use of the machine
discontinued immediately (starting with the current job), if a
department ID-code exceeds its set limit during scanning or during fax
transmission, the actual restriction will start from the next job.
Stop job
immediatly
Stop after
job done
Only
warning
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Metric specifications
1
Select “Excess of limit Setting” under the “Setting item”
column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the
“Change #” key.
The “Excess of limit Setting” screen will be displayed.
Excess of limit Setting
Select proper setting when limit exceeded.
Stop job
immediatly
Stop after
job done
Inch specifications
Only
warning
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Setting item
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
Excess of limit Setting
Def. Val. of coun. limit
Total size 1
Total size 2
Total size 3
Value
On
On
Unable to use
999999
81/2x11" No specif.
81/2x11" No specif.
81/2x11" No specif.
NOTE
Change #
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Metric specifications
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
Setting item
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
Excess of limit Setting
Def. Val. of coun. limit
Total size 1
Total size 2
Total size 3
3
Value
On
On
You cannot use
999999
A3 No specif.
B4 No specif.
A4 No specif.
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Change #
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
7-33
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Default copy limit
Perform the following procedure when you want to change the default
copy limit for new department ID-codes.
1
2
Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the default copy
limit. The limit can be set to any 1-page increment up to
999,999.
Inch specifications
Select “Def. Val. of coun. limit” under the “Setting item”
column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the
“Change #” key.
The “Def. Val. of coun. limit” screen will be displayed.
Def. Val. of coun. limit
Back
Close
Back
Close
Default value of counter limit can be set.
(1~999,999)
Limited value
Inch specifications
999,999
Clear
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
Setting item
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
Excess of limit Setting
Def. Val. of coun. limit
Total size 1
Total size 2
Total size 3
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Value
On
On
Unable to use
999999
81/2x11" No specif.
81/2x11" No specif.
81/2x11" No specif.
Metric specifications
Change #
Def. Val. of coun. Limit
Default value of counter limit can be set.
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
(1~999,999)
Limited value
999,999
Metric specifications
Clear
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Setting item
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
Excess of limit Setting
Def. Val. of coun. limit
Total size 1
Total size 2
Total size 3
Value
On
On
You cannot use
999999
A3 No specif.
B4 No specif.
A4 No specif.
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
NOTE
Change #
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
3
7-34
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Total count for specified paper size (1 to 5)
Perform the following procedure when you want to register a specific
paper size in order to calculate and check the copy counts for that
particular size of paper. It is also possible to register a paper size AND
type.
2
Touch the “On” key.
Inch specifications
Total size 1
Back
Close
Back
Close
Back
Close
Can set totals of paper size and type.
Off
NOTES
On
• You can register up to 5 different paper sizes for this function.
• If the type of paper is not registered in any of the settings, the
corresponding copy counts for that size of paper will be calculated
regardless of the type of paper that is used. However, if the same
size of paper is registered in another setting along with a paper type,
the counts for the first setting will NOT include copies made with the
type of paper that is registered in the second setting.
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Metric specifications
Total size 1
Can set totals of paper size and type.
Off
On
1
Select one of the “Total size 1” through “Total size 5” settings
under the “Setting item” column on the left side of the touch
panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The corresponding setting screen will be displayed.
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
3
Inch specifications
Touch the “Select size” key.
Inch specifications
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
Total size 1
Setting item
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
Excess of limit Setting
Def. Val. of coun. limit
Total size 1
Total size 2
Total size 3
Value
On
On
Unable to use
999999
81/2x11" No specif.
81/2x11" No specif.
81/2x11" No specif.
Can set totals of paper size and type.
Paper size
Paper type
1
8 /2x11"
Off
Change #
Select
size
With no
specif.
Select
paper type
On
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Metric specifications
Metric specifications
Close
Managem. Def. Set.
Back
Total size 1
Setting item
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
Excess of limit Setting
Def. Val. of coun. limit
Total size 1
Total size 2
Total size 3
Value
On
On
You cannot use
999999
A3 No specif.
B4 No specif.
A4 No specif.
Close
Can set totals of paper size and type.
Paper size
A4
Off
Change #
Paper type
Select
size
With no
specif.
Select
paper type
On
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
NOTE
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
7-35
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
4
Touch the key that corresponds to the desired paper size,
and then touch the “Close” key.
6
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Back
Select size
B4
A3
A4
B5
A5
Folio
Close
Labels
Cardstock
Thick
paper
Custom 1
Custom 5
8 /2x14"
Transparency
Recycled
Color
Envelope
Custom 2
Custom 6
81/2x11"
Rough
Preprinted
Prepunched
Custom 3
Custom 7
51/2x81/2"
Vellum
Bond
Letterhead
Custom 4
Custom 8
1
Metric specifications
Back
B4
A3
With no
specif.
11x17"
1
Labels
Cardstock
Thick
paper
Custom 1
Custom 5
Transparency
Recycled
Colour
Envelope
Custom 2
Custom 6
Custom 3
Custom 7
Custom 4
Custom 8
B5
8 /2x14"
Folio
81/2x11"
Rough
Preprinted
Prepunched
51/2x81/2"
Vellum
Bond
Letterhead
High
quality
Management - Managem. Def set. - Total size 1
To specify a paper type as well, touch the “Select paper type”
key and proceed to the next step. If you do not want to
specify a paper type, proceed to step 7.
7
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
NOTE
Inch specifications
Back
Total size 1
Close
Can set totals of paper size and type.
Paper size
Paper type
Select
size
With no
specif.
Select
paper type
On
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Metric specifications
Back
Total size 1
Close
Can set totals of paper size and type.
Paper size
Paper type
Select
size
On
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
7-36
Close
Plain
A5
Management - Managem. Def set. - Total size 1
Off
Back
Select paper type
Close
A4
Off
High
quality
Management - Managem. Def set. - Total size 1
Select size
81/2x11"
Close
Plain
With no
specif.
11x17"
Metric specifications
A4
Back
Select paper type
Management - Managem. Def set. - Total size 1
5
Touch the key that corresponds to the desired paper type,
and then touch the “Close” key.
With no
specif.
Select
paper type
You can check the copy counts for the paper sizes registered under
the “Total size 1” through “Total size 5” settings on the total size report
that is printed together with the copy management report. For
information on how to print out a copy management report, refer to
“Check all departments” on page 7-21.
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
(7) Making copies when copy management is turned
ON
When copy management is turned ON, copying will only be possible
when a valid department ID-code is entered.
IMPORTANT!
NOTES
• If you enter the wrong ID-code, touch the “clear” key and reenter the
correct ID-code.
• If an invalid (unregistered) department ID-code is entered, an error
alarm will sound. Enter the correct ID-code.
• If you enter your department ID-code and touch the “Each Mgt.
Total” key, you can check the copy counts for your own department.
Once you are finished copying, BE SURE to press the [Management]
key so that the “Enter ID-code” screen is displayed again.
Inch specifications
Close
Each Management Total
Number print.
Copy
Black & White:
Printer
50
Total
30
Scan.Transm.
80
Number in( )
is limit value
Fax Transm.
Scanner
Scan # pages:
Fax
100
Trsm. # pages:
Commun.Time:
100
1Hrs 10Mins
Default setting - Management
1st Sales Dept.
Metric specifications
Close
Each Management Total
Number print.
Copy
Black & White:
Printer
50
Total
30
Scan.Transm.
80
Fax transm.
Scanner
Scan # pages:
Fax
100
Trsm. # pages:
Commun.Time:
100
1Hrs 10Mins
Default setting - Management
1
Number in( )
is limit value
1st Sales Dept.
Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter your
department ID-code, and then touch the “Enter” key.
The “Basic” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
2
Perform the desired copy operation as usual.
3
Once you are finished copying, press the [Management] key.
Enter ID-code.
Each Mgt.
Total
****
Clear
Enter
Metric specifications
Enter ID-code.
Each Mgt.
Total
****
Clear
Enter
7-37
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
2. Default settings
The state that the copier enters at the end of warm-up or when the [Reset] key is pressed is called the “initial mode”. The modes, functions and other
settings that are automatically pre-set for the initial mode are called “default settings”. These default settings are separated into two categories:
“Copy defaults” and “Machine defaults” and can be changed as desired to suit your copying needs.
(1) Machine default settings
The following table indicates the machine default settings available in this copier. Change any or all of the settings as desired in order to make the
most effective use of your copier.
Default setting
Auto drawer[cassette]
switching ON/OFF
Paper size
(drawer[cassette] No.1 –
No.4)
Description
Factory
setting
If the paper in one drawer[cassette] runs out during
copying, the automatic drawer[cassette] switching
function will switch paper feed from the empty
drawer[cassette] to another drawer[cassette] that
contains the same size of paper in the same orientation
for uninterrupted copying. To enable this function, it is
necessary to turn the related setting “On”.
On / Off
On
In order to prevent a drawer[cassette] that holds a different
type of paper from being switched to when the automatic
drawer[cassette] switching function is turned ON, it is
necessary to select “Feed same paper type” as well.
All types of paper /
Feed same paper
type
All types of
paper
Sets the size of paper that is loaded in
drawers[cassettes] No.1 through No.4.
If you want the size to be detected automatically, select
“Auto Detection” (Automatic size detection). If you want
to manually set the size of paper, select “Standard
sizes”.
Auto Detection /
Standard sizes
Auto Detection
<If you select “Auto Detection”>
You can also select the desired unit of measurement:
“Inch” or “Centimeter”.
Inch
Centimeter
Inch
specification:
Inch
Metric
specification:
Centimeter
<If you select “Standard sizes”>
You can then select the paper size.
A3
A4
A4R
A5R
B4
B5
B5R
Folio
11 x 17
8 1/2 x 14
11 x 8 1/2
8 1/2 x 11
5 1/2 x 8 1/2
8 1/2 x 13
8K
16K
–––
* The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will only
be available when the optional Paper Feeder is
installed on your copier.
7-38
Available
settings
Reference
page
7-42
7-43
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
Default setting
Description
Paper type
(drawer[cassette] No.1 No. 4)
Sets and then displays the type of paper that is loaded in
drawers[cassettes] No.1 through No.4.
* The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will only
be available when the optional Paper Feeder is
installed on your copier.
Plain
Preprinted
Recycled
Letterhead
Color [Colour]
Prepunched
Rough
Bond
High quality
Vellum
Custom 1 –
Custom 8
Plain
7-44
Multi-bypass tray
settings display ON/OFF
Turn this setting ON if you want the “Bypass setting”
screen to be displayed whenever the “Bypass” key is
touched in the “Basic” tab.
On / Off
Off
7-45
Custom paper type for
2-sided copying
Sets whether or not each custom paper type (custom 1 –
custom 8) will be available for use in
2-sided copying.
On / Off
On
7-46
Adj. print Direction /
Speed Priority
Speed Priority
Special paper action
setting
Available
settings
When copying onto prepunched, preprinted or letterhead
paper, and performing both 1-sided copying and 2-sided
copying from the same drawer[cassette], the positioning
of the holes in relation to the copied image may be
different for each copy or the front and rear images of 2sided copies may be copied onto the opposites sides of
the paper. If you select “Adj. print Direction”, both 1-sided
and 2-sided copies will be created with the same
orientation.
Example: Set the paper as shown in the illustration
Factory
setting
Reference
page
7-46-1
Drawer[Cassette]
Setting
1-sided copying
2-sided copying
Adj. print
Direction
Speed
Priority
* When “Adj. print Direction” is selected, the speed of 1sided copying will be somewhat slower than normal.
* When making copies with “Adj. print Direction”
selected, set the paper as shown in illustration A and
with the first image being copied set face-down. (If the
optional Built-in Finisher is installed on your copier, set
the paper as shown in illustration B and with the first
image being copied set face-down.)
* If the optional Document Finisher or Built-in Finisher is
installed on your copier and you have selected either
the Staple mode or the Hole Punch mode, the direction
that the copy image is created in may not conform to
the desired position of the staples or holes.
7-39
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
Default setting
Description
Available
settings
Factory
setting
Reference
page
Auto sleep time
Sets the amount of time that will elapse before the auto
sleep function engages and turns the copier OFF (O) if
no operation is performed on the copier during that time.
* It is recommended that you try to set a longer time
interval before the auto sleep function engages if you
use the copier frequently, and to a shorter time if there
are long intervals between use.
* For more detailed information on the auto sleep
function, see page 4-11.
1, 5, 15, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 180, 240
(minutes)
60 (minutes)
7-47
Auto low power time
Sets the amount of time that will elapse before the Low
Power mode is automatically activated if no operation is
performed on the copier during that time.
* For more detailed information on the Low power mode,
see page 4-11.
1, 5, 15, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 180, 240
(minutes)
15 (minutes)
7-48
Copy eject location
Sets the location for the ejection of finished copies.
* This setting will only be displayed when the optional
Document Finisher, Built-in Finisher or Job Separator
is installed on your copier.
* The available location for ejection will differ depending
upon the optional equipment that is installed on your
copier.
Inner tray
Job separator
Finisher tray
Finisher main tray
Finisher sub tray
Inner tray
7-49
Fax eject location
Sets the location for the ejection of received faxes.
* This setting will only be displayed when the optional
Fax Kit and Document Finisher (or the Built-in Finisher
or Job Separator) are installed on your copier.
* The available location for ejection will differ depending
upon the optional equipment that is installed on your
copier.
Inner tray
Job separator
Finisher tray
Finisher main tray
Finisher sub tray
Mailbox 1
Inner tray
7-50
Default operation mode
Sets which operation mode, the copy operation mode or
the fax operation mode, will be selected when the power
is turned on to the copier.
Copy mode
FAX mode
Copy mode
7-51
7-40
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
Default setting
Description
Available
settings
Factory
setting
Reference
page
Touch panel sound ON/
OFF
Sets whether or not the touch panel will emit a “beep”
sound each time a key is touched.
On / Off
On
7-52
Silent mode ON/OFF
The copier can be switched to a silent mode, which
shortens the length of time that the laser data writing
motor continues to spin after each copy job is finished.
Turn the silent mode ON if the noise of the motor
bothers you in any way.
On / Off
Off
7-53
Day & time
Sets the current date and time.
Year: 2001-2049
Month: 1 – 12
Day: 1 – 31
Time: 00:00 – 23:59
Year: 2001
Month: 01
Day: 01
Time: 00:00
7-54
Time difference
Sets the time difference from the world standard time
(GMT).
+12:00 – -12:00
00:00
7-55
Changing the
management code
Changes the management code that is used by the copy
manager.
IMPORTANT:
If you change the management code from its factory
default, be sure to keep some sort of record of the new
management code. If, for any reason, you forget the
registered management code, you will need to contact
your service representative.
0000 – 9999
30 cpm copiers:
3000
40 cpm copiers:
4000
50 cpm copiers:
5000
7-56
Auto sleep ON/OFF
Sets whether or not to have the auto sleep function
automatically engage and turn the copier OFF (O) if no
operation is performed on the copier for a designated
amount of time.
* If auto sleep interferes with your copying operations,
turn this function OFF. However, it is recommended
that you try to set a longer time interval until auto sleep
engages before you actually turn it OFF.
* For more detailed information on turn the auto sleep
function, see page 4-11.
On / Off
On
7-57
Changing the energysaving mode
Changes the energy-saving mode that will be entered
into when the [Energy Saver] key is pressed.
(See “5. Energy-saving modes” on page 4-11 for more
information.)
* This setting is displayed when the optional Printer Kit
or Printer/Scanner Kit is installed.
If you are using a standard copier, or if the optional Fax
Kit is installed in your copier, you can press the
[Energy Saver] key to engage the Low power mode.
Low power mode
Sleep mode
Low power
mode
7-58
7-40-1
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
3
(2) Accessing the machine default settings
Perform the following procedure when you want to access the
screens for each of the various machine default settings.
Use the keypad to enter the 4-digit management code.
The factory default setting for 30 cpm copiers is “3000”, for
40 cpm copiers is “4000” and for 50 cpm copiers is “5000”.
Inch specifications
Close
Enter the administrator number
1
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the
[Default Setting/Counter] key.
The “Default setting”screen will be displayed.
Metric specifications
Close
Enter the administrator number
2
Touch the “Machine default” key on the left side of the touch
panel.
Inch specifications
4
If the entered code matched the registered one, the
“Machine default” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Language
Document
Management
Default menu
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Close
Machine default
Management
Auto drawer switching
Paper size (1st drawer)
Paper size (2nd drawer)
Paper size (3rd drawer)
Paper size (4th drawer)
Setting mode
On / All types of paper
Auto / Inch
Auto / Inch
Auto / Inch
Auto / Inch
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Auto cassette switching
Paper size (1st cassette)
Paper size (2nd cassette)
Paper size (3rd cassette)
Paper size (4th cassette)
Setting mode
On / All types of paper
Auto / Centimeter
Auto / Centimeter
Auto / Centimeter
Auto / Centimeter
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
NOTES
• It is possible for you to change the 4-digit management code.
(See “Changing the management code” on page 7-56.)
• Refer to the desired procedure(s) explained under “(3) Making
machine default settings” and perform the corresponding setting(s).
7-41
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
3
(3) Making machine default settings
Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired
setting.
Touch the “On” key to automatic drawer[cassette] switching
ON.
Inch specifications
Auto drawer switching
● Auto drawer[cassette] switching ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure to turn automatic drawer[cassette]
switching ON or OFF, as desired.
1
Display the “Machine default” screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on
page 7-41.)
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
On
4
Default setting
2
End
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Select “Auto drawer switching” [“Auto cassette switching”] in
the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then
touch the “Change #” key.The “Auto drawer switching” [“Auto
cassette switching”] screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
All types
of Paper
Feed same
paper type
In order to prevent a drawer[cassette] that holds a different
type of paper from being switched to when the automatic
drawer[cassette] switching function is turned ON, touch the
“Feed same paper type” key under “Paper type”.
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
6
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
7
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Close
Machine default
Auto drawer switching
Paper size (1st drawer)
Paper size (2nd drawer)
Paper size (3rd drawer)
Paper size (4th drawer)
Close
NOTE
Default setting / Counter
Default menu
Back
Default setting - Machine default
Default setting / Counter
Document
Management
Feed same
paper type
Off
Metric specifications
Machine
default
All types
of paper
Off
When paper cassette is empty, switch to another one,
set same size/direction paper, and continue copying.
Paper type
Function
End
Copy
default
Paper type
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Document
Management
Function
On
Auto cassette switching
Default setting
Machine
default
Close
Default setting - Machine default
Inch specifications
Copy
default
Back
When paper drawer is empty, switch to another one,
set same size/direction paper, and continue copying.
Setting mode
On / All types of paper
Auto / Inch
Auto / Inch
Auto / Inch
Auto / Inch
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Auto cassette switching
Paper size (1st cassette)
Paper size (2nd cassette)
Paper size (3rd cassette)
Paper size (4th cassette)
Setting mode
On / All types of paper
Auto / Centimeter
Auto / Centimeter
Auto / Centimeter
Auto / Centimeter
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
7-42
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Paper size (drawer[cassette] No.1 – No.4)
Perform the following procedure to set the size of paper that is loaded
in drawer[cassette] No.1 through No.4.
1
3
Display the “Machine default” screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on
page 7-41.)
If you select “Auto Detection” (automatic size detection) here,
select the desired unit of measure (“Centimeter” or “Inch”) as
well.
If you select “Standard sizes” (standard paper size) here,
simply touch the key that corresponds to the size of paper
that is loaded in that drawer[cassette].
Inch specifications
Paper type(1st drawer)
Inch specifications
Back
Close
Select paper size.
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Language
Document
Management
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
A3
B4
11x17"
51/2x81/2"
Auto
Detection
A4
B5
81/2x14"
81/2x13"
Standard
sizes
A4
B5
11x81/2"
8K
A5
Folio
81/2x11"
16K
Default setting - Machine default
Metric specifications
Metric specifications
End
Default setting
Machine
default
Document
Management
Close
Select paper size.
Default setting / Counter
Copy
default
Back
Paper size (1st cassette)
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
A3
B4
11x17"
51/2x81/2"
Auto
Detection
A4
B5
81/2x14"
81/2x13"
Standard
sizes
A4
B5
11x81/2"
8K
A5
Folio
81/2x11"
16K
Default setting - Machine default
NOTES
2
Select one of the “Paper size” settings
(“1st drawer[cassette]” through “4th drawer[cassette]”) in the
settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch
the “Change #” key.
The screen to set the paper size for that drawer[cassette] will
be displayed.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default menu
Setting mode
On / All types of paper
Auto / Inch
Auto / Inch
Auto / Inch
Auto / Inch
Up
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default setting
7-43
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Down
Metric specifications
Default menu
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
Change #
Default setting
Auto cassette switching
Paper size (1st cassette)
Paper size (2nd cassette)
Paper size (3rd cassette)
Paper size (4th cassette)
4
Close
Machine default
Auto drawer switching
Paper size (1st drawer)
Paper size (2nd drawer)
Paper size (3rd drawer)
Paper size (4th drawer)
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
• The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will only be available
when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier.
Setting mode
On / All types of paper
Auto / Centimeter
Auto / Centimeter
Auto / Centimeter
Auto / Centimeter
Up
Down
Change #
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Paper type (drawer[cassette] No.1 - No. 4)
Perform the following procedure to set the type of paper that is loaded
in drawers[cassettes] No.1 through No.4.
3
Touch the key that corresponds to the type of paper that is
loaded in that drawer[cassette].
Inch specifications
Paper type(1st drawer)
1
Display the “Machine default” screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on
page 7-41.)
Back
Close
Select and display paper type.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Plain
Color
High
quality
Custom 1
Custom 5
Preprinted
Prepunched
Vellum
Custom 2
Custom 6
Recycled
Rough
Custom 3
Custom 7
Letterhead
Bond
Custom 4
Custom 8
Default setting - Machine default
Default setting
End
Metric specifications
Copy
default
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Close
Back
Paper type (1st cassette)
Select and display paper type.
Machine
default
Document
Management
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
High
quality
Custom 1
Custom 5
Prepunched
Vellum
Custom 2
Custom 6
Recycled
Rough
Custom 3
Custom 7
Letterhead
Bond
Custom 4
Custom 8
End
Copy
default
2
Colour
Preprinted
Default setting - Machine default
Default setting
Machine
default
Plain
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
NOTES
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
• The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will only be available
when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier.
Select one of the “Paper type” settings
(“1st drawer[cassette]” through “4th drawer[cassette]”) in the
settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch
the “Change #” key.
The screen to set the paper type for that drawer[cassette] will
be displayed.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
Inch specifications
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Setting mode
Default menu
Paper type (1st drawer)
Paper type (2nd drawer)
Paper type (3rd drawer)
Paper type (4th drawer)
Check bypass sizing
Plain
Plain
Plain
Plain
Off
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Paper type (1st cassette)
Paper type (2nd cassette)
Paper type (3rd cassette)
Paper type (4th cassette)
Check bypass sizing
Setting mode
Plain
Plain
Plain
Plain
Off
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
7-44
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Multi-bypass tray settings display ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure to have the “Bypass setting” screen
appear whenever the “Bypass” key is pressed in the “Basic” tab.
3
Touch the “On” key if you want to have the “Bypass setting”
screen appear.
Inch specifications
Check bypass sizing
1
Display the “Machine default” screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on
page 7-41.)
Close
Back
Close
On
Off
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting - Machine default
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Back
Display and check bypass setting mode when selecting.
Select "On" when using custom size or changing paper type.
Document
Management
Metric specifications
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Check bypass sizing
Display and check bypass setting mode when selecting.
Select "On" when using custom size or changing paper type.
On
Off
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting - Machine default
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
2
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Select “Check bypass sizing” in the settings list on the left
side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Check bypass sizing” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Setting mode
Default menu
Plain
Plain
Plain
Plain
Off
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Paper type (1st cassette)
Paper type (2nd cassette)
Paper type (3rd cassette)
Paper type (4th cassette)
Check bypass sizing
Default setting
7-45
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting” screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Close
Machine default
Paper type (1st drawer)
Paper type (2nd drawer)
Paper type (3rd drawer)
Paper type (4th drawer)
Check bypass sizing
NOTE
Setting mode
Plain
Plain
Plain
Plain
Off
Up
Down
Change #
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Custom paper type for 2-sided copying
Perform the following procedure to set whether or not each custom
type of paper (custom 1 - custom 8) will be available for use in 2-sided
copying.
3
Select one of the “custom” paper type settings (“Custom 1”
through “Custom 8”) under the “Default menu” column on the
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
Inch specifications
1
Display the “Machine default” screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on
page 7-41.)
Select paper type(s) for duplex copy.
Default menu
Custom 1
Custom 2
Custom 3
Custom 4
Custom 5
Custom 6
Custom 7
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Setting mode
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Close
Select paper type(s) for duplex copy.
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Machine
default
Document
Management
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Setting mode
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting - Machine default
End
Language
Change #
Select paper type(2sided)
Default menu
Copy
default
Down
Metric specifications
Custom 1
Custom 2
Custom 3
Custom 4
Custom 5
Custom 6
Custom 7
Default setting
Up
Default setting - Machine default
End
Copy
default
Close
Select paper type(2sided)
4
Touch the “Off” key if you do NOT want that custom paper
type to be available for use in 2-sided copying.
Inch specifications
Custom 1
2
Select “Select paper type (2sided)” in the settings list on the
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
The “Select paper type (2sided)” screen will be displayed.
Close
Back
Close
On
Off
Inch specifications
Default setting - Machine default - Select paper type (2sided)
Default setting / Counter
Metric specifications
Close
Machine default
Custom 1
Setting mode
Default menu
Paper type (2nd drawer)
Paper type (3rd drawer)
Paper type (4th drawer)
Check bypass sizing
Select paper type (2sided)
Back
Up
Plain
Plain
Plain
Off
Down
On
Change #
Off
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting - Machine default - Select paper type (2sided)
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Paper type (2nd cassette)
Paper type (3rd cassette)
Paper type (4th cassette)
Check bypass sizing
Select paper type (2sided)
Setting mode
Up
Plain
Plain
Plain
Off
Down
NOTE
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.
Change #
Default setting
5
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 3.
6
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
7
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
“Default setting”screen.
8
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
7-46
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Special paper action setting
When copying onto prepunched, preprinted or letterhead paper, and
performing both 1-sided copying and 2-sided copying from the same
drawer[cassette], the positioning of the holes in relation to the copied
image may be different for each copy or the front and rear images of
2-sided copies may be copied onto the opposites sides of the paper. If
you select “Adj. print Direction”, both 1-sided and 2-sided copies will
be created with the same orientation.
1
3
Select “Adj. print Direction”.
Inch specifications
Special paper action mode
Back
Close
Back
Close
Possible to set action of the paper
(Prepunched, Preprinted, Letterhead)
Adj. print
Direction
Speed
Priority
Default setting - Machine default
Display the “Machine default” screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on
page 7-41.)
Metric specifications
Specif. paper action mode
Inch specifications
Possible to set action of the paper
(Prepunched, Preprinted, Letterhead)
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Copy
default
Machine
default
Adj. print
Direction
End
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Speed
Priority
Default setting - Machine default
NOTES
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
2
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Select “Special paper action mode” [“Specif. paper action
mode”] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel
and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Special paper action mode” [“Specif. paper action
mode”] screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Paper type (3rd drawer)
Paper type (4th drawer)
Check bypass sizing
Select paper type (2sided)
Special paper action mode
Setting mode
Up
Plain
Plain
Off
Down
Speed priority
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Paper type (3rd cassette)
Paper type (4th cassette)
Check bypass sizing
Select paper type (2sided)
Specif. paper action mode
Default setting
7-46-1
Setting mode
Up
Plain
Plain
Off
Speed priority
Down
Change #
• When “Adj. print Direction” is selected, the speed of 1-sided copying
will be somewhat slower than normal.
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting” screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Auto sleep time
Perform the following procedure to set the amount of time that will
elapse before the auto sleep function engages and turns the copier
OFF (O) if no operation has been performed on the copier during that
time.
3
Touch the “+” key or the “–” key to change the displayed time
to the desired setting (between 1 minutes and 240 minutes).
Inch specifications
Sleep mode changing time
Back
Close
Back
Close
Set Changing time to turn automatically into sleep mode
after last setting,or when copying is done.
1
Minute
Display the “Machine default” screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on
page 7-41.)
+
–
Inch specifications
Default setting - Machine default
Default setting / Counter
Metric specifications
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Sleep mode changing time
Set Changing time to turn automatically into sleep mode
after last setting,or when copying is done.
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Minute
Metric specifications
Default setting - Machine default
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
2
Document
Management
NOTES
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Select “Sleep mode changing time” in the settings list on the
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
The “Sleep mode changing time” screen will be displayed.
• The setting can be made to 1 minute, 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30
minutes, 45 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, 180
minutes or 240 minutes.
• It is recommended that you try to set a longer time interval before
the auto sleep function engages if you use the copier frequently, and
to a shorter time if there are long intervals between use.
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default menu
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Close
Machine default
Sleep mode changing time
Low power mode chng. time
Select Copy output mode
Select FAX output mode
Select the main mode
4
Setting mode
60 Minute
15 Minute
Inner tray
Inner tray
Copy mode
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Sleep mode changing time
Low power mode chng. time
Select COPY output mode
Select FAX output mode
Select main mode
Setting mode
60 Minute
15 Minute
Inner tray
Inner tray
COPY Mode
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
7-47
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Auto low power time
Perform the following procedure to set the amount of time that will
elapse before the auto low power function automatically engages and
puts the copier in the Low power mode if no operation has been
performed on the copier during that time.
3
Touch the “+” key or the “–” key to change the displayed time
to that desired (any available setting between 1 minute and
240 minutes).
Inch specifications
Low power mode chng. time
Back
Close
Back
Close
Set Changing time to turn autom. into low power mode
after last setting,or when copying is done.
1
Display the “Machine default” screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on
page 7-41.)
M i nu t e
+
–
Inch specifications
Default setting - Machine default
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Machine
default
Metric specifications
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Low power mode chng. time
Set Changing time to turn autom. into low power mode
after last setting,or when copying is done.
Minute
Metric specifications
Default setting - Machine default
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
2
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Select “Low power mode chng. time” in the settings list on the
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
The “Auto preheat time” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
NOTES
• The setting can be made to 1 minute, 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30
minutes, 45 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, 180
minutes or 240 minutes.
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Sleep mode changing time
Low power mode chng. time
Select Copy output mode
Select FAX output mode
Select the main mode
Setting mode
60 Minute
15 Minute
Inner tray
Inner tray
Copy mode
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Sleep mode changing time
Low power mode chng. time
Select COPY output mode
Select FAX output mode
Select main mode
Default setting
7-48
Setting mode
60 Minute
15 Minute
Inner tray
Inner tray
COPY Mode
Up
Down
Change #
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Copy eject location
Perform the following procedure to set where finished copies will be
ejected.
3
Touch the key that corresponds to the desired location.
Inch specifications
Select Copy output mode
Back
Close
Back
Close
Set the default copy output destination
NOTE
Job
separator
This setting will only be displayed when the optional Document
Finisher, Built-in Finisher or Job Separator is installed on your copier.
Inner tray
Finisher
main tray
Finisher
sub tray
Default setting - Machine default
1
Metric specifications
Display the “Machine default” screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on
page 7-41.)
Select COPY output mode
Set the default copy output destination.
Inch specifications
Job
separator
Inner tray
Default setting / Counter
Finisher
main tray
Default setting
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Default setting - Machine default
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
2
NOTES
• The available location for ejection will differ depending upon the
optional equipment that is installed on your copier.
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Metric specifications
Machine
default
Finisher
sub tray
End
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Select “Select Copy output mode” in the settings list on the
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
The “Select Copy output mode” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Sleep mode changing time
Low power mode chng. time
Select Copy output mode
Select FAX output mode
Select the main mode
Setting mode
60 Minute
15 Minute
Inner tray
Inner tray
Copy mode
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Sleep mode changing time
Low power mode chng. time
Select COPY output mode
Select FAX output mode
Select main mode
Setting mode
60 Minute
15 Minute
Inner tray
Inner tray
COPY Mode
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
7-49
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Fax eject location
Perform the following procedure to set where incoming faxes will be
ejected.
3
Touch the key that corresponds to the desired location.
Inch specifications
Select FAX output mode
Back
Close
Back
Close
Set the default fax output destination
NOTE
Job
separator
This setting will only be displayed when the optional Fax Kit and
Document Finisher (or the Built-in Finisher or Job Separator) are
installed on your copier.
MailBox 1
Inner tray
Finisher
sub tray
Default setting - Machine default
Metric specifications
1
Display the “Machine default” screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on
page 7-41.)
Select FAX output mode
Set the default fax output destination.
Job
separator
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Finisher
sub tray
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Select “Select FAX output mode” in the settings list on the left
side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Select FAX output mode” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Sleep mode changing time
Low power mode chng. time
Select Copy output mode
Select FAX output mode
Select the main mode
Setting mode
60 Minute
15 Minute
Inner tray
Inner tray
Copy mode
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Sleep mode changing time
Low power mode chng. time
Select COPY output mode
Select FAX output mode
Select main mode
Default setting
7-50
NOTES
End
Copy
default
2
Default setting - Machine default
• The available location for ejection will differ depending upon the
optional equipment that is installed on your copier.
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Metric specifications
Machine
default
Mailbox 1
Inner tray
Setting mode
60 Minute
15 Minute
Inner tray
Inner tray
COPY Mode
Up
Down
Change #
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Default operation mode
Perform the following procedure to set whether the display that
appears after power is turned on to the copier will be the one for the
copy operation mode or for the fax operation mode.
3
Select the "Copy mode" key or the "FAX mode" key, as
appropriate.
Inch specifications
Select the main mode
Back
Close
Back
Close
Select the default display panel mode
when the power is on.
NOTE
This setting is only available when the optional Fax Kit is installed in
your copier.
Copy mode
FAX mode
Default setting - Machine default
1
Metric specifications
Display the “Machine default” screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on
page 7-41.)
Select main mode
Select the default display panel mode
when the power is on.
Inch specifications
COPY Mode
Default setting / Counter
FAX mode
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Default setting - Machine default
NOTE
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
2
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Select “Select the main mode” [“Select main mode”] in the
settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch
the “Change #” key.
The “Select the main mode” [“Select main mode”] screen will
be displayed.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Sleep mode changing time
Low power mode chng. time
Select Copy output mode
Select FAX output mode
Select the main mode
Setting mode
60 Minute
15 Minute
Inner tray
Inner tray
Copy mode
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Sleep mode changing time
Low power mode chng. time
Select COPY output mode
Select FAX output mode
Select main mode
Setting mode
60 Minute
15 Minute
Inner tray
Inner tray
COPY Mode
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
7-51
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Touch panel sound ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure to set whether or not the touch panel
will emit a “beep” sound each time a key is touched. Select “Off” if you
want to turn the sound OFF.
3
Touch the “On” key or the “Off” key to turn the sound on the
touch panel ON or OFF, as desired.
Inch specifications
Key sound ON/OFF
Back
Close
Back
Close
Select panel key sound mode off/on.
1
Display the “Machine default” screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on
page 7-41.)
On
Off
Inch specifications
Default setting - Machine default
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Machine
default
Metric specifications
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Key sound ON/OFF
Select panel key sound mode off/on.
On
Off
Metric specifications
Default setting - Machine default
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
2
Document
Management
NOTE
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Select “Key sound ON/OFF” in the settings list on the left
side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Key sound ON/OFF” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting” screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Key sound ON/OFF
Silent mode
Date/Time
Time difference
Management code change
Setting mode
On
On
2001/10/30 14:02
GMT+08:00
5000
Up
Down
Change #
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Key sound ON/OFF
Silent mode
Date/Time
Time difference
Change MGMT code with #
Default setting
7-52
Setting mode
On
Off
30/10/'01 14:02
GMT+08:00
5000
Up
Down
Change #
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Silent mode ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to use the silent
mode which shortens the length of time that the laser data writing
motor continues to spin after each copy job is finished. Turn the silent
mode ON if the noise of the motor bothers you in any way.
3
Touch the “On” key if you want to use the silent mode.
Inch specifications
Silent mode
Back
Close
Back
Close
U s e t h i s m o d e i f yo u a r e d i s t ra c t e d by m o t e r s o u n d s.
Off
1
Display the “Machine default” screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on
page 7-41.)
On
Default setting - Machine default
Inch specifications
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Silent mode
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Shorten laser motor rotating time for before/after copying
Use this mode if you are distracted by motor sound.
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Off
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
On
Default setting - Machine default
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
NOTE
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
2
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Select “Silent mode” in the settings list on the left side of the
touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Silent mode” screen will be displayed.
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Key sound ON/OFF
Silent mode
Date/Time
Time difference
Management code change
Setting mode
On
On
2001/10/30 14:02
GMT+08:00
5000
Up
Down
Change #
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Key sound ON/OFF
Silent mode
Date/Time
Time difference
Change MGMT code with #
Setting mode
On
Off
30/10/'01 14:02
GMT+08:00
5000
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
7-53
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Day & time
Perform the following procedure to set the current date and time.
3
NOTE
BE SURE to perform the “Time difference” setting prior to setting the
day and time.
Touch the “+” key or the “–” key to change the displayed
information for each field (“Year”, “Month”, “Day” and “Time”)
to the current time and date.
If you want the time to be automatically calculated for
daylight savings time, touch the “On” key under
“Summertime”.
Inch specifications
Back
Date/Time
1
Close
Year
2001
Month
10
Day
16
Off
Time
18:27
On
Summertime
Display the “Machine default” screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on
page 7-41.)
Inch specifications
Default setting - Machine default
Default setting / Counter
Metric specifications
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Back
Date/Time
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Close
Year
2001
Month
10
Day
16
Off
Time
18:27
On
Summertime
Metric specifications
Default setting - Machine default
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
2
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Select “Date/Time” in the settings list on the left side of the
touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Date/Time” screen will be displayed.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
Inch specifications
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Key sound ON/OFF
Silent mode
Date/Time
Time difference
Management code change
Setting mode
On
On
2001/10/30 14:02
GMT+08:00
5000
Up
Down
Change #
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Key sound ON/OFF
Silent mode
Date/Time
Time difference
Change MGMT code with #
Default setting
7-54
NOTE
Setting mode
On
Off
30/10/'01 14:02
GMT+08:00
5000
Up
Down
Change #
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Time difference
Perform the following procedure to set a designated time difference
from the world standard time (GMT).
3
Touch the “+” key or the “–” key to change the displayed time
difference to the desired setting.
Inch specifications
Time difference
1
Display the “Machine default” screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on
page 7-41.)
Back
Close
Back
Close
GMT+ 00 : 00
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting - Machine default
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Metric specifications
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Time difference
GMT+ 00 : 00
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting - Machine default
End
Default setting
Copy
default
Machine
default
2
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Select “Time difference” in the settings list on the left side of
the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Time difference” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Key sound ON/OFF
Silent mode
Date/Time
Time difference
Management code change
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Close
Machine default
Default menu
NOTE
Setting mode
On
On
2001/10/30 14:02
GMT+08:00
5000
Up
Down
Change #
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Key sound ON/OFF
Silent mode
Date/Time
Time difference
Change MGMT code with #
Setting mode
On
Off
30/10/'01 14:02
GMT+08:00
5000
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
7-55
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Changing the management code
Perform the following procedure to change the management code
used by the copy manager.
3
Use the keypad to enter a new 4-digit management code.
Inch specifications
Management code change
Back
Close
Back
Close
A bl e t o c h a n g e m a n a g e m e n t c o d e. ( # key )
IMPORTANT!
If you change the management code from its factory default, be sure
to keep some sort of record of the new management code. If, for any
reason, you forget the registered management code, you will need to
contact your service representative.
Default setting - Machine default
Metric specifications
Change MGMT code with #
A bl e t o c h a n g e m a n a g e m e n t c o d e. ( # key )
1
Display the “Machine default” screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on
page 7-41.)
Inch specifications
Default setting - Machine default
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
NOTE
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
2
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Select “Management code change” [“Change MGMT code
with #”] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel
and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Management code change” [“Change MGMT code with
#”] screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Key sound ON/OFF
Silent mode
Date/Time
Time difference
Management code change
Setting mode
On
On
2001/10/30 14:02
GMT+08:00
5000
Up
Down
Change #
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Key sound ON/OFF
Silent mode
Date/Time
Time difference
Management code change
7-56
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
4
Setting mode
On
On
2001/10/30 14:02
GMT+08:00
5000
Up
Down
Change #
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Auto sleep ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to have the
auto sleep function automatically engage and turn the copier OFF (O)
if no operation is performed on the copier for a designated amount of
time.
3
Touch the “On” key if you want to use the auto sleep function.
Inch specifications
Auto sleep
Back
Close
Back
Close
Autom. turns into sleep mode if no oper. within a set time
after last setting,or when copying is done.
On
1
Display the “Machine default” screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on
page 7-41.)
Off
Default setting - Machine default
Inch specifications
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Auto sleep
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Autom. turns into sleep mode if no oper. within a set time
after last setting,or when copying is done.
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
On
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Off
Default setting - Machine default
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
2
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Select “Auto sleep” in the settings list on the left side of the
touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Auto sleep” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
NOTES
• If auto sleep interferes with your copying operations, turn this
function OFF. However, it is recommended that you try to set a
longer time interval until auto sleep engages before you actually turn
it OFF.
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Date/Time
Time difference
Management code change
Auto sleep
Energy Saver key setting
Setting mode
2001/10/30 14:02
GMT+08:00
5000
On
Low power mode
Up
Down
Change #
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Date/Time
Time difference
Change MGMT code with #
Auto sleep
Energy Saver key setting
Setting mode
30/10/'01 14:02
GMT+08:00
5000
On
Low power mode
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
7-57
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Changing the energy-saving mode
Perform the following procedure to change the energy-saving mode
(the Low power mode or the Sleep mode) that will be entered into
when the [Energy Saver] key is pressed.
3
Touch the “Low power mode” key or the “Sleep mode” key, as
desired.
Inch specifications
Energy Saver key setting
Back
Close
Back
Close
When pressing Energy Saver key, state can be set.
1
Display the “Machine default” screen.
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on
page 7-41.)
Low power
mode
Sleep
mode
Inch specifications
Default setting - Machine default
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Machine
default
Metric specifications
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Energy Saver key setting
When pressing Energy Saver key, state can be set.
Low power
mode
Sleep
mode
Metric specifications
Default setting - Machine default
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
2
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Select “Energy Saver key setting” in the settings list on the
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
The “Energy Saver key setting” screen will be displayed.
NOTE
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Date/Time
Time difference
Management code change
Auto sleep
Energy Saver key setting
Setting mode
2001/10/30 14:02
GMT+08:00
5000
On
Low power mode
Up
Down
Change #
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Machine default
Default menu
Date/Time
Time difference
Change MGMT code with #
Auto sleep
Energy Saver key setting
Default setting
7-58
Setting mode
30/10/'01 14:02
GMT+08:00
5000
On
Low power mode
Up
Down
Change #
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
(4) Copy default settings
The following table indicates the copy default settings available in this copier. Change any or all of the settings as desired in order to make the most
effective use of your copier.
Default setting
Description
Available settings
Factory
setting
Reference
page
Exposure mode
Selects between auto exposure and manual
exposure as the default copy exposure mode in the
initial mode.
Manual / Auto
Manual
7-63
Exposure adjustment
step
Changes the incremental step to be used during
adjustment of the copy exposure.
1 step / 0.5 step
1 step
7-64
Original quality
Determines the default setting that will be used for
the image quality in the initial mode.
Text+Photo / Text /
Photo
Text+Photo
7-65
Eco print mode ON/OFF
Determines whether the Eco print mode will be the
default setting in the initial mode. In this case, the
amount of toner that is used to make the copies will
be reduced, and images will be printed out relatively
lighter than normal.
On / Off
Off
7-66
Background exposure
adjustment
Adjusts the ground color of the copied paper.
-2 – +2
Standard setting
(0)
7-67
Paper selection
Sets whether the copier will automatically select the
same size of copy paper as the original once an
original is set (APS: auto paper selection mode), or
whether the drawer[cassette] selected “Default
drawer” [“Default cassette”] setting will be
automatically selected.
APS / Default
drawer[cassette]
APS
7-68
Paper type (auto paper
selection mode)
Sets which types of paper can be selected under the
auto paper selection mode.
* It is possible to select the type of paper that has
been designated for the drawer[cassette] currently
in use.
Off / On
On
7-69
Plain
Preprinted
Recycled
Letterhead
Color [Colour]
Prepunched
Rough
Bond
High quality
Vellum
Custom 1 –
Custom 8
Plain
Sets one drawer[cassette] that will be selected
automatically regardless of the size of paper loaded
in that drawer[cassette].
* It is NOT possible to select the multi-bypass tray
as the default drawer[cassette].
* The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will
only be available when the optional Paper Feeder
is installed on your copier.
1st paper
2nd paper
3rd paper
4th paper
1st paper
Default drawer[cassette]
7-70
7-59
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
Default setting
Description
Available settings
Factory
setting
Reference
page
Cover drawer[cassette]
Sets which drawer[cassette] will be used to feed the
cover sheets in the cover mode, the booklet/stitching
mode and the book to booklet mode.
* The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will
only be available when the optional Paper Feeder
is installed on your copier.
1st paper
2nd paper
3rd paper
4th paper
Bypass
Bypass
7-71
Default magnification
ratio
Sets whether or not the auto magnification selection
mode will be used to automatically calculate the
appropriate magnification ratio when you select the
size of copy paper.
Manual / AMS
Manual
7-72
Auto exposure
adjustment
Adjusts the overall exposure level for the auto
exposure mode.
-3 – +3
Standard setting
(0)
7-73
Auto exposure
adjustment (OCR)
Adjusts the overall exposure level for scanning with
OCR (Optical Character Recognition) software when
using the optional scanner functions of this copier.
-3 – +3
Standard setting
(0)
7-74
Manual exposure
adjustment (text+photo
mode)
Adjusts the median exposure value when the
text+photo mode is selected for the image quality.
-3 – +3
Standard setting
(0)
7-75
Manual exposure
adjustment (text mode)
Adjusts the median exposure value when the text
mode is selected for the image quality.
-3 – +3
Standard setting
(0)
7-76
Manual exposure
adjustment (photo
mode)
Adjusts the median exposure value when the photo
mode is selected for the image quality.
-3 – +3
Standard setting
(0)
7-77
Sort/Finished mode ON/
OFF
Determines whether or not the Sort and/or the
Finished modes will be the default setting in the
initial mode.
Sort mode :
On / Off
Finished mode :
Off / On [1 set (Output
each page) ]
Sort mode :
On
Finished mode :
Off
7-78
Auto Rotation mode
Determines whether or not the Auto Rotation mode
will be the default setting in the initial mode. If Auto
Rotation is turned ON, the image will be
automatically rotated even if the orientation of the
original is different from that of the paper loaded in
the drawers[cassettes].
Rotate / No Rotate
Rotate
7-79
Margin width
Determines the default value of the location and
width of the margins in the margin mode.
Inch specification
0 – 3/4 (inches)
Metric specification
0 – 18 (mm)
Inch
specification
Left: 1/4 (inches)
Top: 0 (inches)
Metric
specification
Left: 6 (mm)
Top: 0 (mm)
7-80
7-60
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
Default setting
Erased border width
Description
Determines the default value for the width of the
border to be erased in the two border erase modes.
Available settings
Factory
setting
Reference
page
Inch specification
Outside border:
0 – 3/4 (inches)
Center area:
0 – 1 1/2 (inches)
Inch
specification
Outside border:
1/4 (inches)
Center area:
1/2 (inches)
7-81
Metric specification
Outside border:
0 – 18 (mm)
Center area:
0 – 36 (mm)
Metric
specification
Outside border:
6 (mm)
Center area:
12 (mm)
Copy limit
Sets the limit for the number of copies (or copy sets)
that can be made at a time.
1 – 999
999
7-82
Repeat copying ON/
OFF
Sets whether or not to prohibit repeat copying, as
well as whether or not to make repeat copying the
default setting in the initial mode. Sets whether to
turn the repeat copy mode ON or OFF.
Off / On
On
7-83
Sets whether or not to make repeat copying the
default setting in the initial mode.
Off / On
Off
* This setting is displayed when the optional Hard
Disk is installed.
Registration keys ON/
OFF
Sets whether or not to allow a “Register” key to be
displayed in the screen for those function and modes
which can be registered under the registration keys.
Functions and/or modes can only be registered
under registration keys through the “Register” key.
Off / On
On
7-84
Customize screen layout
(Main functions)
Changes the order of the main functions and modes
that are displayed in the “Basic” and the “User
choice” tabs in order to make the display more
appropriate to the way you use the copier.
* Up to 6 functions and modes can be listed and
displayed.
Exposure Mode /
Reduce/Enlarge /
Sort/Finished /
1/2 sided /
Original size /
Orig. quality
[Quality orig.]
1 Exposure
Mode
2 Reduce/
Enlarge
3 Sort/Finished
4 1/2 sided
5 Original size
6 Orig. quality
[Quality orig.]
7-85
Customize screen layout
(Add functions)
Adds often-used functions and/or modes, and
changes the order of their layout, in order to make
the display more appropriate to the way you use the
copier.
All functions and modes
other than those in the
“Basic” tab and the
“main functions” in the
“User choice” tab.
7 Margin
8 Border Erase
[Erase Mode]
9 Combine
[Merge]
10 (None)
11 (None)
12 (None)
13 (None)
7-86
7-61
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
3
(5) Accessing the copy default settings
Perform the following procedure when you want to access the
screens for each of the various copy default settings.
Use the keypad to enter the 4-digit management code.
The factory default setting for 30 cpm copiers is “3000”, for
40 cpm copiers is “4000” and for 50 cpm copiers is “5000”.
Inch specifications
Close
Enter the administrator number
1
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the
[Default Setting/Counter] key.
The “Default setting”screen will be displayed.
Metric specifications
Close
Enter the administrator number
2
Touch the “Copy default” key on the left side of the touch
panel.
Inch specifications
If the entered code matched the registered one, the “Copy
default” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Default setting / Counter
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
4
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Exposure mode
Exposure steps
Original image quality
Eco Print
Background exp. adj.
Setting mode
Manual
1 step
Text + Photo
Off
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Machine
default
Default setting / Counter
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Close
Copy default
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Default menu
Exposure mode
Exposure steps
Image quality original
Eco Print
Background exp. adj.
Setting mode
Manual
1 step
Text + Photo
Off
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
NOTES
• It is possible for you to change the 4-digit management code.
(See “Changing the management code” on page 7-56.)
• Refer to the desired procedure(s) explained under “(6) Making copy
default settings” and perform the corresponding setting(s).
7-62
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
3
(6) Making copy default settings
Touch the “Manual” key or the “Auto” key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications
Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired
setting.
Exposure mode
Back
Close
Back
Close
Select default mode of copy exposure, auto or manual.
● Exposure mode
Manual
Perform the following procedure to select between auto exposure and
manual exposure as the default copy exposure mode in the initial
mode.
1
Auto
D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
Metric specifications
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
Exposure mode
Select default mode of copy exposure, auto or manual.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Manual
Auto
End
Default setting
Copy
default
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Default setting - Copy default
Machine
default
Document
Management
NOTE
Metric specifications
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
2
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Select “Exposure mode” in the settings list on the left side of
the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Exposure mode” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Exposure mode
Exposure steps
Original image quality
Eco Print
Background exp. adj.
Setting mode
Manual
1 step
Text + Photo
Off
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Exposure mode
Exposure steps
Image quality original
Eco Print
Background exp. adj.
Setting mode
Manual
1 step
Text + Photo
Off
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
7-63
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Exposure adjustment step
Perform the following procedure to change the incremental step to be
used during adjustment of the copy exposure.
3
Touch the “1 step” key or the “0.5 step” key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications
Back
Exposure steps
Close
S e l e c t s t e p o f c o py ex p o s u r e.
1
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
1 step
step
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Metric specifications
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Back
Exposure steps
Close
S e l e c t a d j u s t m e n t s t e p o f c o py ex p o s u r e.
1 step
0.5 step
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting - Copy default
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
NOTE
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
2
Select “Exposure steps” in the settings list on the left side of
the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Exposure steps” screen will be displayed.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Exposure mode
Exposure steps
Original image quality
Eco Print
Background exp. adj.
Setting mode
Manual
1 step
Text + Photo
Off
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Exposure mode
Exposure steps
Image quality original
Eco Print
Background exp. adj.
Default setting
7-64
Setting mode
Manual
1 step
Text + Photo
Off
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Original quality
Perform the following procedure to determine the default setting that
will be used for the image quality in the initial mode.
3
Touch the “Text+Photo” key, the “Photo” key or the “Text” key,
as appropriate.
Inch specifications
Original image quality
1
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
Back
Close
Back
Close
S e l e c t d e fa u l t m o d e o f o r i g i n a l i m a g e q u a l i t y.
Text + Photo
Inch specifications
Photo
Default setting / Counter
Text
Default setting
Machine
default
D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Metric specifications
Image quality original.
S e l e c t d e fa u l t m o d e o f o r i g i n a l q u a l i t y.
Text+Photo
Metric specifications
Photo
Default setting / Counter
Text
Default setting
Machine
default
Default setting - Copy default
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
NOTE
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
2
Select “Original image quality” [“Image quality Original”] in
the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then
touch the “Change #” key.
The “Original image quality” [“Image quality Original”] screen
will be displayed.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Exposure mode
Exposure steps
Original image quality
Eco Print
Background exp. adj.
Setting mode
Manual
1 step
Text + Photo
Off
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Exposure mode
Exposure steps
Image quality original
Eco Print
Background exp. adj.
Setting mode
Manual
1 step
Text + Photo
Off
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
7-65
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Eco print mode ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure to determine whether or not the eco
print mode will be the default setting in the initial mode.
3
Touch the “On” key if you want to make the eco print mode
the default setting in the initial mode.
Inch specifications
Eco Print
1
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
Back
Close
Back
Close
S e l e c t d e fa u l t E c o P r i n t .
Off
Inch specifications
On
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Machine
default
D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Metric specifications
Eco Print
Select default EcoPrint.
Off
Metric specifications
On
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Machine
default
Default setting - Copy default
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
NOTE
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
2
Select “Eco Print” in the settings list on the left side of the
touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Eco Print” screen will be displayed.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will
return to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Exposure mode
Exposure steps
Original image quality
Eco Print
Background exp. adj.
Setting mode
Manual
1 step
Text + Photo
Off
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Exposure mode
Exposure steps
Image quality original
Eco Print
Background exp. adj.
Default setting
7-66
Setting mode
Manual
1 step
Text + Photo
Off
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Background exposure adjustment
Perform the following procedure to adjust the ground color of the
copied paper.
3
Touch the “Lighter” key or “Darker” key to adjust density.
Inch specifications
Background exp. adj.
1
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
Back
Close
Able to adjust exposure of paper background.
Inch specifications
Lighter
Darker
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Machine
default
Default setting - Copy default
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Metric specifications
Background exp. adj.
Back
Close
Able to adjust exposure of paper background.
Metric specifications
Lighter
Darker
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Machine
default
Default setting - Copy default
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
NOTE
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
2
Select “Background exp. adj.” in the settings list on the left
side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Background exp. adj.” screen will be displayed.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will
return to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Exposure mode
Exposure steps
Original image quality
Eco Print
Background exp. adj.
Setting mode
Manual
1 step
Text + Photo
Off
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Exposure mode
Exposure steps
Image quality original
Eco Print
Background exp. adj.
Setting mode
Manual
1 step
Text + Photo
Off
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
7-67
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Paper selection
Perform the following procedure to set whether the copier will
automatically select the same size of copy paper as the original once
an original is set, or whether the designated default drawer[cassette]
will be automatically selected.
3
Touch the “APS” key to have the same size of copy paper as
the original selected automatically, and the “Default
drawer[cassette]” key to have paper fed from the designated
default drawer[cassette].
Inch specifications
Select paper
1
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
Back
Close
Back
Close
S e t a u t o p a p e r s e l e c t i o n m o d e.
APS
Inch specifications
Default
drawer
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Machine
default
D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Metric specifications
Select paper
S e t t i n g p a p e r s e l e c t m o d e.
APS
Metric specifications
Default
cassette
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Machine
default
Default setting - Copy default
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
NOTE
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
2
Select “Select paper” in the settings list on the left side of the
touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Select paper” screen will be displayed.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Select paper
Select paper type(APS)
Default drawer
Drawer for cover paper
Default magnification
Setting mode
APS
Plain
1st paper
Bypass
Manual
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Select paper
Select paper type(APS)
Default cassette
Cassette for cover paper
Default mode
Default setting
7-68
Setting mode
APS
Plain
1st paper
Bypass
Manual
Up
Down
Change #
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Paper type (auto paper selection mode)
Perform the following procedure to set which types of paper can be
selected under the auto paper selection mode.
1
3
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
Touch the “On” key and then touch the key that corresponds
to the types of paper you want to allow to be used under the
auto paper selection mode. If you do NOT want to limit the
types of paper that will be available for use in that mode,
touch the “Off” key.
Inch specifications
Back
Select paper type(APS)
Inch specifications
Close
Select paper type(s) for Auto Paper Selection.
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Color
High
quality
Custom 1
Custom 5
Off
Preprinted
Prepunched
Vellum
Custom 2
Custom 6
On
Recycled
Rough
Custom 3
Custom 7
Letterhead
Bond
Custom 4
Custom 8
End
Copy
default
Language
Machine
default
Plain
Document
Management
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Default setting - Copy default
Metric specifications
Select paper type(APS)
Metric specifications
Close
Plain
Colour
High
quality
Custom 1
Custom 5
Off
Preprinted
Prepunched
Vellum
Custom 2
Custom 6
On
Recycled
Rough
Custom 3
Custom 7
Letterhead
Bond
Custom 4
Custom 8
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Back
Select paper type(s) for Auto Paper Selection.
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Default setting - Copy default
NOTES
2
Select “Select paper type(APS)” in the settings list on the left
side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Select paper type(APS)” screen will be displayed.
• It is possible to select the type of paper that has been designated for
the drawer[cassette] currently in use.
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Select paper
Select paper type(APS)
Default drawer
Drawer for cover paper
Default magnification
Setting mode
APS
Plain
1st paper
Bypass
Manual
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Select paper
Select paper type(APS)
Default cassette
Cassette for cover paper
Default mode
Setting mode
APS
Plain
1st paper
Bypass
Manual
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
7-69
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Default drawer[cassette]
Perform the following procedure to set one drawer[cassette] that will
be selected automatically regardless of the size of paper loaded in
that drawer[cassette].
* It is NOT possible to select the multi-bypass tray as the default
drawer[cassette].
3
Touch the key that corresponds to the desired
drawer[cassette].
Inch specifications
Default drawer
Back
Close
Back
Close
Select priority drawer.
1st paper
2nd paper
1
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
3rd paper
4th paper
Inch specifications
Default setting - Copy default
Default setting / Counter
Metric specifications
Default setting
End
Default cassette
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
1st paper
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
2nd paper
Select paper cassette for default setting.
3rd paper
4th paper
Metric specifications
Default setting - Copy default
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
2
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Select “Default drawer[cassette]” in the settings list on the left
side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Default drawer[cassette]” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default menu
Setting mode
APS
Plain
1st paper
Bypass
Manual
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Select paper
Select paper type(APS)
Default cassette
Cassette for cover paper
Default mode
Default setting
7-70
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
• The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will only be available
when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Close
Copy default
Select paper
Select paper type(APS)
Default drawer
Drawer for cover paper
Default magnification
NOTES
Setting mode
APS
Plain
1st paper
Bypass
Manual
Up
Down
Change #
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Cover drawer[cassette]
Perform the following procedure to set which drawer[cassette] will be
used to feed the cover sheets in the cover mode, the booklet/stitching
mode and the book to booklet mode.
3
Touch the key that corresponds to the desired
drawer[cassette].
Inch specifications
Drawer for cover paper
Back
Close
Back
Close
Select drawer for cover paper.
1
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
1st paper
2nd paper
3rd paper
Inch specifications
Bypass
4th paper
Default setting / Counter
Default setting - Copy default
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Metric specifications
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Cassette for cover paper
Select cassette for cover paper.
1st paper
2nd paper
3rd paper
Metric specifications
Bypass
4th paper
Default setting / Counter
Default setting - Copy default
End
Default setting
Copy
default
Machine
default
2
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Select “Drawer for cover paper” [“Cassette for cover paper”]
in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then
touch the “Change #” key.
The “Drawer for cover paper” [“Cassette for cover paper”]
screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default menu
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
• The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will only be available
when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Close
Copy default
Select paper
Select paper type(APS)
Default drawer
Drawer for cover paper
Default magnification
NOTES
Setting mode
APS
Plain
1st paper
Bypass
Manual
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Select paper
Select paper type(APS)
Default cassette
Cassette for cover paper
Default mode
Setting mode
APS
Plain
1st paper
Bypass
Manual
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
7-71
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Default magnification ratio
Perform the following procedure to set whether or not the appropriate
magnification ratio to be calculated automatically when you select the
size of copy paper.
3
Touch the “Manual” key or the “AMS” key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications
Default magnification
Back
Close
Back
Close
S e l e c t d e fa u l t m a g n i f i c a t i o n m o d e.
1
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
Manual
AMS
Inch specifications
D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Machine
default
Metric specifications
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Default mode
S e l e c t d e fa u l t zo o m m o d e.
Manual
AMS
Metric specifications
Default setting - Copy default
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
2
Document
Management
NOTE
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Select “Default magnification” [“Default mode”] in the settings
list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the
“Change #” key.
The “Default magnification” [“Default mode”] screen will be
displayed.
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Select paper
Select paper type(APS)
Default drawer
Drawer for cover paper
Default magnification
Setting mode
APS
Plain
1st paper
Bypass
Manual
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Select paper
Select paper type(APS)
Default cassette
Cassette for cover paper
Default mode
Default setting
7-72
Setting mode
APS
Plain
1st paper
Bypass
Manual
Up
Down
Change #
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Auto exposure adjustment
Perform the following procedure to adjust the overall exposure level
for the auto exposure mode.
3
Touch the “Lighter” key or the “Darker” key, as appropriate, to
move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the
exposure as desired.
Inch specifications
1
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
Adjust auto exposure.
Back
Close
A d j u s t c o py ex p o s u r e d e fa u l t s e t t i n g . ( Au t o )
Inch specifications
Darker
Lighter
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Metric specifications
Adjust auto exposure.
Close
Back
A d j u s t d e fa u l t s e t t i n g o f c o py ex p o s u r e. ( Au t o )
Metric specifications
Lighter
Darker
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Default setting - Copy default
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
NOTE
2
Select “Adjust auto exposure.” in the settings list on the left
side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Adjust auto exposure.” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will
return to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Default setting / Counter
Copy default
Default menu
Adjust auto exposure.
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR)
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)
Adj. manual expo.(Text)
Adj. manual expo.(Photo)
Close
Setting mode
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Adjust auto exposure.
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR)
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)
Adj. manual expo.(Text)
Adj. manual expo.(Photo)
Setting mode
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
7-73
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Auto exposure adjustment (OCR)
Perform the following procedure to adjust the overall exposure level
for scanning with OCR (Optical Character Recognition) software
when using the optional scanner functions of this copier.
3
Touch the “Lighter” key or the “Darker” key, as appropriate, to
move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the
exposure as desired.
Inch specifications
Adjust auto exposure (OCR)
1
Back
Close
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
Inch specifications
Darker
Lighter
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Machine
default
D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Metric specifications
Adjust auto exposure (OCR)
Metric specifications
Lighter
Close
Back
Darker
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Machine
default
Default setting - Copy default
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
NOTE
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
2
Select “Adjust auto exposure (OCR)” in the settings list on
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change
#” key.
The “Adjust auto exposure (OCR)” screen will be displayed.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will
return to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Copy default
Default menu
Adjust auto exposure.
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR)
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)
Adj. manual expo.(Text)
Adj. manual expo.(Photo)
Close
Setting mode
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Adjust auto exposure.
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR)
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)
Adj. manual expo.(Text)
Adj. manual expo.(Photo)
Default setting
7-74
Setting mode
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Manual exposure adjustment (text+photo mode)
Perform the following procedure to adjust the median exposure value
when the text+photo mode is selected for the image quality.
3
Touch the “Lighter” key or the “Darker” key, as appropriate, to
move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the
exposure as desired.
Inch specifications
1
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)
Back
Close
A d j u s t c o py ex p o s u r e d e fa u l t s e t t i n g . ( M a nu a l , Tex t + P h o t o )
Inch specifications
Darker
Lighter
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Metric specifications
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)
Close
Back
A d j u s t d e fa u l t s e t t i n g o f c o py ex p o s u r e. ( M a nu a l , Tex t + P h o t o )
Metric specifications
Lighter
Darker
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Default setting - Copy default
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
NOTE
2
Select “Adj. Manual expo. (Mixed)” in the settings list on the
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
The “Adj. Manual expo. (Mixed)” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Default setting / Counter
Copy default
Default menu
Adjust auto exposure.
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR)
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)
Adj. manual expo.(Text)
Adj. manual expo.(Photo)
Close
Setting mode
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Adjust auto exposure.
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR)
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)
Adj. manual expo.(Text)
Adj. manual expo.(Photo)
Setting mode
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
7-75
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Manual exposure adjustment (text mode)
Perform the following procedure to adjust the median exposure value
when the text mode is selected for the image quality.
3
Touch the “Lighter” key or the “Darker” key, as appropriate, to
move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the
exposure as desired.
Inch specifications
1
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
Adj. manual expo. (Text)
Back
Close
A d j u s t c o py ex p o s u r e d e fa u l t s e t t i n g . ( M a nu a l , Tex t )
Inch specifications
Darker
Lighter
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Metric specifications
Adj. manual expo. (Text)
Close
Back
A d j u s t d e fa u l t s e t t i n g o f c o py ex p o s u r e. ( M a nu a l , Tex t )
Metric specifications
Lighter
Darker
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Default setting - Copy default
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
NOTE
2
Select “Adj. manual expo. (Text)” in the settings list on the
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
The “Adj. manual expo. (Text)” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Default setting / Counter
Copy default
Default menu
Adjust auto exposure.
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR)
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)
Adj. manual expo.(Text)
Adj. manual expo.(Photo)
Close
Setting mode
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Adjust auto exposure.
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR)
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)
Adj. manual expo.(Text)
Adj. manual expo.(Photo)
Default setting
7-76
Setting mode
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Manual exposure adjustment (photo mode)
Perform the following procedure to adjust the median exposure value
when the photo mode is selected for the image quality.
3
Touch the “Lighter” key or the “Darker” key, as appropriate, to
move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the
exposure as desired.
Inch specifications
1
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
Adj. manual expo. (Photo)
Back
Close
A d j u s t c o py ex p o s u r e d e fa u l t s e t t i n g . ( M a nu a l , P h o t o )
Inch specifications
Darker
Lighter
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Metric specifications
Adj. manual expo. (Photo)
Close
Back
A d j u s t d e fa u l t s e t t i n g o f c o py ex p o s u r e. ( M a nu a l , P h o t o )
Metric specifications
Lighter
Darker
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Default setting - Copy default
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
NOTE
2
Select “Adj. manual expo. (Photo)” in the settings list on the
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
The “Adj. manual expo. (Photo)” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Default setting / Counter
Copy default
Default menu
Adjust auto exposure.
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR)
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)
Adj. manual expo.(Text)
Adj. manual expo.(Photo)
Close
Setting mode
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Adjust auto exposure.
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR)
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)
Adj. manual expo.(Text)
Adj. manual expo.(Photo)
Setting mode
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
7-77
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Sort/Finished mode ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure to determine whether or not the Sort
and/or the Finished modes will be the default setting in the initial
mode.
3
Touch the “Sort:On” key under “Sort” if you want to make the
Sort mode the default setting in the initial mode.
Inch specifications
Back
Sort
Close
Select default mode for sort, ON or OFF.
Sort
1
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
Offset
Sort : Off
Off
Sort : On
On
Inch specifications
D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Machine
default
Metric specifications
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Back
Sort
Close
Select default mode of sort, ON or OFF.
Sort
Group
Sort : Off
Off
Sort : On
1 set
Metric specifications
Default setting - Copy default
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
2
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Select “Sort” in the settings list on the left side of the touch
panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Sort” screen will be displayed.
4
Touch the “On” [“1 set”] key under “Offset” [“Group”] if you
want to make the Finished mode the default setting in the
initial mode.
• In metric specification copiers, if you select “Sort:Off” under
“Sort”, the “1 set” key that appears under “Group” will
change to the “Output each page” key.
NOTE
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Sort
Auto Rotation
Default margin width
Default erase width
Preset limit
Setting mode
Sort : On / Offset : Off
Rotate
Left 1/4" 0"
Border 1/4" Center 1/2"
999 Set
5
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
6
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
7
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Sort
Auto Rotation
Default margin width
Default erase width
Preset limit
Default setting
7-78
Setting mode
Sort : On / Group : Off
Rotate
Left 6mm
0mm
Border 6mm Center 12mm
999 Set
Up
Down
Change #
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Auto Rotation mode ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure to determine whether or not the Auto
Rotation mode will be the default setting in the initial mode.
3
Touch the “Rotate” key if you want to make the Auto Rotation
mode the default setting in the initial mode.
Inch specifications
Auto Rotation
1
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
Back
Close
Back
Close
Select default mode for Auto Rotation, ON or OFF.
No Rotate
Inch specifications
Rotate
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Machine
default
D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Metric specifications
Auto Rotation
Select default mode of Auto Rotation, ON or OFF.
No rotate
Metric specifications
Rotate
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Machine
default
Default setting - Copy default
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
NOTE
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
2
Select “Auto Rotation” in the settings list on the left side of
the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Auto Rotation” screen will be displayed.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Sort
Auto Rotation
Default margin width
Default erase width
Preset limit
Setting mode
Sort : On / Offset : Off
Rotate
Left 1/4" 0"
Border 1/4" Center 1/2"
999 Set
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Sort
Auto Rotation
Default margin width
Default erase width
Preset limit
Setting mode
Sort : On / Group : Off
Rotate
Left 6mm
0mm
Border 6mm Center 12mm
999 Set
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
7-79
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Margin width
Perform the following procedure to determine the default value of the
location and width of the margins in the margin mode.
3
Touch the “O” key or the “P” key, and the “M” key or the “N”
key, as desired, to change the default margins and margin
widths to the desired setting.
Inch specifications
1
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
Default margin width
Back
Close
Back
Close
A d j u s t d e fa u l t s e t t i n g o f m a r g i n w i d t h .
Front page
(0~3/4)
Inch specifications
0
Default setting / Counter
(0~3/4)
1
Left
Default setting
/4
"
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
"
Document
Management
D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Metric specifications
Default margin width
Adjust default setting of margin width.
Front page
(0~18)
Metric specifications
0
Default setting / Counter
(0~18)
Left
Default setting
6
mm
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
mm
Document
Management
Default setting - Copy default
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
NOTE
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
2
Select “Default margin width” in the settings list on the left
side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Default margin width” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Sort
Auto Rotation
Default margin width
Default erase width
Preset limit
Setting mode
Sort : On / Offset : Off
Rotate
Left 1/4" 0"
Border 1/4" Center 1/2"
999 Set
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Sort
Auto Rotation
Default margin width
Default erase width
Preset limit
Default setting
7-80
Setting mode
Sort : On / Group : Off
Rotate
Left 6mm
0mm
Border 6mm Center 12mm
999 Set
Up
Down
Change #
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Erased border width
Perform the following procedure to determine the default value for the
width of the border to be erased in the two border erase modes.
3
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key under the “Border” and
“Center” fields to change the displayed widths to those
desired.
Inch specifications
1
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
Default erase width
(0~3/4)
Inch specifications
/4
1
" Center
+
–
Default setting / Counter
/2
Back
Close
"
+
–
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Close
(0~11/2)
1
Border
Default setting
Back
A d j u s t d e fa u l t s e t t i n g o f e ra s e w i d t h .
Document
Management
D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Metric specifications
Default erase width
Adjust default setting of erase width.
(0~18)
Metric specifications
+
–
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
mm Center
12
mm
+
–
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
(0~36)
6
Border
Document
Management
Default setting - Copy default
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
NOTE
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
2
Select “Default erase width” in the settings list on the left side
of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Default erase width” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Sort
Auto Rotation
Default margin width
Default erase width
Preset limit
Setting mode
Sort : On / Offset : Off
Rotate
Left 1/4" 0"
Border 1/4" Center 1/2"
999 Set
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Sort
Auto Rotation
Default margin width
Default erase width
Preset limit
Setting mode
Sort : On / Group : Off
Rotate
Left 6mm
0mm
Border 6mm Center 12mm
999 Set
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
7-81
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Copy limit
Perform the following procedure to set the limit for the number of
copies (or copy sets) that can be made at a time.
3
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change the copy limit to
the desired setting.
Inch specifications
Preset limit
1
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
Back
Close
Back
Close
S e t o u t p u t q u a n t i t y.
~
Set
Inch specifications
+
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Machine
default
D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Metric specifications
Preset limit
S e l e c t c o py p r e s e t i n o n e j o b ( # key ) .
~
Set
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Machine
default
Default setting - Copy default
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
NOTE
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
2
Select “Preset limit” in the settings list on the left side of the
touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Preset limit” screen will be displayed.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Sort
Auto Rotation
Default margin width
Default erase width
Preset limit
Setting mode
Sort : On / Offset : Off
Rotate
Left 1/4" 0"
Border 1/4" Center 1/2"
999 Set
Up
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Sort
Auto Rotation
Default margin width
Default erase width
Preset limit
Default setting
7-82
Setting mode
Sort : On / Group : Off
Rotate
Left 6mm
0mm
Border 6mm Center 12mm
999 Set
Up
Down
Change #
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Repeat copying ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to prohibit
repeat copying, as well as whether or not to make repeat copying the
default setting in the initial mode.
3
If you want to prohibit repeat copying, touch the “Off” key. If
you want to make repeat copying the default setting in the
initial mode, touch the “On” key.
Inch specifications
Modify Copy
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the optional Hard Disk is installed.
1
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
Off
Off
On
On
Modify copy
Default setting
Close
Select ON to activate Modify Copy or OFF
to inactivate it.
Function
Default
End
Document
Management
Back
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Machine
default
Close
D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
Inch specifications
Copy
default
Back
S e l e c t O N t o a c t i va t e M o d i f y C o py o r O F F
t o i n a c t i va t e i t .
Function
D e fa u l t
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Off
Off
On
On
Default setting - Copy default
Metric specifications
NOTE
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
2
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Select “Modify Copy” in the settings list on the left side of the
touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Modify Copy” screen will be displayed.
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Preset limit
Modify Copy
Display register key
Customize(Main function)
Customize(Add function)
Setting mode
Up
999 Set
On / Default Off
On
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Preset limit
Modify copy
Display"Register"key
Customize(Main function)
Customize(Add function)
Setting mode
Up
999 Set
On / Default Off
On
Down
Change #
Default setting
7-83
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Registration keys ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to allow a
“Register” key to be displayed in the screen for those function and
modes which can be registered under the registration keys. Functions
and/or modes can only be registered under registration keys through
the “Register” key.
3
If you want the “Register” key to be displayed, touch the “On”
key. If you do NOT want it to be displayed, touch the “Off”
key.
Inch specifications
Display register key
Back
Close
Back
Close
S e l e c t O n e t o u c h key O n / O f f.
A bl e t o u s e R e g i s t e r key o n e a c h s c r e e n .
1
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
On
Off
Inch specifications
D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Machine
default
Metric specifications
End
Copy
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Display"Register"key
S e l e c t t o s h ow R e g i s t e r key O n / O f f.
A bl e t o u s e R e g i s t e r key t o r e g i s t e r / d e l e t e a t e a c h p a g e.
On
Off
Metric specifications
Default setting - Copy default
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
2
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Select “Display register key” [“Display "Register" key”] in the
settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch
the “Change #” key.
The “Display register key” [“Display "Register" key”] screen
will be displayed.
Inch specifications
NOTE
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Preset limit
Modify Copy
Display register key
Customize(Main function)
Customize(Add function)
Setting mode
Up
999 Set
On / Default Off
On
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Preset limit
Modify copy
Display"Register"key
Customize(Main function)
Customize(Add function)
Default setting
7-84
Setting mode
Up
999 Set
On / Default Off
On
Down
Change #
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Customize screen layout (Main functions)
Perform the following procedure to change the order of the main
functions and modes that are displayed in the “Basic” and the “User
choice” tabs in order to make the display more appropriate to the way
you use the copier.
1
3
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
If you want to change the order of the basic functions and
modes, touch the “▲” or the “▼” cursor key to select the item
you want to move. Then touch the “Move ahead” key or the
“Move behind” [“Move backward”] key to move that item and
change the order of display. The final display of the basic
functions and modes will be in accordance with the numbers
in the list and those shown in the tabs to the left of that list.
Inch specifications
Customize(Main function)
Inch specifications
Basic
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
User choice
Back
Close
Back
Close
Register mode
Exposure Mode
Reduce/Enlarge
Sort/Finished
1/2 sided
Original size
Orig. quality
Move
Ahead
Move
Behind
Default setting - Copy default
Metric specifications
Customize(Main function)
Metric specifications
Basic
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
Copy
default
Machine
default
User choice
End
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Register mode
Exposure Mode
Reduce/Enlarge
Sort/Finished
1/2 sided
Original size
Quality orig
Move
ahead
Move
backward
Default setting - Copy default
NOTE
2
Select “Customize(Main function)” in the settings list on the
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
The “Customize(Main function)” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Preset limit
Modify Copy
Display register key
Customize(Main function)
Customize(Add function)
Setting mode
Up
999 Set
On / Default Off
On
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default menu
Preset limit
Modify copy
Display"Register"key
Customize(Main function)
Customize(Add function)
Setting mode
Up
999 Set
On / Default Off
On
Down
Change #
Default setting
7-85
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Customize screen layout (Add functions)
Perform the following procedure to add often-used functions and/or
modes, or to change the order of their layout, in order to make the
display more appropriate to the way you use the copier.
1
3
Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
If you want to add functions and/or modes to the “User
choice” tab, touch the “▲” or the “▼” cursor key under the list
on the right to select the item you want to add. Then touch
the “▲” or the “▼” cursor key under the list on the left to
select in what order you want it to be added in that tab.
Finally, touch the “b” key to add the selected item to the
“User choice” tab.
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Customize(Add function)
Default setting / Counter
Basic
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
User choice
Back
Register mode
Close
Addition mode
Margin
Border Erase
Combine
None
None
None
None
Select paper
Combine
Auto Selection
Batch scanning
Margin
D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
Metric specifications
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Basic
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Back
Customize(Add function)
User choice
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Register mode
Margin
Erace
Merge
None
None
None
Close
Addition Mode
None
Select paper
Merge
Auto selection
Batch scanning
Margin
Default setting - Copy default
NOTE
2
Select “Customize(Add function)” in the settings list on the
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
The “Customize(Add function)” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Preset limit
Modify Copy
Display register key
Customize(Main function)
Customize(Add function)
Setting mode
Up
999 Set
On / Default Off
On
Default setting / Counter
Close
Copy default
Default setting
7-86
5
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting”screen.
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
Change #
Metric specifications
Preset limit
Modify copy
Display"Register"key
Customize(Main function)
Customize(Add function)
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
Down
Default setting
Default menu
4
Close
Copy default
Default menu
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Setting mode
Up
999 Set
On / Default Off
On
Down
Change #
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
3. Multi-bypass tray paper settings
3
(1) Paper size and type
Perform the following procedure in order to use the multi-bypass tray
to feed copy paper.
1
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the
[Default Setting/Counter] key.
The “Default setting” screen will be displayed.
Specify the desired method of selecting the paper size.
If you select “Auto Detection” here, select the desired unit of
measure (“Centimeter” or “Inch”) as well, and then go directly
to step 5. If you want to select a custom paper size, touch the
“Input size” and then go to the next step.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
A4
Close
Back
Bypass setting
Paper size
Unit
Paper type
Auto
Detection
Centimeter
Input size
Inch
Plain
Select
paper type
Back
Close
Others
Standard
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Bypass setting
Paper size
2
Touch the “Bypass setting” key.
The “Bypass setting” screen will be displayed.
Auto
Detection
Input size
Inch specifications
Unit
Paper type
Centimeter
Plain
Select
paper type
Inch
Others
Standard
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
4
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change each of the
displayed sizes (length and width) to the desired settings.
* In metric specification copiers, the desired sizes can also
be entered directly by touching the corresponding “#-Keys”
key and then using the keypad.
Inch specifications
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
297x432mm
Default setting / Counter
Back
Bypass setting
Default setting
End
Y
Copy
default
Machine
default
(37/8~115/8)
Paper size
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Auto
Detection
Input size
Others
Standard
1111/16
(57/8~17)
"
X
169/16
+
–
+
–
# keys
# keys
Close
Paper type
"
Plain
Select
paper type
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Back
Bypass setting
(98~297)
Paper size
Y
Auto
Detection
Input size
Others
Standard
297
(148~432)
mm
X
420
+
–
+
–
#-Keys
#-Keys
Close
Paper type
mm
Plain
Select
paper type
7-87
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
5
Touch the “Select paper type” key.
The “Select paper type” screen will be displayed.
6
Touch the key that corresponds to the type of paper to be
used, and then touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will
return to the screen in step 4.
(2) Selecting other standard sizes
Perform the following procedure when you want to print out onto other
standard sizes of special paper.
1
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the
[Default setting/Counter] key.
The “Default setting” screen will be displayed.
2
Touch the “Bypass setting” key.
The “Bypass setting” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Select paper type
Back
Close
Plain
Labels
Cardstock
Thick
paper
Custom 1
Custom 5
Transparency
Recycled
Color
Envelope
Custom 2
Custom 6
Rough
Preprinted
Prepunched
Custom 3
Custom 7
Vellum
Bond
Letterhead
Custom 4
Custom 8
High
quality
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Back
Select paper type
Plain
Labels
Transparency
Recycled
Colour
Rough
Preprinted
Prepunched
Vellum
Bond
Letterhead
Cardstock
Thick
paper
Envelope
High
quality
Close
Custom 1
Custom 5
Custom 2
Custom 6
Custom 3
Custom 7
Custom 4
Custom 8
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
7
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the screen in step 2. Touch the “End” key. The touch panel
will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
3
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Touch the “Others Standard” key.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Paper size
A4
Back
Bypass setting
Unit
Auto
Detection
Centimeter
Input size
Inch
Close
Paper type
Plain
Select
paper type
Back
Close
Others
Standard
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Bypass setting
Paper size
Auto
Detection
Input size
Others
Standard
7-88
Unit
Paper type
Centimeter
Plain
Inch
Select
paper type
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
4
Touch the “Select size” key. The “Select size” screen will be
displayed.
6
Inch specifications
Paper Size
ISO B5
Default setting / Counter
Back
Bypass setting
Paper size
Auto
Detection
Inch specifications
Close
Default setting / Counter
Paper type
EX
Select
size
Plain
Touch the “Select paper type” key. The “Select paper type”
screen will be displayed. Touch the key that corresponds to
the type of paper you want to use, and then touch the “Close”
key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4.
Select paper type
Select
paper type
Back
Input size
Plain
Labels
Cardstock
Thick
paper
Custom 1
Custom 5
Others
Standard
Transparency
Recycled
Color
Envelope
Custom 2
Custom 6
Rough
Preprinted
Prepunched
Custom 3
Custom 7
Vellum
Bond
Letterhead
Custom 4
Custom 8
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
High
quality
Metric specifications
Bypass setting
Back
Paper size
Close
Default setting / Counter
Paper type
Back
Select paper type
Auto
Detection
5
Close
EX
Select
size
Plain
Close
Select
paper type
Input size
Plain
Labels
Others
Standard
Transparency
Recycled
Colour
Rough
Preprinted
Prepunched
Vellum
Bond
Letterhead
Touch the key that corresponds to the size of paper you want
to use, and then touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will
return to the screen in step 4.
Inch specifications
7
Cardstock
Thick
paper
Envelope
High
quality
Custom 1
Custom 5
Custom 2
Custom 6
Custom 3
Custom 7
Custom 4
Custom 8
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2. Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will
return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
Default setting / Counter
Select size
ISO B5
Comm.#10
EX
81/2x13"
Envelope
DL
Comm.#9
OUFUKU
HAGAKI
8K
Envelope
C5
Comm.
#6-3/4
YOUKEI 2
16 K
Envelope
C4
MO
YOUKEI 4
Back
Close
Back
Close
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Select size
ISO B5
Comm.#10
EX
81/2x13"
Envelope
DL
Comm.#9
OUFUKU
HAGAKI
8K
Envelope
C5
Comm.
#6-3/4
YOUKEI 2
16 K
Envelope
C4
MO
YOUKEI 4
7-89
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
4. Original size registration
Perform the following procedure in order to register a custom original
size that can be used under the “Original size selection” procedure.
1
3
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the
[Default Setting/Counter] key.
The “Default setting”screen will be displayed.
Select of the “Original size (custom 1)” to “Original size
(custom 4)” settings under the “Default menu” column on the
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
The corresponding setting screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Register orig. size
Setting mode
Default menu
Up
2x2"
2x2"
2x2"
2x2"
Original size (custom 1)
Original size (custom 2)
Original size (custom 3)
Original size (custom 4)
Down
Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Close
Register orig. size
2
Setting mode
Default menu
Touch the “Register orig. size” key.
The “Register orig. size” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Up
50x50mm
50x50mm
50x50mm
50x50mm
Original size (custom 1)
Original size (custom 2)
Original size (custom 3)
Original size (custom 4)
Down
Change #
Default setting
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
4
Inch specifications
Metric specifications
Original size (custom 1)
Default setting / Counter
Register custom size original.
(2~115/8)
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change each of the
displayed sizes (Y = width and X = length) to the desired
settings.
If you do not want to register a custom original size, touch
the “Off” key.
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
2
Back
Close
Back
Close
(2~17)
"
2
"
Off
On
Default setting - Register orig. size
Metric specifications
Original size (custom 1)
Register custom size original.
(50~297)
50
(50~432)
mm
50
mm
Off
On
Default setting - Register orig. size
7-90
5
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 3.
6
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2. Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will
return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
5. Drum refresh
Perform the following procedure if the copy image becomes blurred or
if white spots which are not on the originals appear on the copies. The
drum refreshing operation will take approximately 5 minutes.
1
Set 11" x 8 1/2", 11" x 17", A4 or A3 size paper on the multibypass tray.
4
Touch the “Drum refresh” key. The “Drum refresh” screen will
be displayed.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
User adjustment
Close
Drum
refresh
2
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the
[Default Setting/Counter] key.
The “Default setting” screen will be displayed.
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
User adjustment
Close
Drum
refresh
Default setting
3
Touch the “User adjustment” key.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
7-91
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
5
Touch the “On” key. The drum refreshing process will begin.
Inch specifications
Close
Drum refresh
Refresh the drum when image blur or white dots appear
on the image.
On
Default setting - User adjustment
Metric specifications
Close
Drum refresh
Refresh the drum when image blur or white dots appear
on the image.
On
Default setting - User adjustment
The “Now drum refreshing.” message will appear and the
paper is fed from the multi-bypass tray to execute drum
refreshing.
Inch specifications
Now drum refreshing.
Orig. page
---------1 sided
Rear
Count/Set
11x81/2"
1 sided
Sort
Output
Inner tray
Metric specifications
Now drum refreshing.
Original
---------1-sided
Rtop / rear
Count/Set
A4
1-sided
Sort
Output
Inner tray
NOTE
To cancel drum refreshing, press the [Stop/Clear] key.
When drum refreshing completes after ejecting the paper,
the touch panel will return to the “Drum refresh” screen.
6
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4.
7
Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.
8
Touch the “End” key.
The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
7-92
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
6. Checking the total counter and printing out the counter report
Perform this procedure when you want to check, on the touch panel,
the total count of copies, etc., made on this machine as a whole. You
can also print out the information as a counter report.
3
The total number of copies and printouts made will be
displayed.
If you want to print out a counter report, touch the “Print
report” key.
Inch specifications
NOTES
• You can also check the total number of printouts made under each
of the optional printer, scanner a fax functions.
• You can additionally check the number of originals scanned on this
machine.
Close
Counter check
Number print.
Black & White:
Num. of pages
Copy
1,073
Copy
3
Original:
Printer
-------
Fax
-------
Total
1,073
scanner
-------
Fax
-------
Total
3
Print
report
Default setting
1
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the
[Default Setting/Counter] key.
The “Default setting”screen will be displayed.
Metric specifications
Close
Counter check
Number print.
Black & White:
Num. of pages
Copy
1,073
Copy
3
Original:
Printer
-------
Fax
-------
Total
1,073
scanner
-------
Fax
-------
Total
3
Print
report
Default setting
NOTE
Make sure there is 11" x 8 1/2" [A4] size paper loaded in one of the
drawers[cassettes] when you print out the counter report.
2
Touch the “Counter check” key.
The “Counter check” screen will be displayed.
4
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Once you are finished checking the counts, touch the “Close”
key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Black & White:
Machine
default
Document
Management
Close
Counter check
Number print.
Language
Num. of pages
Copy
1,073
Copy
3
Original:
Default setting
End
scanner
-------
Fax
-------
Total
3
Print
report
Number print.
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Close
Counter check
Black & White:
Document
Management
Total
1,073
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Machine
default
Fax
-------
Default setting
Metric specifications
Copy
default
Printer
-------
Num. of pages
Original:
Copy
1,073
Copy
3
Printer
-------
Fax
-------
Total
1,073
scanner
-------
Fax
-------
Total
3
Print
report
Default setting
5
Touch the “End” key.
The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
7-93
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
7. Box management default settings
Perform the following settings in order to manage the “boxes” that are used under the document management functions.
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the optional Hard Disk is installed.
(1) Box settings
Setting
Description
Reference
page
● Document list print out
This procedure will allow you to print out a list of all of the images stored in the box for the form
overlay mode, of the documents stored in the shared data box or of the documents stored in the
synergy print boxes.
7-95
● Reset box
This procedure will delete all of the image data that is stored in the “Form” box, as well as the
documents stored in the shared data box and the synergy print boxes. Make absolutely certain
that you do not need the corresponding data before you attempt to delete it.
7-96
● Box name & password /
Clear data in box
This procedure will allow you to change the name and password for any one of the synergy print
boxes as well as delete at one time all of the data registered in any one box. If you register a
password for any of these boxes, you will need to enter the registered password in order to print
out or delete any documents that are stored win that box.
7-97
● Document save time
This procedure will allow you to select the length of time that will elapse before each job in a
synergy print box is automatically deleted. Set this time to any number of days between 1 and 7.
* This setting cannot be made independently for each box.
7-98
(2) Accessing the box management default settings
Perform the following procedure when you want to access the
“Document Management” screen for each of the various box
management default settings.
2
Touch the “Document Management” key.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
1
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the
[Default Setting/Counter] key.
The “Default setting/Counter” screen will be displayed.
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
7-94
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
3
Use the keypad to enter the 4-digit management code.
The factory default setting for 30 cpm copiers is “3000”, for
40 cpm copiers is “4000” and for 50 cpm copiers is “5000”.
If the entered code matched the registered one, the
“Document Management” screen will be displayed.
(3) Making box management default settings
Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired
setting.
● Document list print out
Inch specifications
Close
Enter the administrator number
1
Touch the “Print the list” key under the box (“Form Box”,
“Shared Data Box” or “Synergy Print Box”) for which you
want to print out the document list.
Inch specifications
Document Management
Document Management
Shared Data Box
Metric specifications
Close
Enter the administrator number
Close
Synergy Print Box
Form box
Print
the list
Print
the list
Box
editing
Print
the list
Reset
Box
Reset
Box
Document
save term
Reset
Box
Default setting
Metric specifications
Document management
Close
Document management
4
Shared Data Box
Touch the key that corresponds to the desired box
management default setting.
Inch specifications
Synergy Print Box
Form box
Print
the list
Print
the list
Box
editing
Print
the list
Reset
Box
Reset
Box
Document
saving
Reset
Box
Default setting
Document Management
Document Management
Shared Data Box
Close
Synergy Print Box
2
A document list will be printed out for that box. once print out
is completed, the touch panel will return to the screen in step
1.
3
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
“Default setting”screen. Touch the “End” key. The touch panel
will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
Form box
Print
the list
Print
the list
Box
editing
Print
the list
Reset
Box
Reset
Box
Document
save term
Reset
Box
Default setting
Metric specifications
Document management
Close
Document management
Shared Data Box
Synergy Print Box
Form box
Print
the list
Print
the list
Box
editing
Print
the list
Reset
Box
Reset
Box
Document
saving
Reset
Box
Default setting
NOTES
• It is possible for you to change the 4-digit management code.
(See “Changing the management code” on page 7-56.)
• Refer to the desired procedure(s) explained under “(3) Making box
management default settings” and perform the corresponding
setting(s).
7-95
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Reset box
1
● Box name & password / Clear data in box
Touch the “Reset Box” key under the box (“Form Box”,
“Shared Data Box” or “Synergy Print Box”) that you want to
delete all data for.
A verification screen will be displayed.
1
Touch the “Box editing” key under “Synergy Print Box”. The
“Box editing” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Document Management
Inch specifications
Document Management
Document Management
Close
Shared Data Box
Document Management
Close
Shared Data Box
Synergy Print Box
Synergy Print Box
Print
the list
Print
the list
Box
editing
Print
the list
Reset
Box
Reset
Box
Document
save term
Reset
Box
Form box
Print
the list
Print
the list
Box
editing
Print
the list
Reset
Box
Reset
Box
Document
save term
Reset
Box
Form box
Default setting
Metric specifications
Default setting
Document management
Metric specifications
Close
Document management
Document management
Shared Data Box
Close
Document management
Shared Data Box
Synergy Print Box
Form box
Print
the list
Print
the list
Box
editing
Print
the list
Reset
Box
Reset
Box
Document
saving
Reset
Box
Synergy Print Box
Form box
Print
the list
Print
the list
Box
editing
Print
the list
Reset
Box
Reset
Box
Document
saving
Reset
Box
Default setting
Default setting
2
2
Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications
Either touch the synergy print box that contains the
information to be modified, or enter its number using the
keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key.
Inch specifications
Stop
Cancel
Box editing
Select box No.
Shared Data Box
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105
016 MNOP_0200104
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012
017 QRST_0200105
008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101
003
Reset this Box. Do you really want to reset?
Box No.
(with #key)
004 MNOP_0000004 009
IJKL_0000103
014 EFGH_0200102
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 015
Yes
018 UVWX_0200106
019 ABCD_0500101
IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102
No
Enter
1/ 5
Default setting - Document management
Metric specifications
Metric specifications
Stop
Job cancel
Box editing
Select box No.
Box No.
(With # key)
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006
Shared Data Box
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012
003
Reset this box. Do you really want to reset?
008 EFGH_0000102
004 MNOP_0000004 009
IJKL_0000103
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104
Yes
011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104
017 QRST_0200105
013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106
014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101
015
IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102
No
1/5
Default setting - Document management
If you selected “Yes”, all the data in the selected box will be
deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step
1. If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the
screen in step 1 without deleting any data.
3
7-96
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
“Default setting” screen.Touch the “End” key. The touch
panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
Enter
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
3
If you want to change the name of that box, first select “Box
name” and then touch the “Change #” key. Enter the new
name as desired.
Inch specifications
6
If you want to delete all of the data in that box, select “Reset
Box”. A verification screen will be displayed.
7
Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications
Close
Box007
Stop
Reset
Box
Setting mode
Default menu
Box name
Password
ABCD_0000101
(No register)
Box No. :
Box name :
007
ABCD_0000101
Reset this Box. Do you really want to reset?
Change #
Yes
Default setting - Document Management - Box editing
Metric specifications
No
Metric specifications
Close
Box 007
Stop
Default menu
Box name
Password
Reset
Box
Setting mode
ABCD_0000101
(No register)
Box No. :
Box name :
Yes
Default setting - Document management - Box editing
Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on
entering characters.
If you want to change the name of that box, first select
“Password” and then touch the “Change #” key. The
“Password” screen will be displayed.
Use the keypad to enter the new password for that box and
then touch the “Close” key. The new password will be
registered and the touch panel will return to the screen in
step 3.
No
If you selected “Yes”, all the data in the selected box will be
deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step
3.
If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the
screen in step 3 without deleting any data.
NOTE
5
ABCD_0000101
Reset this Box. Do you really want to reset?
Change #
4
007
8
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
9
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 1. Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will
return to the “Default setting” screen.Touch the “End” key.
The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
Inch specifications
Back
Password
Close
Enter new password.
Password
(Enter by #key)
Clear
Default setting - Document Management - Box editings - 007
Metric specifications
Back
Password
Close
Enter new password.
Password
(Enter #-key)
Clear
Default settund - Document management - Box editing - 007
NOTES
• The password can be between 1 and 8 digits long.
• If you decide not to register a password for that box, touch the
“Clear” key and then, with nothing entered in the password field,
touch the “Close” key.
7-97
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
● Document save time
1
Touch the “Document save term” [“Document saving”] key
under “Synergy Print Box”. The “Document data saving term”
[“Document data save period”] screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Document Management
Document Management
Close
Shared Data Box
Synergy Print Box
Form box
Print
the list
Print
the list
Box
editing
Print
the list
Reset
Box
Reset
Box
Document
save term
Reset
Box
Default setting
Metric specifications
Document management
Close
Document management
Shared Data Box
Synergy Print Box
Form box
Print
the list
Print
the list
Box
editing
Print
the list
Reset
Box
Reset
Box
Document
saving
Reset
Box
Default setting
2
Touch the “Set save term” [“Set save period”] key and then
touch “+” key or the “-” key to change the displayed save time
to the desired setting.
Inch specifications
Document data saving term
Back
Close
Back
Close
Set saving term for documents in synergy print box.
(1~7)
Set save
term
No time
limit
7
Days
+
–
Default setting - Document Management
Metric specifications
Document data save period
Set save period for documents in synergy print box.
(1~7)
Set save
period
No time
limit
7
Days
+
–
Default Setting - Document management
NOTES
• The save time can be set to any number of days between 1 and 7.
The factory default setting is for “7 Days”.
• If you want the data to be saved indefinitely, touch the “No time limit”
key to highlight it.
3
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 1.
4
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting” screen.Touch the “End” key. The
touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
7-98
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
8. Hard disk management
Perform the following procedure to access the “HDD management
mode” screen and check available space and/or delete any invalid
data on the optional Hard Disk.
1
3
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the
[Default setting/Counter] key.
The “Default setting” screen will be displayed.
Use the keypad to enter the 4-digit management code.
The factory default setting for 30 cpm copiers is “3000”, for
40 cpm copiers is “4000” and for 50 cpm copiers is “5000”.
If the entered code matched the registered one, the “HDD
Management mode” [“HDD Management”] screen will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
Close
Enter the administrator number
Metric specifications
Close
Enter the administrator number
2
Touch the “BOX Management” [“Hard Disk Management”]
key.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
4
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Touch the “On” key under “Check HDD capacity” (left side of
the touch panel). The overall size of the hard disk, as well
as the currently available space, will be displayed. If you
want to delete any invalid data, go to the next step. If you
are finished with this procedure, go directly to step 6.
Inch specifications
Metric specifications
HDD management mode
Default setting / Counter
Close
HDD management mode
Default setting
End
Check HDD capacity
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Delete invalid data
Able to check the free space and capacity
of HDD.
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Delete invalid deta from the HDD.
On
On
Default setting
Metric specifications
HDD management mode
Close
HDD management
Check HDD capacity
Delete invalid data
Able to check the free space and capacity
of HDD.
On
Delete invalid deta from the HDD.
On
Default setting
7-99
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
5
Touch the “On” key under “Delete invalid data” (right side of
the touch panel). The operation to delete invalid data will
start.
Inch specifications
HDD management mode
Close
HDD management mode
Item
Free Space
Capacity
Setting mode
18, 569 MB
19, 092 MB
Delete invalid data.
Delete invalid deta from the HDD.
On
Default setting
Metric specifications
HDD management mode
Close
HDD management
Item
Free space
Capacity
Setting mode
18, 569 MB
19, 092 MB
Delete invalid data.
Delete invalid deta from the HDD.
On
Default setting
6
7-100
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will
return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
9. Report print out
Perform the following procedure to print out one of the following
reports.
< Copy report >
Lists all of the values for the copy default settings.
< Machine report >
Lists all of the values for the machine default settings.
< Toner coverage report>
Lists the average toner density (black ratio) for each size of copy
paper used under each of the copy, printer and fax functions of this
machine.
3
Use the keypad to enter the 4-digit management code.
The factory default setting for 30 cpm copiers is “3000”, for
40 cpm copiers is “4000” and for 50 cpm copiers is “5000”.
Inch specifications
Close
Enter the administrator number
NOTE
Make sure that 11" x 8 1/2" [A4] size paper is loaded in one of the
drawers[cassettes].
Metric specifications
Close
Enter the administrator number
1
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the
[Default Setting/Counter] key.
The “Default setting” screen will be displayed.
NOTE
It is possible for you to change the 4-digit management code.
(See “Changing the management code” on page 7-56.)
4
Once the “Print report menu” screen is displayed, touch the
“Copy report” key, the “Machine report” key or the “Toner
coverage” key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications
2
Touch the “Print report” key.
Print report
Inch specifications
Copy
report
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Close
Print report menu
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Toner
coverage
Machine
report
Default setting
Metric specifications
Print report
Metric specifications
Close
Print report menu
Copy
report
Default setting / Counter
Toner
coverage
Machine
report
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Default setting
7-101
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
5
The “Printing report” screen will be displayed and printing of
the corresponding report will start.
Inch specifications
Printing report.
Orig. page
Count/Set
Output
Cancel
11x81/2"
1 sided
Sort
Cancel
Inner tray
Metric specifications
Printing report.
Or iginal
Count/set
Output
Plain
1-sided
Sort
Cancel
Inner tray
NOTE
If you want to cancel print out of the corresponding report, touch the
“Cancel” key.
When the report is complete, the touch panel will return to
the screen in step 4.
6
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
7
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
7-102
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
10. Changing the language used for messages
You can select the language that will be used on the touch panel.
The available languages are as follows:
Inch specification copiers:
English, French (“Français”), Spanish (“Español”) and Japanese
(“
”)
Metric specification copiers:
English, German (“DEUTSCH”), French (“FRANÇAIS”), Italian
(“ITALIANO”) and Spanish (“ESPAÑOL”)
1
3
Touch the key that corresponds to the language that you
want to use.
The language used on the touch panel will change to that
selected.
Inch specifications
Stop
Language
English
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the
[Default Setting/Counter] key.
The “Default setting/Counter” screen will be displayed.
Français
Español
Default setting
Metric specifications
Stop
Language
English
Deutsch
Español
Italiano
Français
Default setting
2
Touch the “Language” key. The “Language” screen will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Metric specifications
Default setting / Counter
Default setting
End
Copy
default
Machine
default
Document
Management
Language
Management
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
7-103
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
11. Entering characters
Use the following screens to enter characters when registering names
for programs and for departments, etc.
Capital keyboard
Stop
Name to display
(1) Character input screens
AllDel.
!
@
Q
Inch specifications
7
9
8
Stop
Name to display
R
X
T
F
C
^
Y
G
V
Letter
&
U
H
B
End
2
3
w
a
4
e
s
z
Capital
d
x
5
r
f
c
6
t
g
v
Letter
7
y
h
b
j
n
9
i
0
o
k
m
Num./Sym.
p
l
,
=
[
;
.
3
4
<
{
:
>
}
l
"
?
Stop
End
Limit:16 letters including #
AllDel.
`
]
\
'
/
Del. prev
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
[
\
]
^
_
'
{
l
}
~
Space
5
1 Entry field
Displays entered information.
2 “Capital” key
Touch this key when you want to enter uppercase letters.
3 “Letter” key
Touch this key when you want to enter lowercase letters.
4 “Num. /Sym.” key
Touch this key when you want to enter numerals and symbols.
5 “Space” key
Touch this key when you want to enter a space.
6 “AllDel.” key
Touch this key when you want to delete all characters that have
been entered to this point.
7 “r” and “R” keys
Touch these keys when you want to move the cursor.
8 “Del. prev” key
Touch this key when you want to delete the character to the left of
the cursor.
9 “Stop” key
Touch this key when you want to cancel character input and return
to the previous screen.
0 “End” key
Touch this key when you want to register the entered information.
7-104
P
L
+
Numeral/Symbol keyboard
Capital
2
M
_
Space
Del. prev
8
u
O
K
Num./Sym.
A
q
I
)
Name to display
AllDel.
1
(
J
N
Del. prev
*
0
Limit:16 letters including #
A
%
D
Capital
6
$
E
S
Z
Letter keyboard
#
W
A
1
End
Limit:16 letters including #
A
Letter
Num./Sym.
Space
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
Metric specifications
Capital keyboard
Letter keyboard
7
1
8
0
9
!
Stop
Name to display
AllDel.
End
@
Q
AllDel.
2
q
3
w
a
4
e
s
z
Capital
r
d
x
5
t
f
c
6
y
g
v
Letter
7
u
h
b
Del. prev
8
i
j
n
Symbol 1
9
0
o
k
p
l
m
,
-
=
[
;
.
Z
\
%
R
D
X
T
F
C
Letter
^
Y
G
V
&
B
Symbol 1
'
3
4
5
(
I
J
N
)
O
K
M
P
L
<
_
+
{
:
>
Symbol 2
~
}
l
`
"
?
Space
Space
Symbol 1 keyboard
Stop
Name to display
AllDel.
6
1 Entry field
Displays entered information.
2 “Capital” key
Touch this key when you want to enter uppercase letters.
3 “Letter” key
Touch this key when you want to enter lowercase letters.
4 “Symbol 1” key
Touch this key when you want to enter certain symbols.
5 “Symbol 2” key
Touch this key when you want to enter certain symbols.
6 “Space” key
Touch this key when you want to enter a space.
7 “AllDel.” key
Touch this key when you want to delete all characters that have
been entered to this point.
8 “r” and “R” keys
Touch these keys when you want to move the cursor.
9 “Del. prev” key
Touch this key when you want to delete the character to the left of
the cursor.
0 “Stop” key
Touch this key when you want to cancel character input and return
to the previous screen.
! “End” key
Touch this key when you want to register the entered information.
Capital
End
Limit:16 letters including #
A
2
U
H
Del. prev
*
`
/
Symbol 2
$
E
S
Capital
`
]
#
W
A
Limit: 16 letters inc. # key
A
End
Limit:16 letters including #
A
!
1
Stop
Name to display
Letter
Symbol 1
Symbol 2
Del. prev
Space
Symbol 2 keyboard
Stop
Name to display
AllDel.
Capital
End
Limit:16 letters including #
A
Letter
Symbol 1
Symbol 2
Del. prev
Space
7-105
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
3
(2) Character input procedure
Touch the “b”, “c”, “d” and “e” keys, in that order, on the
keyboard.
Inch specifications
[Example] “Abcde”
Stop
Name to display
1
Touch the “Capital” key. The “Capital” will be displayed. Touch
the “A” key on the keyboard.
AllDel.
1
Inch specifications
2
q
3
w
a
Stop
Name to display
End
Q
#
W
A
$
E
S
%
R
D
^
T
F
&
Y
G
U
(
I
J
5
r
d
x
6
t
y
f
c
7
g
v
Letter
u
h
b
Del. prev
8
9
i
j
n
0
o
k
p
l
m
,
Num./Sym.
-
=
[
;
.
X
C
V
B
N
Letter
)
O
K
_
P
L
+
{
:
-
/
}
Metric specifications
l
"
M
<
>
Stop
?
Num./Sym.
AllDel.
2
q
Metric specifications
3
w
a
Stop
Name to display
Q
W
A
E
S
Z
$
%
R
D
X
T
F
C
^
Y
G
V
U
(
I
J
N
)
O
K
_
P
L
M
Symbol 1
5
r
d
x
6
t
y
f
c
7
g
v
u
h
b
Letter
Del. prev
8
9
i
j
n
o
k
p
l
m
Symbol 1
0
,
=
[
;
.
<
+
{
:
>
}
`
l
"
?
Symbol 2
/
Symbol 2
4
Space
Once you have finished entering the information, touch the
“End” key.
Stop
AllDel.
1
2
q
Stop
Name to display
a
Del. prev
Capital
#
A
S
Z
$
E
%
R
D
X
F
C
V
&
Y
G
Letter
Capital
^
T
*
U
H
B
(
I
J
N
)
O
K
L
M
<
Num./Sym.
_
P
+
{
:
>
4
e
s
z
AllDel.
W
3
w
End
Limit:16 letters including #
@
End
Limit:16 letters including #
Abcde
A
5
r
d
x
6
t
y
f
c
7
g
v
Letter
u
h
b
Del. prev
8
9
i
j
n
0
o
k
p
l
m
,
Num./Sym.
-
=
[
;
.
`
]
\
'
/
Space
}
l
Metric specifications
"
?
Stop
Name to display
Space
End
Limit: 16 letters inc. # key
Abcde
AllDel.
1
Metric specifications
2
q
Stop
Name to display
!
@
Q
#
W
A
Z
$
E
S
Capital
7-106
a
Del. prev
Capital
%
R
D
X
F
C
Letter
^
T
G
V
&
Y
H
B
Symbol 1
*
U
J
N
(
I
)
O
K
M
Symbol 2
L
<
_
P
:
>
+
{
~
}
"
?
Space
l
`
4
e
s
z
AllDel.
3
w
End
Limit:16 letters including #
A
`
Inch specifications
Space
Inch specifications
Q
\
-
Touch the “Letter” key.
!
]
'
Name to display
2
`
Del. prev
*
H
B
Letter
Capital
&
e
Capital
AllDel.
#
4
s
z
End
Limit:16 letters including #
@
End
Limit: 16 letters inc. # key
Space
1
!
\
Space
Abcde
Capital
]
'
Name to display
Z
`
Del. prev
*
H
e
Capital
AllDel.
@
4
s
z
Limit:16 letters including #
!
End
Limit:16 letters including #
Abcde
r
d
x
5
t
f
c
Letter
6
y
g
v
7
u
h
b
Symbol 1
9
i
j
n
Del. prev
8
0
o
k
m
Symbol 2
p
l
,
[
;
.
=
`
]
'
/
Space
\
`
Section 8
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
(1) Document Processor
The Document Processor automatically feeds one-sided originals one
by one for scanning. It also reverses two-sided originals automatically
for duplex copying and page separation copying.
3 Document Processor part names
6
5
2
1
3
4
1 Originals that can be used with the Document Processor
• Sheet originals only
• Original weights: Single-sided original of 35 g/m2 to 160 g/m2 twosided original of 50 g/m2 to 120g g/m2
• Original sizes: 11" x 17"/A3 (maximum) to 5 1/2" x 8 1/2"/A5R
(minimum)
• Capacity:
100 sheets (8 1/2" x 11"/A4 and smaller, 75 g/m2 or 80 g/m2)
70 sheets (8 1/2" x 14"/Folio and larger, 75 g/m2 or 80 g/m2)
30 sheets in auto selection mode
1 Original table
(Place the originals here.)
2 Original insertion guides
(Adjust the guides to the width of the originals.)
3 Document Processor open/close handle
(Hold this handle when opening and closing the Document
Processor.)
4 Original eject cover
(Copied originals are stored here.)
5 Document Processor original cover
(Open this cover to remove an original misfed in the Document
Processor.)
6 Original set indicator
(Lights green when the originals are set.)
2 Precautions for the use of Document Processor
Do not use any of the originals given below with the Document
Processor. Also do not set originals with punch holes or tear-off strips
positioned at the leading edge.
• Transparency films
• Carbon paper and extremely creased or folded originals, originals of
sort material such as vinyl
• Non-square originals, wet originals, originals with adhesive tape or
glue
• Originals bundled with a paper clip or staple (if inevitable, remove
the paper clip or staple and straighten out the creases and folds
before setting the originals)
• Clipped out originals, originals with slippery surface
• Originals with still-wet whiteout
• Originals with creases (if inevitable, straighten out the creases
before setting the originals)
8-1
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
4 How to set originals in the Document Processor
1
Adjust the original insertion guides to the original size.
IMPORTANT!
Do not set originals exceeding the limit indicated on the sticker
attached on the rear original insertion guide. Setting more originals
than specified may cause original misfeed.
5 How to set originals on the platen
When using an original that cannot be set in the Document Processor,
such as a book or magazine, open the Document Processor and
place it on the platen.
1
Hold the Document Processor open/close handle and open
the Document Processor.
* Before opening the Document Processor, check that no
original is present on the original table or original eject
cover. If present, the original may fall off when the
Document Processor is opened.
2
Set the original with the side to be copied facing downward.
Be sure to align the original with the original size scales.
NOTE
Before setting the originals in the Document Processor, check that no
original from the previous operation is remaining on the original eject
cover. Originals remaining on the original eject cover may cause
original misfeed.
2
Set the originals on the original table in correct sequence
with the side to be copied facing upward. Securely insert the
leading edge of the originals into the Document Processor as
far as they will go.
* When setting large size paper such as 8 1/2" x 11", A4R or
larger, pull out the support extension.
8-2
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
3
Hold the Document Processor open/close handle and close
the Document Processor.
6 Auto selection/Filing mode
With this mode, when you are using the Document Processor without
pressing one of the paper size keys, and thereby, specifying a desired
paper size, originals will be checked one by one for their size, and you
can select to either have paper of the same size as each original
selected automatically (auto selection) or to have the originals all
copied onto one single size of copy paper (filing).
11"✕17"
(A3)
8 1/2"✕14"
(Folio)
B4
11"✕8 1/2"
(A4)
8 1/2"✕11"
(A4R)
B5
IMPORTANT!
Do not press the Document Processor against the platen with force.
Doing so many cause damage to the glass material.
IMPORTANT!
CAUTION
DO NOT leave the Document Processor open as
there is a danger of personal injury.
• You can set up to 30 originals in the Document Processor in this
mode.
Inch specifications
• Only 11" x 8 1/2" and 11" x 17", or 8 1/2" x 14" and 8 1/2" x 11", size
originals can be used together in this mode, and the originals must
be arranged together so that their widths coincide.
Metric specifications
• Only A4 and A3, B5 and B4, or A4R and Folio, size originals can be
used together in this mode, and the originals must be arranged
together so that their widths coincide.
Metric specifications (Asia Pacific)
• Only A4 and A3, B5 and B4, size originals can be used together in
this mode, and the originals must be arranged together so that their
widths coincide.
● Differing finished sizes (Auto selection)
Each original will copied onto the same size copy paper as that
original.
8-3
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
● Matching finished sizes (Filing)
4
All originals will copied onto the same size copy paper.
Specify the size of the very first original to be copied and
then touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Place originals in Document processor.
Register
Auto Selection
Set
11x81/2"
Back
Close
1st pg. orig.
Off
81/2x11"/
11x81/2"
Auto
selection
81/2x14"/
11x17"
Able to scan mix size originals at
one time using Document processor,
and copy them in unified paper size.
Electronic
Filing
Metric specifications
1
Set the originals to be copied in the Document Processor.
2
Press the [Auto Selection] key.
The lamp in the [Auto Selection] key will light and the auto
selection/filing mode screen will be displayed.
Register
Auto selection
Set
Paper size
Place originals in Document processor.
Back
Close
1st original
Off
A4
A4
/B5
/
Auto
selection
A3 /B4
Folio
/
Able to scan different size originals at
one time using Document processor,
and copy them to unified paper size.
Electronic
Filing
NOTE
In order to have the binding direction set properly for stapling or hole
punching, etc., finished copies, be sure to specify the size of the very
first original being copied.
5
Select the desired drawer[cassette].
Inch specifications
Paper Size Set
11x81/2"
Ready to copy.
3
Touch the “Auto selection” key or the “Electronic Filing” key,
as appropriate.
Combine
11x81/2"
Plain
Orig.image
quality
1
8 /2x11"
Color
If you selected “Auto selection”, go directly to step 6.
11x81/2"
Plain
11x81/2"
Recycled
If you selected “Electronic Filing”, go to the next step.
Basic
APS
Bypass
Plain
AMS
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
User choice
Function
Sort:Off
Sort:On
Reduce
/Enlarge
Reduce
/Enlarge
Sort/
Finished
Program
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto Selection
Metric specifications
Set
11x81/2"
Register
Back
Paper Size
Ready to copy.
Close
Set
Merge copy
Plain
Off
Auto
selection
Able to copy mix size originals at
one time using Document processor.
Colour
Plain
Electronic
Filing
Image
quality
APS
Bypass
Plain
User choice
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Auto selection
Off
Auto
selection
Electronic
Filing
8-4
Register
Back
Able to copy mixed size originals at
one time using Document processor.
Set
Close
6
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
Recycled
Basic
AMS
Press the [Start] key.
Copying will start.
Function
Sort:Off
Sort:On
Reduce/
Enlarge
Program
Sort/
Finished
Reduce/
Enlarge
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
(2) Paper Feeder
Two Paper Feeders of the same type as drawer[cassette] in the main
body can be added.
Capacity and the paper loading method is the same as those for the
standard drawer[cassette] in the main unit.
* Paper misfed in the optional Paper Feeder can be removed by
opening its left cover.
IMPORTANT!
• If copies come out curled or are tacked unevenly, turn the paper in
the drawer[cassette] over.
• When copying onto special paper such as OHP film and other
transparencies, use Non-sort mode.
1 Copying in the Sort:ON mode
(3) Paper Feeder
The Paper Feeder holds up to 3,000 sheets of 11" x 8 1/2" [A4 or B5
(B5 is for Asia-Pacific specification copiers only)] size standard paper.
Pull the Paper Feeder out towards you as far as it will go, and then
load up to 1,500 sheets of paper in each rows.
* The cover on the left side of the Paper Feeder is prepared to remove
misfed paper.
This mode automatically sorts copies made from multiple originals
into sets identical to the originals.
1
Touch the “Sort/Finished” key.
The “Sort/Finished” screen will appear.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig. size
Combine
Exposure
mode
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
User choice
Set
11x81/2"
Function
Program
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
(4) Document Finisher
Select
paper
2-sided/
Split
Select
size orig.
Merge copy
Exposure
mode
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
User choice
Function
Set
Program
This unit lets you store a large volume of copies and shifts the
position of each copy set for ease of sorting. It can staple finished
copy sets and bind them. It is also possible to use the Document
Finisher to punch holes in them for filling purposes (optional). For
more detailed information, refer to the Operation Guide for the
Document Finisher.
8-5
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
2
Touch the “Sort:On” key.
(Only for metric specification copiers produced)
The “Output each page” key will be changed to the “1 set”
key.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Sort/Finished
Sor t
Offset
Set
11x81/2"
Staple
Punch
Back
2 Copying in the Sort:OFF mode
This mode automatically groups copies made from multiple originals,
with all the copies produced from an individual original stacked
together in one set.
1
Inch specifications
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Sort:Off
Off
Sort:On
On
Staple
mode
Rear
Left top
corner
Metric specifications
Paper size
Register
Sort/Finished
Sor t
Group
Sort:Off
Off
Sort:On
Output
each page
Staple
Staple Mode
Punch
Left top
corner
Touch the “On” [“1 set”] key.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The message display returns to the
Function screen.
5
Set the originals to be copied.
6
Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start. The
number of scanned originals will be displayed.
Select
orig. size
Combine
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Function
Program
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Punch Mode
3
2 sided/
Separation
Metric specifications
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original.
Back Edge
Select
paper
User choice
Set
11x81/2"
Exposure
mode
Basic
Set
Back
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Punch
mode
Ready to copy.
Touch the “Sort/Finished” key.
The “Sort/Finished” screen will appear.
Select
paper
2-sided/
Split
Select
size orig.
Merge copy
Exposure
mode
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
2
User choice
Function
Set
Program
Touch the “Sort:Off” key.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Sort/Finished
Sor t
Offset
Staple
Punch
Off
Sort:On
On
Staple
mode
Left top
corner
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Sort/Finished
8-6
Close
Punch
mode
Rear
Repeat this operation for all originals when using the platen. After all
the originals have been scanned, touch the “Scanning finished” key.
8
Back
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Sort:Off
NOTE
7
Set
11x81/2"
Sor t
Copying will begin and finished copies will be ejected face
down onto the tray with each full set shifted slightly from the
previous one.
Group
Sort:Off
Off
Sort:On
Output
each page
Staple
Punch
Staple Mode
Punch Mode
Remove all of the finished copies from the tray.
Set
Back
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original.
Back Edge
Left top
corner
3
Touch the “On” [“Output each page”] key.
4
Touch the “Close” key. The message display returns to the
Function screen.
5
Set the originals to be copied.
6
Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start. The
number of scanned originals will be displayed.
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
3
NOTE
Touch the key that corresponds to the desired stapling style.
Inch specifications
Repeat this operation for all originals when using the platen. After all
the originals have been scanned, press the “Scanning finished” key.
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
11x81/2"
Back
Staple mode
Staple
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
7
8
Copying will begin and finished copies will be ejected face
down onto the tray with each full set shifted slightly from the
previous one.
None
1 staple
Limited number of staple pages.
The limit is set in setting mode.
When selecting staple function
the offset can not be combined.
2 staples
Rear
Left top
corner
Remove all of the finished copies from the tray.
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
3 Copying in the Staple mode
Back
Staple Mode
This mode automatically staples each copy set.
Set
Staple
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original.
1
Touch the “Sort/Finished” key.
The “Sort/Finished” screen will appear.
None
Inch specifications
2 staples
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
orig. size
Combine
Exposure
mode
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Function
Paper size
Select
paper
2-sided/
Split
Select
size orig.
Merge copy
Exposure
mode
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
2
Function
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Program
Ready to copy.
User choice
Left top
corner
Set
Metric specifications
Basic
Back Edge
* Stapling will be accomplished as shown in the illustration
(as viewed from the front of the copies).
2 sided/
Separation
User choice
Cannot combine sort function and
staple.
11x81/2"
Select
paper
Basic
Limited number of pages to be stapled.
The limitation depends on setting mode.
1 staple
Set
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Program
Touch the “Staple mode” key.
The staple mode set-up screen will appear.
4
Set the originals to be copied. Check the direction of the
original top side.
5
Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start. The
number of scanned originals will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Sort/Finished
Sor t
Offset
Set
11x81/2"
Staple
Punch
Back
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Sort:Off
Off
Sort:On
On
Staple
mode
NOTE
Punch
mode
Rear
Left top
corner
Repeat this operation for all originals when using the platen. After all
the originals have been scanned, touch the “Scanning finished” key.
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Register
Sort/Finished
Sor t
Group
Sort:Off
Off
Sort:On
Output
each page
Staple
Punch
Staple Mode
Punch Mode
Set
Back
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original.
Back Edge
6
Copying will begin and the copies will be automatically
stapled and ejected face down onto the tray.
7
Remove all of the finished copies from the tray.
Left top
corner
8-7
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
4 Copying in the Hole Punch mode (optional)
3
Copies can be automatically hole punched.
1
Touch the “Sort/Finished” key.
The “Sort/Finished” screen will appear.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig. size
Combine
Exposure
mode
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
Orig.image
quality
Margin/
Centering
Page #
Forms
Overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Basic
User choice
Set
11x81/2"
Function
<Inch specification copiers>
Touch the “2 holes” key or the “3 holes” key, as appropriate.
The screen to select the hole positioning will appear.
<Metric specification copiers>
Touch the “4 holes” key. The screen to select the hole
positioning will appear.
* If your copier has been set for 2-hole punching, you can
have the “4 holes” key changed in order to display it as a “2
holes” key.
Inch specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Set
11x81/2"
Back
Punch mode
Punch
P r ev i ew
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Program
None
Metric specifications
2 holes
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Select
paper
2-sided/
Split
Select
size orig.
Merge copy
Exposure
mode
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down
Sort/
Finished
Erase
Mode
Cover
Mode
Booklet
3 holes
Set
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
User choice
Function
Set
Back
Punch Mode
Basic
Left top
corner
Rear
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original.
Preview
Punch
Program
None
4 holes
Inch specifications
Paper size
11x8 /2"
Register
Sort/Finished
Sor t
Offset
Set
1
Staple
Punch
Back
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Sort:Off
Off
Sort:On
On
Staple
mode
Paper size
Register
Group
Staple
Punch
Off
Staple Mode
Punch Mode
Sort:On
Output
each page
Set
Back
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original.
Back Edge
Back
Preview
Close
Check direction
None
Left side
2 holes
Right side
3 holes
Top side
Left top
corner
Metric specifications
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Back
Punch Mode
Position
None
Left side
4 holes
Right side
Preview
Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original.
Back Edge
Left top
corner
* Hole punching will be accomplished as shown in the
illustration (as viewed from the front of the copies).
Inch specifications
Metric specifications
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
When the optional punch unit is not installed, the “Punch mode” key
will not appear.
Set
11x81/2"
A
IMPORTANT!
Left top
corner
Rear
Top side
8-8
Set
11x81/2"
Position
Punch
Sort:Off
Paper size
Ready to copy.
Check direction of
original top side.
Left top
corner
Metric specifications
Sor t
Inch specifications
Punch
Rear
Sort/Finished
Touch the key that corresponds to the desired position of holes.
Punch mode
Punch
mode
Ready to copy.
4
A
Ready to copy.
Left top
corner
Back Edge
A
2
Touch the “Punch mode” key.
The hole “Punch” screen will appear.
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
IMPORTANT!
The position of the holes on each page may differ very slightly due to
the fact that holes are punched in one sheet at a time.
5
Set the originals to be copied.
6
Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start. The
number of scanned originals will be displayed.
(6) Document Finisher
The Document Finisher stores a large quantity copies, and sorts
multiple sets (Sort: ON) or groups copies made from multiple
originals, with all the copies produced from an individual original
grouped together in one set (Sort: OFF). It is also possible to use the
Document Finisher to staple sorted copy sets.
For detailed information on the sort mode, refer to the Operation
Guide for the Document Finisher. For more information on the
corresponding procedures, refer to “(4) Document Finisher” on page
8-5 of this guide.
NOTE
Repeat this operation for all originals when using the platen. After all
the originals have been scanned, touch the “Scanning finished” key.
7
Copying will begin and the copies will be automatically
punched and ejected face down onto the tray.
8
Remove all of the finished copies from the tray.
* Stapling will be accomplished as shown in the illustration
(at the top and from the front of the copies).
(5) Document Finisher
The Document Finisher stores a large quantity copies, and sorts
multiple sets by shifting the position that each one is ejected. It is also
possible to use the Document Finisher to staple the copy sets or
punch holes in them for filling purposes.
For detailed information on the sort mode, refer to the Operation
Guide for the Document Finisher. For more information on the
corresponding procedures, refer to “(4) Document Finisher” on page
8-5 of this guide.
A
A
(7) Built-in Finisher
The finisher stores a large quantity of copies. It can also sorts multiple
copies into sets by shifting the eject position. Paginated copies can be
stapled, too.
1
* Stacking mode
If the number of copies to be made in the Non-sort mode is set to a
number greater than the acceptable limit (250 sheets), the finished
copies will be ejected onto the Sort tray.
2
1 Sort tray
2 Finisher tray
8-9
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
* Sorted copies are ejected to the Sort tray.
* When setting large size paper such as 8 1/2" x 11", A4R or larger,
pull out the support extension.
3
Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple holder.
4
Hold the staple holder in one hand and the new staple
cartridge in the other and insert the new staple cartridge
making sure the direction of insertion is correct.
* The arrow on the staple cartridge indicates the correct
direction of insertion.
5
Make sure the new staple cartridge is completely inserted all
the way into the staple holder and then remove the paper
tape covering the staple cartridge.
6
Replace the staple holder back in its original position in the
Stapling Unit. Once it has been fully inserted, it will click into
place.
1 Refilling the Stapling Unit
1
Open the stapler front cover towards you.
2
Pull out the staple holder.
8-10
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
2 Clearing a staple jam
1
(8) Job Separator
Remove the staple cartridge referring to the “1 Refilling the
Stapling Unit”.
Push up on the tab “A” on the protective faceplate in order to
raise the faceplate.
A
2
When using the optional printer function, the paper eject point can be
changed according to the used function, making it easier to sort
paper.
Copied paper can be ejected to the Job Separator (upper section).
See “Copy eject location” in Machine default setting on page 7-49.
* The Job Separator can store up to 100 copies. When making 101 or
more copies, copying will stop when 100 copies are made. Copying
will resume automatically when the copied sheets are removed.
Remove the jammed staple from the tip of the staple
cartridge (the end where staples are set).
(9) Hard Disk
3
Lower the protective faceplate back into its original position.
4
Replace the staple holder back in its original position in the
Stapling Unit. Once it has been fully inserted, it will click into
place.
5
Lift up the Stapling Unit slightly and than lower it into its
original position.
6
Close the stapler front cover securely.
The Hard Disk is required in order to use the following modes and
functions of your copier.
• Job reservation during copying
• Form overlay of registered forms
• Repeat copying
• Document management functions
• Using the output management functions to change the job printing
order, cancel and delete print jobs, and verify content
It is also possible to register up to 1000 department ID-codes under
document management.
8-11
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
(10) Key Counter
The Key Counter determines the number of copies that have been
made. It is useful for copier centralized management on a department
or even company level.
* The Key Counter may count up when either data from a computer is
printed out or fax pages are printed out.
• Setting the Key Counter
Insert the Key Counter securely into the Key Counter opening.
(12) Printer Kit
If the Printer Kit is installed, this copier can be used as a printer.
For more detailed information, see the printer’s Operation Guide.
Since the network board is equipped, this copier can also be used as
a network printer, allowing access from multiple computers. The
optional printer network kit and hard disk are also available.
(13) Printer/Scanner Kit
If the Printer/Scanner Kit is installed, this copier can be used as a
printer or a network scanner. For more detailed information, see the
Operation Guide for the Printer/Scanner Kit. Since the network board
is equipped, this copier can also be used as a network printer,
allowing access from multiple computers. The optional printer network
kit and hard disk are also available.
NOTE
When the Key Counter function is used, copies cannot be made
unless the Key Counter is inserted into the copier. If the Key Counter
is not inserted securely, “Insert key counter.” appears on the message
display.
(11) Document Tray
The Document Tray lets you place originals and other documents next
to the machine before using them, etc. It also contains space for
storing paper clips, etc.
8-12
(14) Fax Kit
If the Fax Kit is installed, this copier can be used as a fax. Also if the
Fax Kit is used together with the optional Printer/Scanner Kit, this
copier can be used as a network fax, allowing transmission and
reception by a computer. For details, see the Operation Guide for the
fax.
* In some cases, this function may not be used.
Section 9
TROUBLESHOOTING
1. If one of the following messages is displayed
When any of the following messages appears on the message display, take the indicated action.
Message
Procedure
Reference
page
“Close xxx cover x.”
The cover indicated is open. Close the cover securely.
——
“Add paper in drawer.”
[“Add paper in cassette.”]
There is no paper in the drawer[cassette] indicated. Load paper.
3-1
“Set drawer. ”
[“Close paper cassette.”]
One of the drawers[cassettes] is not closed properly. Pull it out and push it back in all
the way.
——
“Paper drawer is out of order. Select
another paper drawer.”
[“Paper cassette is out of order. Select
other paper cassette. ”]
The drawer[cassette] currently in use is out of order and cannot be used. Contact
your service representative immediately. Continue copying using another
drawer[cassette].
——
“Check paper size.”
No paper that can be used in the selected mode is loaded. Check the paper.
——
“Reposition original.”
The orientation of the original and the selected paper are different. Change the
orientation of the original. If the [Start] key is pressed, same-size copying will be
performed.
——
“Exceeds pre registered copying
quantity.”
[“Copy limit for this ID-code has been
reached. No copying possible.”]
The number of copies reached the limit set in the copy management mode and no
more copies can be made. Clear the copy count from the management mode.
7-1
“Ready to copy. Add toner.”
There is not enough toner in the copier. Replace the toner container immediately as
only one copy can be made at a time.
10-3
“Add toner to resume copying.”
There is not enough toner in the copier to make copies. Replace the toner container
immediately.
10-3
“System error. Main switch off/on.”
A system error has occurred. Turn the power switch OFF and then ON.
——
“System error. Disconnect power plug
from the socket.”
A system error has occurred. Disconnect the power plug from the outlet and connect
it again.
——
* If the optional Fax Kit is installed in your copier, when the power cord is unplugged from the outlet, original data or reserved communication
information stored in the memory may be lost.
9-1
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING
Message
Procedure
Reference
page
“Call service.”
Open and close the front cover. If the same message appears again, make a note of
the “C” and the number appearing with it, turn the power switch OFF (O), unplug the
power cord from the outlet, and contact your service representative or authorized
service center.
——
“Time for maintenance.”
Periodic maintenance is necessary to keep your copier in good condition.
Contact your service representative or an authorized service center as soon as
possible.
——
“Close Document processor cover.”
The Document Processor original cover of the optional document processor is open.
Close the cover securely.
——
“Memory full.”
The copier memory is full. Either print out or clear all scanned data. It is not possible
to copy or scan another original until one of these two operations is performed.
The copier memory size and the capacity for scanning originals are shown below.
——
Number of originals that can be scanned*
Standard memory (64MB): approximately 322 pages
When the optional Hard Disk is installed (20GB): approximately 70,000 pages**
* When using our standard original (A4 original, 6% text)
** The maximum number of originals that can be scanned at one time is 999
(11" x 8 1/2" [A4]).
“Paper misfeed.”
“Paper misfeed. Careful for Drum.”
If paper is misfed, the copier will stop and the location of the misfeed will appear on
the message display. Remove the misfed paper with the power switch turned ON ( | )
by following the appropriate procedure. If “Careful for Drum.” is displayed, be sure not
to touch the drum area that is located inside the machine when removing the
jammed paper.
9-4
“Duplex tray inoperable, call service.”
[“Duplex unit is out of order. Call
service.”]
The duplex unit is out of order and duplex copying is not possible.
Contact your service representative immediately.
——
“Clean the slit glass for original fed from
DP.” [“Clean the slit glass for original
fed.”]
The slit glass is dirty. This may result in black lines or other blemishes appearing on
copies when you use the optional Document Processor, so you should perform the
cleaning operation on the slit glass.
10-1
“Attach Finisher.”
Connect the optional Document Finisher securely to the copier.
——
“Finisher is out of order. Detach
Finisher.”
The optional Document Finisher is out of order and cannot be used for the moment.
Contact your service representative or an authorized service center as soon as
possible.
——
“Paper capacity exceeded. Remove
paper from Finisher.”
The maximum number of sheets that can be stored on the optional Document
Finisher has been exceeded. Remove the copies from the Document Finisher.
——
“Remove paper form inner tray of
Finisher.”
Paper has been misfed inside the optional Document Finisher. See the Document
Finisher’s Operation Guide and remove the paper.
9-2
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING
Message
Procedure
Reference
page
“Out of staples. Add staples.”
[“Stapler empty. Add staples.”]
There are no staples in the optional Document Finisher. See the Document
Finisher’s Operation Guide and replace the staple cartridge.
——
“Cannot staple this size.”
[“Cannot staple this paper size.”]
Stapling is not possible with small size paper. For details, see the optional Document
Finisher’s Operation Guide.
——
“Empty waste punch box.”
The hole punch chad container in the optional Document Finisher is full. Refer to the
Operation Guide for your Document Finisher and dispose of the waste hole punch
chads.
——
“Check the waste punch box.”
[“Check Punch Hole box.”]
The hole punch chad container in the optional Document Finisher is not set properly.
Refer to the Operation Guide for your Document Finisher and set the hole punch
chad container properly.
——
“Replace the waste toner box.”
The waste toner box is filled with waste toner. Replace the waste toner box with a
new one.
10-3
2. If one of these indicators lights or flashes
If one of the indicators to the left of the [Copier] key, the [Printer] key, or the [Scanner] key either lights orange or flashes orange, carry out the
appropriate procedure indicated below.
Indication
Lights orange or flashes
orange
Procedure
Check the appropriate response to the
message, and perform the
corresponding procedure.
Reference
page
–
9-3
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING
3. When paper misfeeds
If a paper misfeed occurs, a message will be displayed in the touch panel about the misfeed and copying will stop. Leave the power switch ON ( | )
and refer to “(2) Removal procedures” to remove the jammed paper.
Inch specification
Paper misfeed.
Metric specification
Paper misfeed.
Careful for Drum.
Careful for Drum.
1. Open left cover1.
2. Remove paper.
3. Close cover.
1. Open left cover1.
2. Remove paper.
3. Close cover.
JAM 30
JAM 30
(1) Cautions
(2) Removal procedures
1 Misfeed in paper feed section
WARNING
High voltage is present in the charger section. Take
sufficient care when working in this area, as there is
a danger of electrical shock.
• Misfeed in drawer[cassette] (JAM 10 to 13, 15 to 17)
If the message below appears, a misfeed has occurred in the
drawer[cassette] (or optional Paper Feeder). Remove the misfed
paper using the procedure given below.
Inch specifications
Paper misfeed.
CAUTION
1. Open cassette1.
2. Remove paper.
3. Set cassette.
The copier’s fixing unit is extremely hot. Take
sufficient care when working in this area, as there is
a danger of getting burned.
JAM 10
Metric specifications
Paper misfeed.
• Do not reuse misfed paper.
• If paper is torn during removal, be sure to remove all loose scraps
from inside the copier, or they could cause misfeed later.
• After misfed paper has been removed, warm-up will begin. The
Misfeed indicator will turn off and the copier will return to the same
settings prior to the misfeed.
1. Open cassette1.
2. Remove paper.
3. Set cassette.
JAM 10
1
9-4
Open the drawer[cassette].
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING
2
3
Remove the misfed paper while taking care not to tear it.
* If the paper should be torn, remove all the scraps from the
inside the copier.
2
Remove the misfed paper.
3
Raise the duplex unit to remove the misfed paper.
4
Remove the misfed paper in the output section.
Close the drawer[cassette] slowly.
• Misfeed in left cover 1 (JAM 30, 40 to 44, 46, 47, 50 to 53, 60,
61)
If the message below appears, a misfeed has occurred in the left
cover 1. Remove the misfed paper using the procedure given below.
Inch specifications
Paper misfeed.
Careful for Drum.
1. Open left cover1.
2. Remove paper.
3. Close cover.
JAM 30
Metric specifications
Paper misfeed.
Careful for Drum.
1. Open left cover1.
2. Remove paper.
3. Close cover.
JAM 30
NOTE
The drum area inside the copier is extremely sensitive to dirt and
damage. When removing the jammed paper, be sure not to touch the
drum area that is located inside the machine with your hands, or with
jewelry such as watches and rings, etc.
CAUTION
The copier’s fixing unit is extremely hot. Take
sufficient care when working in this area, as there is
a danger of getting burned.
1
Pull up the left cover 1 handle to open the left cover 1.
5
Close the left cover 1.
9-5
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING
• Misfeed in left cover 1 (JAM 05)
If the message below appears, a misfeed has occurred in the left
cover 1. Remove the misfed paper using the procedure given below.
3
Raise the duplex unit to remove the misfed paper.
4
Remove the misfed paper in the output section.
Inch specifications
Paper misfeed.
Careful for Drum.
1. Open left cover1.
2. Remove paper.
3. Close cover.
JAM 05
Metric specifications
Paper misfeed.
Careful for Drum.
1. Open left cover1.
2. Remove paper.
3. Close cover.
JAM 05
NOTE
The drum area inside the copier is extremely sensitive to dirt and
damage. When removing the jammed paper, be sure not to touch the
drum area that is located inside the machine with your hands, or with
jewelry such as watches and rings, etc.
1
CAUTION
Pull up the left cover 1 handle to open the left cover 1.
The copier’s fixing unit is extremely hot. Take
sufficient care when working in this area, as there is
a danger of getting burned.
5
2
9-6
Remove the misfed paper.
Close the left cover 1.
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING
6
Press the [Start] key after the “Press Start Key. Re-starting.”
message appears.
If the message below appears, proceed to the next step.
9
Inch specifications
Paper misfeed.
When the optional Fax Kit is installed, the message below
appears. Perform the appropriate action by following the
message.
Inch specifications
Careful for Drum.
System error.
Disconnect power plug from the socket.
1. Open left cover1.
2. Remove paper.
3. Close cover.
11x81/2"
Plain
81/2x11"
Color
11x81/2"
Plain
11x81/2"
Recycled
APS
Bypass
Plain
11x81/2"
1-Sided
Sort
JAM 05
Metric specifications
Paper misfeed.
Metric specifications
Careful for Drum.
System error.
Disconnect power plug from the socket.
1. Open left cover1.
2. Remove paper.
3. Close cover.
Plain
Colour
Plain
APS
Bypass
Plain
1-Sided
Sort
Recycled
JAM 05
7
8
Repeat the steps 1 to 5.
The message below appears. Perform the appropriate action
by following the message.
• Misfeed in left cover 2 (JAM 18, 22)
If the message below appears, a misfeed has occurred in the left
cover 2. Remove the misfed paper using the procedure given below.
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Paper misfeed.
System error.
Main switch off / on.
1. Open left cover2.
2. Remove paper.
3. Close cover.
11x81/2"
Plain
81/2x11"
Color
11x81/2"
Plain
11x81/2"
Recycled
APS
Bypass
Plain
11x81/2"
1-Sided
Sort
JAM 18
Metric specifications
Metric specifications
Paper misfeed.
System error.
Main switch off / on.
1. Open left cover 2.
2. Remove paper.
3. Close cover.
Plain
Colour
Plain
APS
Bypass
Plain
1-Sided
Sort
JAM 18
Recycled
1
Open the left cover 2.
9-7
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING
2
Remove the misfed paper.
3
Close the left cover 2.
2
Pull up the lever to remove the misfed paper.
If the misfed paper cannot be removed, go to the next step.
3
Pull up the left cover 1 handle to open the left cover 1.
4
Remove the misfed paper.
5
Raise the duplex unit to remove the misfed paper.
If the misfed paper cannot be removed, go to the next step.
• Misfeed in multi-bypass tray (JAM14, 20, 21, 23)
If the message below appears, a misfeed has occurred in the multibypass tray.
Remove the misfed paper using the procedure given below.
Inch specifications
Paper misfeed.
1. Remove paper in bypass.
2. Open left cover1.
3. Remove paper.
4. Open front cover if you can not remove paper.
5. Turn right the green knob.
6. Remove paper.
7. Close the cover.
Metric specifications
Paper misfeed.
1. Remove paper in bypass.
2. Open left cover 1.
3. Remove paper.
4. Open front cover if you can not remove paper.
5. Turn green knob clockwise.
6. Remove paper.
7. Close cover.
1
9-8
Remove all the paper remaining in the multi-bypass tray.
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING
6
Open the front cover.
10
Open the internal tray cover to remove the misfed paper.
7
Turn the knob clockwise to release the misfed paper from the
internal tray section.
11
If the paper has been torn, remove the internal tray.
8
12
Remove the misfed paper.
Remove the misfed paper.
If the misfed paper cannot be removed, go to the next step.
13
Replace the internal tray in its original position.
Close the front cover.
9
Pull out the internal tray.
9-9
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING
2 Misfeed in Document Processor (optional) (JAM 70 to 76)
If the message below appears, a misfeed has occurred in the
Document Processor. Remove the misfed original using the procedure
given below.
3
If the misfed original is found, remove it.
* If paper is torn during removal, be sure to remove all loose
scraps from inside the copier, or they could cause misfeed
later.
4
Raise the reversing unit.
5
If the misfed original is found, remove it.
* If paper is torn during removal, be sure to remove all loose
scraps from inside the copier, or they could cause misfeed
later.
6
Turn the left knob to eject and remove the misfed original.
7
Close the Document Processor original cover.
Inch specifications
Paper misfeed.
1. Open the document processor.
2. Raise the reverse unit up.
3. Turn the left dial.
4. Remove original(s).
5. Close Document processor.
JAM 73
Metric specifications
Paper misfeed.
1. Open document processor.
2. Raise reverse unit up.
3. Turn dial left.
4. Remove original (s).
5. Close Document processor.
JAM 73
1
2
9-10
If the original is on the original table, remove it.
Open the Document Processor original cover.
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING
3 Misfeed in Built-in Finisher (optional) (JAM 80 to 84)
If the message below appears, a misfeed has occurred in the Built-in
Finisher. Remove the misfed paper using the procedure below.
3
Remove the misfed paper.
4
Raise the Built-in Finisher tray back into its original position.
5
Remove the tray.
Inch specifications
Paper misfeed.
1. Remove any paper in output part of Finisher
2. Pull the tray of finisher down.
3. Remove the paper if there is a paper.
4. Set the tray
JAM 84
Paper misfeed.
Careful for Drum.
1. Lower inner tray of finisher.
2. Remove the paper.
3. Remove the eject tray, open left cover of machine.
4. Remove the paper.
5. Close cover and set the tray.
JAM 83
Metric specifications
Paper misfeed.
1. Remove any paper in output part of Finisher.
2. Put Finisher tray down.
3. Remove any paper.
4. Set tray back.
JAM 84
Paper misfeed.
Careful for Drum.
1. Put inner tray of Finisher down.
2. Remove any paper.
3. Remove output tray, open left cover of machine.
4. Remove paper.
5. Close cover and set tray.
3
JAM 83
1
NOTE
The drum area inside the copier is extremely sensitive to dirt and
damage. When removing the jammed paper, be sure not to touch the
drum area that is located inside the machine with your hands, or with
jewelry such as watches and rings, etc.
1
Remove the misfed paper in the Built-in Finisher output
section.
2
Lower the Built-in Finisher tray.
2
6
Pull up the left cover 1 handle to open the left cover 1.
9-11
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING
7
Remove the misfed paper.
8
Install the tray.
9
Close the left cover 1.
4 Misfed in Document Finisher (optional) (JAM 80 to 89)
If a misfeed has occurred in the Document Finisher, remove the
misfed paper referring to the Operation Guide for the Document
Finisher.
9-12
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING
4. If other trouble occurs
If trouble occurs with your copier, carry out the applicable checkpoints and procedures indicated on the following pages.
If the trouble persists, contact your service representative or authorized service center.
Trouble
Checkpoint
Procedure
Reference
page
Nothing lights on the
operation panel when the
power switch is turned ON.
Is the power plug connected to an AC
outlet?
Connect the plug to an AC outlet.
——
No copies come out when
the [Start] key is pressed.
Is there any message appearing on the
message display?
Perform the corrective action corresponding
to the message.
9-1
Copies come out blank.
Are the originals set correctly?
When setting originals on the platen, place
them face-down.
4-1
When setting originals in the optional
Document Processor, place them face-up.
8-2
Is the copier in the auto exposure
mode?
To change the overall exposure, perform the
auto exposure adjustment.
7-73
Is the copier in the manual exposure mode?
Adjust the exposure to the correct degree
using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
4-2
To change the overall exposure, perform the
exposure adjustment for the each copy
quality mode.
7-75
7-76
7-77
Is the add toner message displayed?
Replace the toner container.
10-3
Is paper wet?
Replace the paper with new paper.
3-1
-
Copies come out too light.
9-13
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING
Trouble
Procedure
Reference
page
Is the copier in the auto exposure mode?
To change the overall exposure, perform the
auto exposure adjustment.
7-73
Is the copier in the manual exposure mode?
Adjust the exposure to the correct degree
using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
4-2
To change the overall exposure, perform the
exposure adjustment for the each copy
quality mode.
7-75
7-76
7-77
Clean the platen and/or the original cover.
10-1
Open the front cover and pull and push back
in the cleaning shaft.
10-5
Is the transfer roller contaminated?
Clean the transfer roller with the cleaning
brush.
10-2
Are the originals set correctly?
When setting originals on the platen, align
their edges with the correct original size
scale for their size.
4-1
When setting originals in the optional
Document Processor, adjust the original
insertion guides to the size of the originals
correctly.
8-2
Is the paper set correctly in the
drawer[cassette]?
Set paper properly.
3-1
Is paper curled, folded or wrinkled?
Replace the paper with new paper.
3-1
Is there any misfed paper or loose scraps of
paper remaining inside the copier?
Carry out the appropriate procedure to
remove the paper.
9-4
Copies are wrinkled.
Is the separation in the paper feed section
dirty?
Clean the separator.
10-1
Black or white lines appear
on the copy.
Is the electrostatic section dirty?
Open the front cover and pull and push back
in the cleaning shaft.
10-5
Copies come out too dark.
Copies are dirty.
Copy image is askew.
Misfeed occurs frequently.
9-14
Checkpoint
Is the platen or the original cover dirty?
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION
INFORMATION
1. Cleaning the copier
NOTE
CAUTION
For safety purposes, ALWAYS remove the power
plug from the outlet when performing cleaning
operations.
When the slit glass becomes dirty, “Clean the slit glass for original fed
from DP.” [“Clean the slit glass for original fed.”] may appear. In this
case, perform the cleaning operation on the slit glass and then touch
the “End” key.
Inch specifications
Clean the slit glass for original fed from DP.
● Cleaning the original cover
Open the document processor.
Clean the surface of narrower glass
located at left with a dry cloth.
Please close the document processor.
Press END key
Lift open the original cover. Wipe the back side of the original cover
with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or a mild detergent.
* Never use thinner or other organic solvents for this purpose.
If the slit glass is dirty, black line
will appear on the copy.
End
Metric specifications
Clean the slit glass for original fed.
Open the document processor.
Clean the surface of narrower glass
located at left with a dry cloth.
Please close the document processor.
Press END key
If the slit glass is dirty, black line
will appear on the copy.
End
● Cleaning the platen
Lift open the original cover. Wipe the platen with a soft cloth
dampened with alcohol or a mild detergent.
* Never use thinner or other organic solvents for this purpose.
● Cleaning the separator
NOTE
To keep the best copying quality, perform cleaning periodically
(approximately once a month) using the following procedure.
1
Open the front cover.
* If soiling, such as black lines appear on the copy while using the
optional Document Processor, the slit glass a is soiled.
Wipe the slit glass with a soft dry cloth.
* Never use water, thinner, organic solvents or alcohol.
a
10-1
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION
2
3
4
5
10-2
Remove the blue cleaning brush.
● Cleaning the transfer roller
1
Open the front cover.
2
Remove the blue cleaning brush.
3
Pull up the left cover 1 handle to open the left cover 1.
4
While rotating the gear as shown, clean the transfer roller by
moving the cleaning brush from left to right along with the
transfer roller.
5
Once the cleaning operation is completed, return the
cleaning brush to the copier and close both the left cover 1
and the front cover.
Pull up the left cover 1 handle to open the left cover 1.
Clean the separator by moving the cleaning brush from left
and right several times along the separator as shown in the
illustration.
Once the cleaning operation is completed, return the
cleaning brush to the copier and close both the left cover 1
and the front cover.
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION
2. Replacing the toner container and waste toner box
If “Add toner to resume copying.” appears on the message display,
replenish the toner. Although several copies can be made after the
message appears, it is recommended that you replace the toner
container immediately. After replacing the toner container, be sure to
also replace the waste toner box.
Also be sure to clean the related parts when you replace a toner
container. Dirty parts can cause lower performance by your copier.
2
Push up the toner container release lever and slowly pull the
old toner container out until the handle can be seen.
IMPORTANT!
• Replenish toner only when the message is displayed.
• When replacing a toner container, do not leave any items such as
floppy disks, etc., nearby.
Inch specifications
WARNING
Paper Size Set
11x81/2"
Ready to copy.
Add toner to resume copying.
Combine
11x81/2"
Plain
Orig.image
quality
1
8 /2x11"
Color
11x81/2"
Plain
11x81/2"
Recycled
Basic
AMS
APS
Bypass
Plain
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
User choice
Function
Sort:Off
Sort:On
Reduce
/Enlarge
Reduce
/Enlarge
High voltage is present in the charger section. Take
sufficient care when working in this area, as there is
a danger of electrical shock.
Sort/
Finished
Adding
toner
Program
CAUTION
Metric specifications
Paper Size
Ready to copy.
Set
Add toner to resume copying.
Merge copy
Image
quality
Plain
Colour
Plain
Bypass
Plain
Auto
Exposure
Exposure
mode
Recycled
Basic
AMS
APS
User choice
Function
Sort:Off
Sort:On
Reduce/
Enlarge
Do not pull the toner container all the way as it can
fall off.
Reduce/
Enlarge
Sort/
Finished
Program
Adding
toner
3
Grasp the handle on the toner container, push the left cover
1 handle up again and gently lift the toner container.
CAUTION
DO NOT attempt to incinerate the toner container or
the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause
burns.
CAUTION
DO NOT attempt to force open or destroy the toner
container or the waste toner box.
1
Open the front cover.
10-3
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION
4
Take out the new toner container from the bag, and then tap
it on the top 5 to 6 times.
5
Thoroughly shake the toner container (in the direction of the
arrow) ten times or more to loosen and mix the toner inside.
6
Grasp the handle on the toner container and insert the toner
container along the rail of the copier.
8
Remove the waste toner box.
9
Close the opening of the waste toner box with its seal.
CAUTION
DO NOT attempt to incinerate the toner container or
the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause
burns.
CAUTION
DO NOT attempt to force open or destroy the toner
container or the waste toner box.
7
10-4
Hold the toner container by hands and fully insert it into the
copier.
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION
<Cleaning the related parts>
10
Push the electrostatic section (with the blue handle) to the
right and then pull it out about 2 inches (5 cm).
11
Remove the cap from the grid cleaner.
13
Pull the electrostatic section out as far as it will go and then
push it back into the copier to a point just BEFORE the roller
A touches the white pad of the grid cleaner.
Repeat this step a few times.
IMPORTANT!
DO NOT push the electrostatic section all the way back into the copier
in this step as that may result in problems appearing in the printed
images.
12
14
With the electrostatic section pulled out about 2 inches
(5 cm), remove the grid cleaner and then push the
electrostatic section all the way back into the copier.
15
Fit the new waste toner box into the copier.
Attach the grid cleaner to the machine body aligning with the
notches.
10-5
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION
16
Gently pull out the cleaning shaft (with the green handle) as
far as it will go and then push it back into the copier.
Repeat this step a few times.
19
Clean the separator by moving the cleaning brush from left
and right several times along the separator as shown in the
illustration.
20
Once the cleaning operation is completed, return the
cleaning brush to the copier and close both the left cover 1
and the front cover.
2
1
IMPORTANT!
Do not pull the cleaning shaft with force or pull it out completely.
17
Remove the blue cleaning brush.
IMPORTANT!
Wait about 5 minutes after the cleaning operation is completed for the
electrostatic section to dry before attempting to start copying again.
NOTE
18
Pull up the left cover 1 handle to open the left cover 1.
To keep the best copying quality, perform cleaning of steps 15 and 18
described above periodically (approximately once a month) in addition
to the time of toner container replacement.
● After use, ALWAYS dispose of the toner container
and the waste toner box in accordance with
Federal, State and Local rules and regulations.
10-6
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION
3. Specifications
Type ...............................................................................
Original table ..................................................................
Copying system ..............................................................
Originals .........................................................................
Copy sizes ......................................................................
Copying speed ...............................................................
Warm-up time .................................................................
First copy time ................................................................
Zoom ratio ......................................................................
Standard amount of memory .........................................
Resolution ......................................................................
Paper feed system .........................................................
Copy paper .....................................................................
Continuous copying ........................................................
Light source ...................................................................
Developing system .........................................................
Fixing system .................................................................
Cleaning system ............................................................
Photoconductor ..............................................................
Standard functions and modes ......................................
Desk-top
Fixed type
Indirect electrostatic
Sheets, books and 3-dimensional objects (Maximum original size: 11" x 17"/A3)
Drawers[Cassettes]: 11" x 17" / A3, 8 1/2" x 14" / B4 (257 mm x 364 mm), 11" x 8 1/2" / A4,
8 1/2" x 11" / A4R, 5 1/2" x 8 1/2" / A5R, 8 1/2" x 13", Folio, 8K and 16K,
B5, and B5R (Asia Pacific specification copiers)
Multi-bypass tray: 11" x 17" / A3, 8 1/2" x 14" / B4 (257 mm x 364 mm), 11" x 8 1/2" / A4,
8 1/2" x 11" / A4R, 5 1/2" x 8 1/2" / A5R, A6R, 8 1/2" x 13", Folio, 8K and 16K,
B5, and B5R (Asia Pacific specification copiers)
For 2-sided copying: 11" x 17" / A3 – 5 1/2" x 8 1/2" / A5R
Print margin loss: 0.5 mm – 5.5 mm
30 cpm copiers: Same-size copying/memory copying;
11" x 17"/A3: 20 copies/min., 8 1/2" x 14"/B4: 20 copies/min., 11" x 8 1/2"/A4: 30 copies/min.,
8 1/2" x 11"/A4R: 22 copies/min., B5: 30 copies/min., B5R: 18 copies/min.
40 cpm copiers: Same-size copying/memory copying;
11” x 17”/A3: 23 copies/min., 8 1/2" x 14"/B4: 23 copies/min., 11" x 8 1/2"/A4: 40 copies/min.,
8 1/2" x 11"/A4R: 27 copies/min., B5: 40 copies/min., B5R: 22 copies/min.
50 cpm copiers: Same-size copying/memory copying;
11” x 17”/A3: 26 copies/min., 8 1/2" x 14"/B4: 26 copies/min., 11" x 8 1/2"/A4: 50 copies/min.,
8 1/2" x 11"/A4R: 31 copies/min., B5: 50 copies/min., B5R: 24 copies/min.
Within 25 seconds (at room temperature of 73.4°F (23°C), humidity 50%RH)
From Low power mode: Within 12 seconds
30 cpm copiers: From 3.9 seconds (11" x 8 1/2"/A4)
40 cpm copiers, 50 cpm copiers: From 3.5 seconds (11" x 8 1/2"/A4)
Any ratio between 25 and 400% (in increments of 1%). Alternatively, standard ratios.
64 MB
Reading: 600 x 600 dpi
Writing: 600 x 600 dpi
Automatic feeding from drawers[cassettes] (2 drawers[cassettes], capacity 500 sheets each
[80 g/m2/standard paper specified by our company]), automatic feeding from multi-bypass
(capacity 200 sheets [80g/m2])
<Paper weights>
Drawers[Cassettes]: 60 g/m2 – 105 g/m2
Duplex Unit: 64 g/m2 – 80 g/m2
Multi-bypass tray: 45 g/m2 – 200 g/m2; 110 lbs.
<Paper types>
Drawers[Cassettes]: Standard copy paper and color paper
Duplex Unit: Standard copy paper and color paper
Multi-bypass tray: Standard copy paper, letterhead, color paper, tracing paper,
OHP transparencies, envelopes, etc.
1 – 999 sheets
Rare gas lamp
Dry process
Heat roller
Blade and cleaning roller
a-Si
Auto paper selection mode, Image quality selection, Auto magnification selection mode,
Zoom mode, Preset zoom mode, XY zoom mode, 2-sided copy modes, Page separation/
Split copy modes, Margin mode, Centering/Image shift mode, Memo mode, Border erase
modes, Combine/Merge Copy modes, Print page numbers mode, Form overlay mode,
Booklet/Stitching mode, Book to Booklet mode, Sort/Finished mode, Auto rotation function,
Cover mode, Transparency + backing sheet mode, Invert mode, Mirror image mode, Proof
mode, Repeat copy mode*, Batch scanning mode, Eco print mode, Program function, Job
build mode, Form registration*, Shared data box*, Synergy print boxes*, Copy management
mode, Language selection function
* Requires the optional Hard Disk
10-7
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION
Power source ................................................................. Inch specifications: 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 12 A Max.
Metric specifications: 220-240 V AC, 50 or 60 Hz, 6.5 A Max.
Dimensions .................................................................... 23"(W) x 25 2/5"(D) x 29 1/3"(H)
585 mm (W) x 646 mm (D) x 745 mm (H)
Weight ............................................................................ Approx. 165 lbs.
Approx. 82 kg
Noise emission ............................................................... <
= 70dB (A)
Required space .............................................................. 23"(W) x 25 2/5"(D)
585 mm (W) x 646 mm (D)
Optional equipment ........................................................ Document Processor, Paper Feeder, Document Finisher, Bult-in Finisher, Job Separator,
Hard Disk, Key Counter, Document Tray, Printer Kit, Printer/Scanner Kit, Fax Kit
(Specifications are subject to change without notice.)
10-8
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION
4. Environmental Specifications
● Power consumption
30 cpm copiers
40 cpm copiers
50 cpm copiers
Inch
specifications
Metric
specifications
Inch
specifications
Metric
specifications
Inch
specifications
Metric
specifications
• During copying
670 wh or less
670 wh or less
685 wh or less
685 wh or less
720 wh or less
760 wh or less
• During standby
175 wh or less
200 wh or less
175 wh or less
200 wh or less
175 wh or less
200 wh or less
• During the Low Power mode
75 wh or less
75 wh or less
75 wh or less
75 wh or less
75 wh or less
75 wh or less
• Recovery time from the Low Power
mode
12 seconds or
less
12 seconds or
less
12 seconds or
less
12 seconds or
less
12 seconds or
less
12 seconds or
less
• During the Off and Sleep mode
0.1 wh or less
0.1 wh or less
0.1 wh or less
0.1 wh or less
0.1 wh or less
0.1 wh or less
• Transition time to the Low Power
mode (at time of purchase)
15 minutes
15 minutes
15 minutes
15 minutes
15 minutes
15 minutes
• Transition time to the Off and Sleep
modes (at time of purchase)
60 minutes
60 minutes
60 minutes
60 minutes
60 minutes
60 minutes
0.1 wh or less
0.1 wh or less
0.1 wh or less
0.1 wh or less
0.1 wh or less
0.1 wh or less
• During the Plugged-In mode
* Power consumption in the Plugged-In mode can only be terminated by removing the power plug from the outlet.
● Duplex (2-sided) copying
• Comes as standard equipment
● Paper feed
• Recycled paper made from 100% recycled pulp may be used with this product.
* Contact your sales or service representative for information on recommended paper types, etc.
10-9
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION
5. Installing the optional equipment
This section shows where to install the optional units for this copier. For more details, refer to the Operation Guide for the corresponding optional
unit.
● Available optional units
The following optional units can be installed on your copier.
Document
Processor
Original Cover
Key Counter
Document Tray
Printer/Scanner Kit
Printer Kit
Hard Disk
Fax Kit
Document
Finisher
Document
Finisher
10-10
Paper Feeder
Document
Finisher
Paper Feeder
Built-in Finisher
Job Separator
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION
Document Processor
The Duplex Document Processor automatically feeds one-sided originals one by one for scanning. It also reverses two-sided originals automatically
for duplex copying and page separation copying.
Paper Feeder
Two Paper Feeders of the same type as drawer[cassette] in the main body can be added.
Capacity and the paper loading method is the same as those for the standard drawer[cassette] in the main unit.
Paper Feeder
The Paper Feeder holds up to 3,000 sheets of 11" x 8 1/2" [A4 or B5 (B5 is for Asia-Pacific specification copiers only)] size standard paper.
Pull the Paper Feeder out towards you as far as it will go, and then load up to 1,500 sheets of paper in each rows.
Document Finisher
This unit lets you store a large volume of copies and shifts the position of each copy set for ease of sorting. It can staple finished copy sets and bind
them. It is also possible to use the Document Finisher to punch holes in them for filling purposes (optional).
Document Finisher
The Document Finisher stores a large quantity copies, and sorts multiple sets by shifting the position that each one is ejected. It is also possible to
use the Document Finisher to staple the copy sets or punch holes in them for filling purposes.
Document Finisher
The Document Finisher stores a large quantity copies, and sorts multiple sets (Sort: ON) or groups copies made from multiple originals, with all the
copies produced from an individual original grouped together in one set (Sort: OFF). It is also possible to use the Document Finisher to staple sorted
copy sets.
Built-in Finisher
The finisher stores a large quantity of copies. It can also sorts multiple copies into sets by shifting the eject position. Paginated copies can be
stapled, too.
Job Separator
When using the optional printer function, the paper eject point can be changed according to the used function, making it easier to sort paper. Copied
-paper can be ejected to the Job Separator (upper section). See “Copy eject location” in Machine default setting on page 7-49.
Hard Disk
The Hard Disk is required in order to use the following modes and functions of your copier.
• Job reservation
• Form overlay of registered forms
• Repeat copying
• Document management functions
• Using the output management functions to change the job printing order, cancel and delete print jobs, and verify content
It is also possible to register up to 1000 department ID-codes under document management.
Key Counter
The Key Counter determines the number of copies that have been made. It is useful for copier centralized management on a department or even
company level.
Document Tray
The Document Tray lets you place originals and other documents next to the machine before using them, etc. It also contains space for storing
paper clips, etc.
Printer Kit
If the Printer Kit is installed, this copier can be used as a printer.
Since the network board is equipped, this copier can also be used as a network printer, allowing access from multiple computers.
Printer/Scanner Kit
If the Printer/Scanner Kit is installed, this copier can be used as a printer or a network scanner.
Since the network board is equipped, this copier can also be used as a network printer, allowing access from multiple computers.
Fax Kit
If the Fax Kit is installed, this copier can be used as a fax. Also if the Fax Kit is used together with the optional Printer/Scanner Kit, this copier can be
used as a network fax, allowing transmission and reception by a computer.
10-11
Appendix: Functions and settings combination chart
This copier contains many different functions and settings, and many of them can be used in combination for more efficient copying.
Refer to the following chart for details on combining specific functions and settings.
: Combination is possible
---: Combination is NOT possible
01: Auto exposure adjustment is not available for the photo
mode. The text&photo mode, the text mode, or manual
exposure adjustment will be selected.
02: Only the auto magnification selection mode is available.
That mode will be selected.
03: Only same size (100% [1:1]) copying in the auto paper
selection mode is available. That mode will be selected.
04: The margin mode cannot be used in combination with
the booklet/stitching mode or the book to booklet mode.
05: The margin mode cannot be used in combination with
the combine/merge copy modes or the memo mode.
06: The border erase modes cannot be used in
combination with original size selection (input size).
07: The border erase modes and the auto selection/filing
mode cannot be used in combination with each other.
08: The book erase mode and the booklet/stitching mode
cannot be used in combination with each other.
09: Not available because open-faced originals must be set
with the top edge towards the rear of the platen.
10: The booklet/stitching mode and book to booklet mode
will be given second priority when the 2-sided copy
modes or the page separation/split copy modes are
selected.
11: The transparency + backing sheet mode and the 2sided copy modes cannot be used in combination with
each other.
12: Cannot be used in combination with the auto selection/
filing mode.
13: The 2-sided copy modes and the invert mode cannot
be used in combination with each other.
14: Open-faced originals cannot be used in combination
with original size selection.
15: The book g page separation/split copy mode cannot be
used in combination with the combine/merge copy
modes or the memo mode.
Function selected second
Function selected first
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
%
^
&
*
(
)
⁄
¤
‹
›
ﬁ
ﬂ
‡
—
·
‚
Œ
„
´
‰
ˇ
Á
¨
ˆ
Ø
∏
Å
Í
Î
Ï
˝
Ó
Ô

Ò
Ú
¸
˛
Ç
◊
ı
˜
Â
¯
˘
¿
¡
Image quality mode (text&photo)
Image quality mode (photo)
Image quality mode (text)
Copy exposure mode (auto exposure)
Copy exposure mode (manual exposure)
Eco print mode
Original size selection (standard size)
Original size selection (input size)
Original size selection (auto selection)
Original size selection (custom original size)
Same size (100% [1:1]) copying
XY zoom mode
Auto magnification selection mode
Zoom mode
Paper selection
Original set direction
Batch scanning mode
Auto rotation function
Auto selection/filing mode (auto selection)
Auto selection/filing mode (filing)
Proof mode
Repeat copy mode (settings)
Sort mode
Finished mode
Staple mode
Punch mode
2-sided copy modes (1 sidedR1 sided)
2-sided copy modes (1 sidedR2 sided)
2-sided copy modes (2 sidedR2 sided)
2-sided copy modes (BookR2 sided)
Page separation/Split copy modes (2 sidedR1 sided)
Page separation/Split copy modes (BookR1 sided)
Booklet/Stitching mode
Book to Booklet mode
Margin mode
Centering/Image shift mode
Border erase modes (Sheet erase)
Border erase modes (Individual border erase)
Border erase modes (Book erase)
Combine/Merge Copy modes
Memo mode
Form overlay mode
Cover mode
Transparency + backing sheet mode
Print page numbers mode
Invert mode
Mirror image mode
Interrupt copying
Document management functions (form registration)
Document management functions (shared data box [storing documents])
Document management functions (synergy print boxes [storing documents])
Document management functions (shared data box [printing out documents])
Document management functions (synergy print boxes [printing out documents])
Output management functions (interrupt print)
Repeat copy mode (print out)
Job build mode (Step 1)
Job build mode (from step 2)
Scanner functions (Scan to PC)
Scanner functions (Send E-mail)
Scanner functions (TWAIN)
Scanner functions (Database connection)
10-12
01
01
12 12
12 12
12
03
03
03
03
31
12
02
02
02
27
12 12
12 12
12 03 03 03 03 12
12 02 02
02
33
12
12
14 14
14
09
12 12
14 14
20
20
14
20
02
20 02 02
09
12 12
12 12
12 12
06
06
06
32
32
06
06
06
32
32
24
29
24
29
02
09
09
02
02
07
07
07
12
12
12
12
12
12
07
07
07
12
12
12
12
12
12
35
30
Appendix: Functions and settings combination chart
16: The book g page separation/split copy mode and the
transparency + backing sheet mode cannot be used in
combination with each other.
17: The print page numbers mode is only available in the
auto magnification selection mode.
18: Because a cover can be selected within the booklet/
stitching and book to booklet modes, they cannot be
used in combination with the cover mode.
19: The transparency + backing sheet mode and the cover
mode cannot be used in combination with each other.
20: The booklet/stitching and book to booklet modes
cannot be used in combination with original size
selection (input size).
21: The function selected second will be given priority and
original size selection (auto selection) will engage.
22: Cannot be used in combination with the punch mode.
23: The booklet/stitching and book to booklet modes
cannot be used in combination with the combine/merge
copy modes or the memo mode.
24: The cover mode cannot be used in combination with
original size selection (input size).
25: The cover mode cannot be used in combination with
the combine/merge copy modes or the memo mode.
26: The cover mode and the invert mode cannot be used in
combination with each other.
27: The function selected second will be given priority and
the function selected first will be canceled.
28: The transparency + backing sheet mode and the invert
mode cannot be used in combination with each other.
29: The transparency + backing sheet mode cannot be
used in combination with original size selection (input
size).
30: The transparency + backing sheet mode cannot be
used in combination with the sort/finished mode, the
staple mode or the punch mode.
31: The selected paper setting will be canceled in order to
switch to the auto paper selection mode.
32: The combine/merge copy modes and the memo mode
cannot be used in combination with original size
selection (input size).
33: Cannot be used in combination with the batch scanning
mode.
34: Cannot be used in combination with interrupt copying.
35: Not available in combination with the form overlay
mode.
™: Image quality (OCR)
Function selected second
Function selected first
14
14
14
14 21 21
14
14 21 21
02
02 02
06 06 06 32 32
24 29
06 06 06 32 32
24 29
02 02
02
12
12
09
09
12
12
12 12 12
12 12 12
09
09
07 07 07 12 12 12 12 12 12
07 07 07 12 12 12 12 12
34
35
27
27
27
22 22
10
10
10
10
10
22
22
10
10
10
10
10
10 10 10 10 10
10 10 10 10 10
30 30
13
13
13
15 35
16
23 35 18 11
23 35 18 11
05
13
13
15 15 35
04
04
04 04
11 11 11
08
15 23 23 05
15 23 23 05
35 35 35
18 18
16 11 11
13 13 13
13 13
15
15
35
11
11
11
15
08 23
23
05
35 25
35 25
35 35
25 25
19
19
27 27
26
28
34
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
%
^
&
*
(
)
⁄
¤
‹
›
ﬁ
ﬂ
‡
—
·
‚
Œ
„
´
‰
ˇ
Á
¨
ˆ
Ø
∏
Å
Í
Î
Ï
˝
Ó
Ô

Ò
Ú
¸
˛
Ç
◊
ı
˜
Â
¯
˘
¿
¡
Image quality mode (text&photo)
Image quality mode (photo)
Image quality mode (text)
Copy exposure mode (auto exposure)
Copy exposure mode (manual exposure)
Eco print mode
Original size selection (standard size)
Original size selection (input size)
Original size selection (auto selection)
Original size selection (custom original size)
Same size (100% [1:1]) copying
XY zoom mode
Auto magnification selection mode
Zoom mode
Paper selection
Original set direction
Batch scanning mode
Auto rotation function
Auto selection/filing mode (auto selection)
Auto selection/filing mode (filing)
Proof mode
Repeat copy mode (settings)
Sort mode
Finished mode
Staple mode
Punch mode
2-sided copy modes (1 sidedR1 sided)
2-sided copy modes (1 sidedR2 sided)
2-sided copy modes (2 sidedR2 sided)
2-sided copy modes (BookR2 sided)
Page separation/Split copy modes (2 sidedR1 sided)
Page separation/Split copy modes (BookR1 sided)
Booklet/Stitching mode
Book to Booklet mode
Margin mode
Centering/Image shift mode
Border erase modes (Sheet erase)
Border erase modes (Individual border erase)
Border erase modes (Book erase)
Combine/Merge Copy modes
Memo mode
Form overlay mode
Cover mode
Transparency + backing sheet mode
Print page numbers mode
Invert mode
Mirror image mode
Interrupt copying
Document management functions (form registration)
Document management functions (shared data box [storing documents])
Document management functions (synergy print boxes [storing documents])
Document management functions (shared data box [printing out documents])
Document management functions (synergy print boxes [printing out documents])
Output management functions (interrupt print)
Repeat copy mode (print out)
Job build mode (Step 1)
Job build mode (from step 2)
Scanner functions (Scan to PC)
Scanner functions (Send E-mail)
Scanner functions (TWAIN)
Scanner functions (Database connection)
10-13
10-14
Index
Copy eject location (machine default setting) ............................... 7-49
Copy limit (copy default setting) .................................................... 7-82
Copy management mode ................................................................ 7-1
Copying in the Hole Punch mode .................................................... 8-8
Numerics
Copying in the Sort:OFF mode ....................................................... 8-6
2 in 1 ............................................................................................. 5-13
Copying in the Sort:ON mode ......................................................... 8-5
2-sided copy modes ........................................................................ 5-1
Copying in the Staple mode ............................................................ 8-7
4 in 1 ............................................................................................. 5-13
Cover drawer[cassette] (copy default setting) ............................... 7-71
Cover mode ................................................................................... 5-31
A
Custom paper type for 2-sided copying
(machine default setting) ............................................................... 7-46
Accessing the copy default settings .............................................. 7-62
Customize screen layout (Add functions) (copy default setting) ... 7-86
Accessing the copy management menu screen ............................. 7-3
Customize screen layout (Main functions) (copy default setting) .. 7-85
Accessing the machine default settings ........................................ 7-41
Adjusting the copy exposure ........................................................... 4-2
At the end of copying ...................................................................... 4-4
Auto clear function .......................................................................... 2-4
Auto drawer[cassette] switching ON/OFF
(machine default setting) ............................................................... 7-42
D
Day & time (machine default setting) ............................................ 7-54
Default drawer[cassette] (copy default setting) ............................. 7-70
Default magnification ratio (copy default setting) .......................... 7-72
Auto exposure adjustment (copy default setting) .......................... 7-73
Default operation mode (machine default setting) ........................ 7-51
Auto exposure adjustment (OCR) (copy default setting) .............. 7-74
Default settings ............................................................................. 7-38
Auto low power function ................................................................. 4-11
Delete department ID-codes ......................................................... 7-16
Auto low power time (machine default setting) ............................. 7-48
Deleting a registered program ...................................................... 5-52
Auto magnification selection mode ................................................. 4-5
Deleting a registration key ............................................................ 5-55
Auto rotation function .................................................................... 5-30
Document Finisher .................................................................. 8-5, 8-9
Auto Rotation mode ON/OFF (copy default setting) ..................... 7-79
Document management functions .................................................. 6-1
Auto selection mode ....................................................................... 8-3
Document Processor ...................................................................... 8-1
Auto selection/Filing mode .............................................................. 8-3
Document Tray .............................................................................. 8-12
Auto sleep function ........................................................................ 4-11
Drawer[Cassette] ............................................................................ 3-2
Auto sleep ON/OFF (machine default setting) .............................. 7-57
Drum refresh ................................................................................. 7-91
Auto sleep time (machine default setting) ..................................... 7-47
Automatic drawer[cassette] switching function ............................... 2-4
E
Eco print mode .............................................................................. 5-48
B
Eco print mode ON/OFF (copy default setting) ............................. 7-66
Background exposure adjustment (copy default setting) .............. 7-67
Editing copy management information ............................................ 7-4
BASIC OPERATION ....................................................................... 4-1
Enlarging/reducing the copy image ................................................. 4-5
Batch scanning mode ................................................................... 5-47
Entering characters ..................................................................... 7-104
Book erase mode ........................................................................... 5-11
Environmental specifications ........................................................ 10-9
Book to Booklet mode ................................................................... 5-26
Erased border width (copy default setting) ................................... 7-81
Booklet/Stitching mode ................................................................. 5-22
Exposure adjustment step (copy default setting) .......................... 7-64
Border erase modes ...................................................................... 5-11
Exposure mode (copy default setting) .......................................... 7-63
Box management default settings ................................................. 7-94
Built-in Finisher ............................................................................... 8-9
F
Fax eject location (machine default setting) .................................. 7-50
C
Fax Kit ........................................................................................... 8-12
CAUTION LABELS ......................................................................... 1-1
Filing mode ..................................................................................... 8-4
Centering/Image shift mode ............................................................ 5-8
Form overlay mode ....................................................................... 5-20
Changing a registered program name .......................................... 5-51
Form registration ............................................................................. 6-1
Changing the copy management default settings ......................... 7-25
Changing the energy-saving mode (machine default setting) ....... 7-58
H
Changing the management code (machine default setting) ......... 7-56
Hard Disk ...................................................................................... 8-11
Checking the copy management counts ....................................... 7-21
Hard disk management ................................................................. 7-99
Checking the total counter and printing out the counter report ..... 7-93
How to set originals in the Document Processor ............................ 8-2
Cleaning the copier ....................................................................... 10-1
Cleaning the original cover ........................................................... 10-1
Cleaning the platen ....................................................................... 10-1
Cleaning the separator .................................................................. 10-1
Cleaning the transfer roller ............................................................ 10-2
Combine/Merge Copy modes ....................................................... 5-13
COPIER MANAGEMENT ................................................................ 7-1
Copy default settings ..................................................................... 7-59
I
O
If one of the following messages is displayed ................................. 9-1
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 8-1
If one of these indicators lights or flashes ....................................... 9-3
Original quality (copy default setting) ............................................ 7-65
If other trouble occurs ................................................................... 9-13
Original set direction ..................................................................... 5-49
Individual border erase mode ....................................................... 5-12
Original size registration ............................................................... 7-90
Initial mode ...................................................................................... 2-4
Original size selection ................................................................... 5-34
INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS .................................................... 1-2
Originals that can be used with the Document Processor .............. 8-1
Installing the optional equipment ................................................ 10-10
Output management functions ...................................................... 6-20
Interrupt copying ............................................................................. 4-9
Invert mode ................................................................................... 5-38
P
Page separation/Split copy modes .................................................. 5-4
J
Paper Feeder .................................................................................. 8-5
Job build mode .............................................................................. 5-57
Paper selection (copy default setting) ........................................... 7-68
Job reservation ............................................................................. 4-10
Paper size (drawer[cassette] No.1 - No.4)
(machine default setting) ............................................................... 7-43
Job Separator ............................................................................... 8-11
Paper type (auto paper selection mode) (copy default setting) ..... 7-69
K
Paper type (drawer[cassette] No.1 - No.4)
(machine default setting) ............................................................... 7-44
Key Counter .................................................................................. 8-12
Photo mode ..................................................................................... 4-3
Precautions for the use of Document Processor ............................. 8-1
L
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE ............................................................. 1-3
Language selection function ....................................................... 7-103
Preset zoom mode .......................................................................... 4-7
Loading paper ................................................................................. 3-1
Print page numbers mode ............................................................. 5-16
Low power mode ............................................................................ 4-11
“Print status” screen ...................................................................... 6-22
Printer Kit ...................................................................................... 8-12
M
Machine default settings ............................................................... 7-38
MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION .................... 10-1
Making copies when copy management is turned ON .................. 7-37
Printer/Scanner Kit ........................................................................ 8-12
Printing out with the repeat copy mode ......................................... 5-43
Program function ........................................................................... 5-50
Proof mode ................................................................................... 5-40
Making copy default settings ......................................................... 7-63
Making machine default settings ................................................... 7-42
R
Manual exposure adjustment (photo mode)
(copy default setting) ..................................................................... 7-77
Register new department ID-codes ................................................ 7-4
Manual exposure adjustment (text mode) (copy default setting) .. 7-76
Registering a function or mode under a function key .................... 5-53
Manual exposure adjustment (text+photo mode)
(copy default setting) ..................................................................... 7-75
Registering a program .................................................................. 5-50
Margin mode ................................................................................... 5-6
Registration keys ON/OFF (copy default setting) ......................... 7-84
Margin width (copy default setting) ............................................... 7-80
Repeat copy mode ........................................................................ 5-42
Memo mode .................................................................................... 5-9
Repeat copying ON/OFF (copy default setting) ............................ 7-83
Mirror image mode ........................................................................ 5-39
Report print out ........................................................................... 7-101
Registering a copy job for repeat copying ..................................... 5-42
Registration keys ........................................................................... 5-53
Misfed in Document Finisher ........................................................ 9-12
Misfeed in Built-in Finisher ............................................................. 9-11
Misfeed in Document Processor ................................................... 9-10
Misfeed in drawer[cassette] ............................................................ 9-4
Misfeed in left cover 1 ............................................................. 9-5, 9-6
Misfeed in left cover 2 ..................................................................... 9-7
Misfeed in multi-bypass tray ........................................................... 9-8
Misfeed in paper feed section ......................................................... 9-4
Multi-bypass tray ............................................................................. 3-3
Multi-bypass tray paper settings ................................................... 7-87
Multi-bypass tray settings display ON/OFF
(machine default setting) ............................................................... 7-45
S
Saving on toner use ...................................................................... 5-48
Selecting functions .......................................................................... 4-1
Selecting the image quality ............................................................. 4-3
Selecting the paper size .................................................................. 4-2
Separate front and back margin settings ........................................ 5-6
Setting an original ........................................................................... 4-1
Setting the Key Counter ................................................................ 8-12
Setting the number of copies to be made ....................................... 4-3
Shared data box .............................................................................. 6-4
Sheet erase mode ......................................................................... 5-11
N
NAMES OF PARTS ......................................................................... 2-1
Silent mode ON/OFF (machine default setting) ............................ 7-53
Sleep mode ................................................................................... 4-11
Sort/Finished mode ....................................................................... 5-29
Sort/Finished mode ON/OFF (copy default setting) ...................... 7-78
Special paper action setting (machine default setting) ............... 7-46-1
Specifications ................................................................................ 10-7
Start copying ................................................................................... 4-3
Synergy print boxes ........................................................................ 6-9
T
Text mode ........................................................................................ 4-3
Text+photo mode ............................................................................ 4-3
Time difference (machine default setting) ..................................... 7-55
Toner Container ............................................................................ 10-3
Touch panel sound ON/OFF (machine default setting) ................. 7-52
Transparency + backing sheet mode ............................................ 5-36
Turning the copy management function ON/OFF ......................... 7-25
U
Using programmed settings to make copies ................................. 5-51
W
Warm-up ......................................................................................... 4-1
Waste Toner Box ........................................................................... 10-3
When paper misfeeds ..................................................................... 9-4
X
XY zoom mode ................................................................................ 4-8
Z
Zoom mode ..................................................................................... 4-6
A1
* For best copy results and machine performance, we
recommend that you use only KYOCERA MITA original
supplies for your KYOCERA MITA copier.
©2003
http://www.kyoceramita.com
is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation
2003. 12
2FD80022C

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Download Kyocera 3035 Copier User Manual